Home

onlinecomponents.com

1. 6 Startup Bus topology for the DCBCP example DCBCP IBS 35 DCB I T Diagnostic Bit 126 0 1 127 7 register Parameter 128 0 1 129 7 Window 3 IW 200 202 OW 200 202 IBS IBS IBS IBS BS 21 24 DI AO1 24DO E E 20 0 21 7 OW 138 O 32 0 33 7 OW 136 IW 144 OW 134 IW 142 OW 132 IW 140 IBS IP DIO 1 24 F BS 11 O 28 0 28 7 28 0 28 7 IBS IP CBK 1 24 BS 22 IDI2 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 32 of Fees IBS IP CDO 1 24 F ren a F IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 1 30 0 30 7 Seeseeee 1D 10 BS 23 O29 0 29 7 saeseezee 31 0 31 7 BS 24 BS 25 IBS IBS IBS AI 3 Al 3 16 mE SSI s O46 0 47 7 O40 0 41 7 OW 170 47 0 47 7 38 0 39 7 ow 168 IW 100 OW 166 OW 164 IW 170 IW 168 IW 166 IW 164 5003B610 Figure 6 11 Exemplary I O address allocation for the DCBCP example controlled start logical addressing system start in the PLC s program or startup control via function blocks with additional PCP communication 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DCBCP software setting for controlled start DCBCP with log
2. IBS IBS IBS IBS BS 0 24 DI AO1 24 DO 32 0 33 7 OW 136 O 32 0 33 7 IW 136 IW 134 IW 132 IW 130 IBSIP DIO 1 24 F BS 1 A O 34 0 34 7 34 0 35 7 IBS IP CBK 1 24 BS 2 Ip42 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F oooooo o Qm IBS IP CDO 1 24 F eS ADS E IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 36 0 36 7 ue 1D 10 36 0 96 7 Bere i BS 3 BS 4 38 0 38 7 IBS 24 BK IBS IBS BS 6 l O T DI 32 AI 3 E CW O38 0 39 7 42 0 43 7 OW 144 40 0 41 7 44 0 45 7 OW 142 OW 140 OW 138 IW 144 IW 142 5003A603 IW 140 IW 138 Figure 6 6 Exemplary I O address allocation for the DCBPHY example automatic start with 6 10 PHCENIX CONTACT physical addressing 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DCBPHY software setting for automatic start with DCBPHY physical addressing a Short description of physical addressing When the controller board is started power up RESET physical addressing is activated in the automatic start mode The controller board puts the connected bus configuration into operation and assigns an I O address to every I O module The assignment of the PLC s address area depends on the window setting of the controller board The digital 1 O modules are put into the f
3. OB 20 21 22 SPA FB 210 FB 210 SPB FB60 FB 60 SPA FB 62 FB 62 FB 63 SPB FB 72 FB 72 SPA FB 66 FB 66 5003A612 c Schematized program example otartup Block FB 210 U M 80 ON M 8 0 S M 8 0 S M 10 0 LOOP U M 8 0 FEN3 AV 1 SPA FB62 CON IND UN M 80 M 10 0 858 0872 gt ADDRESS ID code list Bus segment list IN address list OUT address list SPA FB 68 gt REQ RES M 80 O M 10 0 SPB LOOP 5003B620 BUE PHCENIX CONTACT 6 43 online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup d Detailed program example with organization function and data blocks OB 205 210 22 COPA FB 210 NAME ANLAUF BE FB 210 wU M 80 ON M 8 0 M 8 0 Activation bit INITIB 5 M 10 0 ADDRESS L KY 20 22 CON IND REQ RES T MW 18 DB PCP header tables LOOP SU M 79 0 SPB FB 60 NAME AUN DLE LB IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block FEN3 KF 200 Base address of window 3 AV KF 1 Controlled start message enabled RRST DB 21 REQ RES standard DB CIST DB 23 CON IND standard DB RRMW KF 20 Activation word CIMW KF 22 Signal word CIFB FB 63 Auxiliary driver CON IND T T 0 Timer OTEP MB 9 Internal flag byte BUSY M 8 0 Activation bit TO M 8 1 Timeout RET M 8 2 Return value U M 3 ON M 2 gt SPB
4. 6 Startup Bus topology for the DCBEEP example DCBEEP IBS S5 DCB I T Diagnostic Bit 126 0 127 7 register Parameter 128 0 1129 7 Window 3 IW 200 202 OW 200 202 Functions Active bits O 60 0 61 7 Busy bits 62 0 63 7 Return bits 62 0 63 7 IBS IBS IBS BS 21 24 DI AO1 24 Ph 100 y 22 Ww WI 20 0 21 7 OW 138 55 0 35 7 IW 146 OW 136 IW 144 OW 134 IW 142 OW 132 IW 140 BS 11 IBS IP CBK 1 24 BS 22 IDi2 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F pote a LICET IBS IP CDO 1 24 F JH ees L DS a T 300 307 aee ID 10 29 0 29 7 10 99090000 a BS 23 310 317 BS 24 BS 25 11 IBS 24 BK IBS IBS BS 12 I O T DI 32 D D 14 222 e O46 0 47 OW 170 46 0 47 7 11 38 7 39 7 OW 168 OW 166 OW 164 IW 170 5003B608 IW 168 IW 166 IW 164 Figure 6 9 Exemplary I O address allocation for the DCBEEP example controlled start logical addressing system start during PLC startup or program control via memory card 5003B PHCENIX Pres CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DCBEEP software setting for controlled start DCBEEP with logical addressing for a system start during PLC startup or program control via memory card a Short description of logical addressing with EEPROM dur
5. 1 15 1 3 5 Local BUS eeeeeen O hene 1 16 1 3 6 INTERBUS S I O Modules 1 18 1 3 6 1 Remote Bus and Installation Remote Bus Modules 1 18 1 3 6 2 Local Bus Modules 1 18 2 Technical 850 2 1 2 1 Host Controller Board Method of 006 2 1 2 2 Application Area of the Host Controller Board 2 2 2 3 Overview _ KK saa ese RR RR ARR RR 2 3 2 3 1 Front Plate 00 0076 0168
6. BS 6 IW40 IW44 PW 146 IW 42 PW 144 PW 142 PW 140 5003A303 Figure 3 3 Physical addressing of the inputs DCB mode PW130 Diagnostic parameter register IW 30 Diagnostic bit register PHCENIX m CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces Outputs pis i B dd PW 162 2 ase address BU deo Window3 BS 0 PW 146 Length PW 144 PW 136 PW 142 m dide PW 140 id PW 138 PW 136 PW 134 Base andr PW 132 Window2 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F BS2 gieceece IBS IP CDI 1 24 F BS 3 B oooo 3 TIE IBS IP CDO 1 24 F BS 5 MT B IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 12 OB36 y 3896 JE BAN OW 38 IBS OW 36 24 DI 32 em x SSS Base addr OW 32 Window1 5003A304 Figure 3 4 Physical addressing of the outputs DCB mode PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User In
7. 2 36 2 6 5 2 Diferent Interrupt SO COS uscite stmt tuo URDU EU ATH tud den ugue ud etel Gus Fut dne bS aussen 2 38 2 6 6 Acknowledgment Delay Message 2 38 2 6 7 Disconnecting the RESET Button 2 39 2 7 8 229 2 40 50038 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX icd CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 Technical Description 2 1 Host Controller Board Operation The diagnostic controller board is an intelligent I O board for the PLC The host controller board is coupled to the PLC with the system connector and to INTERBUS S with the INTERBUS S remote bus connector A memory component MPM forms the interface between the PLC and INTERBUS S This memory allows to access the systems see Figure 2 1 To M 68xxx Processor INTERBUS S 4 IPMS Multi Port Memory Host Inter face To the PLC 5003A201 Figure 2 1 Host controller board components An effici
8. 8 116 8 4 5 4 Description of the Service Specific Error Messages 8 116 9 Commands and Messages 1 eee eeeeeee serere nennen nnns 9 1 9 1 Controller Board Commands cccccccseecceeseeeceeeeeceeseeseueeeseeeesuaeeeseeseesaes 9 5 9 1 1 Commands for Bus Operation 9 6 9 1 2 Commands Tor Configuration o 9 9 9 1 3 Commands for Error Recovery enne 9 18 9 1 4 Commands for System Control nnne 9 24 9 1 5 Commands Tor Addressing dn 9 25 9 1 6 Commands for Process Data Linkage 9 27 9 1 7 Commands for Event Processing
9. 8 101 8 4 2 6 UES PS US Sl e NEE E E E E E 8 101 8 4 2 7 feriat m 8 101 8 4 2 8 NUTS TOO OSU m T E 8 101 8 4 2 9 Abort Requ ES i etas dite pu pM dMM dM RUNE 8 102 PHCENIX iin CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 4 2 10 OAC CONTIN OF Es 8 102 8 4 2 11 Write Confirmation 8 102 8 4 2 12 OONA eee dean recede eee se menace 8 103 8 4 2 13 Slop COMME MAUNON MR ASNS 8 103 8 4 2 14 Status COD dl Ol asec aote UNI dO tnu RE ebaipeR UM TO MUNI e ud 8 103 8 4 2 15 Identify Confirmation nennen 8 104 8 4 2 16 20206 I SU MER MEDICI MS 8 104 8 4 2 17 Initiate Error Confirmation 8 104 8 4 3 Response MdicatiON T TEE 2 8 106 8 4 3 1 OMNES 8 106 8 4 3 2 260 ING 9298 OT 8 106 8 4 3 3 682 8 106 8 4 3 4 OPARA Oas e sreueins 8 106 8 4 3 5 Information Report Indication
10. 1 3 6 1 Hemote Bus and Installation Remote Bus Modules 1 3 6 2 Local Bus Modules Hmm 50038 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX SE CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview 1 System Overview INTERBUS S the high speed and universal sensor actuator bus system INTERBUS S shifts the I O level from a higher level control system directly to the machine or into the system A serial bus cable connects the control system with the I O modules in the system This reduces the cabling to a minimum as compared with conventional parallel cabling Ill I O signals ooo wired in parallel diii I O signals serially transferred with InterBus S 5001A101 Figure 1 1 Optimization of the transfer structure with INTERBUS S 1 1 Networking with INTERBUS S The constantly increasing degree of automation in general but also the more complex demands of production and process engineering require more and more powerful sensors and actuators for the specific applications Today already more than 200 device manufacturers support INTERBUS S as an open bus system with the most various products This enables the users to always select the most powerful and low cost
11. ae Hand Held i Monitor 5001A402 Figure 7 5 Connection possibilities of the HHM PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation PC boards IBS PC AT T 27 58 05 9 IBS PC AT I T 27 58 06 2 IBS PC CB COP I T 27 54 51 6 IBS PC CB I T 27 80 84 9 with monitor program of the suitable driver software IBS TS CC for Microsoft C 27 67 07 9 IBS TS TP for Borland Turbo Pascal 27 84 80 3 The respective monitor software provides the following services e Start up of an INTERBUS S system on the PC e Test of an INTERBUS S system on the PC e Control of the connected configuration e Address assignment of the I O words e Setting of outputs binary e Setting of output words hex e Displaying the input statuses binary and hex e Resetting the INTERBUS S system c IBS SYS SWT 27 80 88 1 and the connecting cable IBS PRG CAB 28 06 86 2 IBS SYS SWT provides the user interface of the controller board on the PC This allows to use the functions of the INTERBUS S controller board and the modules connected to INTERBUS without any additional programming expense The PC is coupled to the controller board through the serial interfaces of both devices The program functions in
12. 2 13 2 6 BEU a S eLllli0 Sus enetscvs emi te tute ia AE Ri Sixt Peto Le Prts Enn iuba De istis 2 19 2 6 1 Mounting Positions of the 06 3 2 19 2 6 2 Operation in the Central Controller and Controller Expansion Unit 2 20 2 6 3 Startup and Operating Mode Selection 2 21 2 6 3 1 INTERBUS S in the PLC s Address Area 2 28 2 6 3 2 Address Locations for Automatic Start in the DOB Mode 2 26 2 6 3 3 Address Locations for Controlled Start in the DCB Mode 2 27 2 6 3 4 Address Locations for Automatic Start in the DAB Mode 2 28 2 6 3 5 Address Locations for Controlled Start in the DAB Mode 2 29 2 6 4 Adare SS VVITICIOWS aanisneteicun iei uide ui pianMR MEM S d XC MPO MS C e UIS NN 2 30 2 6 5 Interrupt Processing UG ER Gar 2 36 2 6 5 1 Settings for Interrupt Processing
13. 8 55 8 2 3 2 Software Revision FKT 1 nnne 8 55 8 2 3 3 Switch Information FKT 2 K4 V 8 56 8 2 3 4 INTERBUS S Cycle Counter FKT 3 8 56 8 2 3 5 Logical Address Error FKT 4 8 57 8 2 4 ONOFF was eee 8 58 8 2 4 1 GIG ON WE omo Ww UTE 8 60 8 2 4 2 98 dad dq 8 60 8 2 4 3 BK Alar m ON FKT 2 S C Xv 8 60 8 2 4 4 BK Alarm OFF FIAT 39 NAM gle rr io tee nem ones 8 61 8 2 4 5 EVEMON ERT A 8 61 8 2 4 6 Event OFF FKT 5 48 8 61 8 2 5 ADDRESS FB 72 ic M Miri eiae e orte eei erba irii 8 62 8 2 5 1 ME LOGS LAS Use E 8 66 8 2 5 2 Bus Segment Address4MliSi 8 67 8 2 5 3 IN Address List 8 amp 8 68 8 2 5 4 OUT Address CT E E 8 69 8 2 5
14. 8 107 8 4 3 6 Read 02 0 Nb Nee 8 107 8 4 3 7 Wre MACA UON PNEU aarda 8 107 8 4 3 8 Initiate Indication A nn 8 108 8 4 3 9 Head Response nennen gif nnns 8 108 8 4 3 10 Write Response Di 8 108 8 4 3 11 Start Response vere 5 8 109 8 4 3 12 Stop RESPONSE UM 8 109 8 4 4 Application of Communication enne 8 110 8 4 5 Communication Error 8 2068 8 113 8 4 5 1 Error Messages for a Connection 0
15. 8 1 3 2 Overview of Functionf 8 2 Command Functigpns amp 8 2 1 CONTROL FBI 8 2 1 1 Configure INTERBUS S FKT 0 8 2 1 2 Start INTERBUS S Cycle FKT 1 8 2 1 3 Stop InterBus S Cycle FKT 2 8 2 1 4 Alarmowp FKT 3 8 2 1 5 9 o aure cda 4 p n 8 2 1 6 Disable All Messages FKT 5 8 2 1 7 Implement All Logical Address Map FKT 6 8 2 1 8 Init Communication FKT 7 8 2 1 9 INTERBUS S Delay FKT 8 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 8 2 1 10 Quit Module Error All FKT 9 8 2 2 DERINE FEGI 8 2 2 1 Physical Confi
16. 10 Appendix pM A l 1 8 J1 o 2 A9 ob i5 A10 ALT 445 cEU cC oS C025 J9 AS 215 J3 Interrupt operation can be permanently disabled EE by soldering in a wire bridge from pin 1 to pin 2 J 1 ofJ003 ool 0 4 J8 is not fitted J8 2 OO ere 3 oo O O 6 OQO ool 1 SRQ disable left enable right 2 Set host acknowledgment delay Disable left enable right j J5 is not fitted 3 A J6is not fitted J6 B O O C swe ON 0 OO RESET enable installed disable removed Revision C 5003BA04 Figure 10 4 Revision C of the DCB controller board 10 4 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 10 Appendix 10 2 Technical Data Data sheet Designation IBS S5 DCB I T Basic specifications Control system Types Bus system Sensor Actuator Bus Types Manufacturer Third party System expansion Diagnostics Interfaces 5003B SIMATIC 85 PLCs 5 115 U S5 130 WB S5 135 U S5 150 U 150 S S5 155 U Others upon request INTERBUS S INTERBUS S compatible modules Different I O modules Phoenix Contact Inquiries to INTERBUS S Club Max 256 local buses incl BKs with I O function and installation remote bus modules Max 320 modules incl BKs and PCP stations Max 256 INTERBUS S words Max 62 PCP stations Overall system diagnostics by
17. 4 23 4 3 3 Diagnostic Register Locations 4 24 4 4 V O Status Indicators sess se 4 26 4 5 Startup and Acknowledgment Displays 4 28 4 5 1 Host Controller Board 528 Q0 4 28 4 5 2 Acknowledgment after an Error sees 4 29 4 6 Diagnostics on the 68 4 30 4 6 1 Diagnostic Functions on I O Modules 4 31 4 6 2 Diagnostic Functions on Bus Terminal Modules 4 32 4 6 3 Diagnostics on Third Party Devices 4 32 4 7 Using the Hand Held Monitor
18. 9 34 9 1 8 Commands for Communication 9 38 9 1 9 Commands for the EEPROM Management 9 38 vi PH NIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Contents 9 2 Controller Board Messages 9 40 9 2 1 Messages of the User Interface 9 41 9 2 2 Messages for Bus Operation 9 41 9 2 3 Messages for Configuration 9 43 9 2 4 Messages for Error Recovery nennen nenne 9 49 9 2 5 Messages for System 60 10
19. 1 1 1 2 NTERBU GS TODO V aeree E E 1 2 1 2 1 General Method of Operation 1 3 1 2 2 Error Protection Mechanisms 1 4 1 2 3 INTERBUS S Protocol 880 61006 1 5 1 2 4 INTERBUS S Scan Time Calculation 1 6 1 2 5 Basic System 8080 1 2 8 1 10 1 3 oystem COMPONENTS eoa 1 11 1 3 1 Host Controller Board 1 11 1 3 2 Remote 5 9 SERT NRI 1 12 1 3 3 Installation Remote 8 1 13 1 3 4 Bus Terminal 6
20. 5 6 5 3 1 2 INTERBUS S System CTWCOP 7 cccccccceccessssecesesseesesccsesenceseeecseasaeensoeeees 5 8 5 3 1 3 Function Overview m 5 10 5 3 2 Bit Controlled Command 8 5 13 5 3 2 1 T 5 13 5 3 2 2 Access to the Bit Controlled Command Sequences 5 13 5 3 3 BS SYO Pa 5 16 9 9 9 1 5 16 5 3 3 2 Song A 5 18 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX na CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 5 System Interfaces 5 1 Interface Description The system interface links the application to the INTERBUS S system This interface consists of several interfaces which may be accessed from the process or by the user Application ISFP RS 232 PLC INTERBUS S PCP I O management services services data Communication registers Window areas Multi Port RAM ai INTERBUS S 5003A501 Figure 5 1 Structure of the application INTERBUS interface oystem interfaces are the areas which are designate
21. 8 113 8 4 5 2 Error Messages for the Reject Service 8 115 8 4 5 3 Additional Error Messages a Wee nennen 8 116 8 4 5 4 Description of the Service Specific Error Messages 8 116 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX na CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 1 Interface Description The INTERBUS S System Functions for the PLC ISFP are a software interface which is made available to the users to allow them to control INTERBUS S via the PLC Along with the I O interface which is implemented with an MPM Multi Port Memory and to which the user has direct access a communication register is also implemented on the controller board for the INTERBUS S command message interface The hardware of this interface consists of four word registers which are located in the I O area of the PLC A protocol was defined to link the PLC and the INTERBUS S controller board This protocol comprises commands which the PLC sends to the controller board and messages which the PLC receives The INTERBUS S system functions are based on the command message interface and offer the user self contained functions as INTERBUS S management services INTERBUS S management functions for instance ar
22. 2 4 2 3 1 1 VO Status Mda S eiaa a N EEEE Sx ODER NDARA 2 5 2 3 1 2 Operating Indicators 2 6 2 3 1 3 Eror INGICAION me 2 7 2 3 1 4 Interfaces me ggf eee nnne na ni 2 7 2 3 2 Controller Board Components 2 8 2 4 Host Controller Board Installation 2 9 2 4 1 Slot Allocation and Installation 2 9 2 5 Configuration of the Controller Board 2 11 2 5 1 PLO 222 qr 2 11 2 5 2 Hardware Term Definitions nnn 2 12 2 5 3 Configuring the Default 88
23. 2 4 2 3 1 1 I O Status Indicators 2 5 2 3 1 2 Operating Indicators 2 6 2 3 1 3 Error 0 02101 e menn rere rernm 2 7 2 3 1 4 Interfaces 2 7 2 3 2 Controller Board Components 2 8 2 4 Host Controller Board Installation 2 9 2 4 1 Slot Allocation and Installation mmm 2 9 2 5 Configuration of the Controller Board
24. 3 24 3 9 2 LC Modules with 16 Digital 3 25 3 5 9 Digital Modules with 32 Inputs 3 26 3 5 4 Digital Modules with 16 30 48 3 27 3 5 5 LC Modules with 16 Digital Outputs 3 28 3 5 6 Digital Modules with 32 2 8 3 29 3 5 7 Digital Modules with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs 3 30 3 5 8 Four Channel Analog Input Module with Programmable Gain 3 31 3 5 9 Four Channel Analog Output 68 3 34 3 5 10 Rea S MOGUC Soar EET 3 36 3 5 11 Communication Interface 802 8
25. U M 80 SPB LOOP 5003A615 35 The start sequence bit 0 of the EEPROM card is only activated by resetting the host controller board or by switching the PLC off and on If the host controller board is to start with STOP RUN as well the start sequence bit 0 in the OB 20 and OB 21 have to be called before the INITIB driver is called The associated program code is listed after the following program example OB 20 FB 210 It is called Start supplement Its position in the FB 210 can be taken from the schematized program example under item C or the program example itself 5003B PHCENIX ns CONTACT 6 Startup online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS d Detailed program example with organization function and data blocks OF 2021 22 SPA FB 210 NAME ANLAUE BE FB210 SUNOM 6 20 o gt M S0 INIT U M 8 0 SPB FB 60 NAME LE LIS LBDEB DB O FEN3 KF 200 AV KF 2 RRST DB O SUE SWR DB O RRMW KF 0 CIMW KF 0 CIFB FB 60 T T O STEP MB 9 BUSY M 8 0 TO M 8 1 RET M az wU M 8 0 SPB INET UN M 8 2 BEB Gl is Start supplement i KM 0000 T PW 60 AKTI PW 60 T MW 240 UN M zu gt SPB AKTI L KH 0000 T PW 60 BUSY L PW 60 T MW 240 U M ZU OPB BUSY 6 26 Activation bit INITIB At this point the start supplement listed below would be inserted see note on previous page InterBus d
26. 3 29 3 5 7 Digital Modules with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs 3 30 3 5 8 Four Channel Analog Input Module with Programmable Gain 3 31 3 5 9 Four Channel Analog Output 65 3 34 3 5 10 2 2 68522 tuentebudenuetectacacdessestesoeaetecue cet 3 36 3 5 11 Communication Interface 802 8 3 37 3 59 12 Modules for Thermocouples 3 38 50038 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX in CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 User Interfaces The following intelligent host controller boards are available for Siemens S5 PLOs the IBS o5 DCB I T with electrical isolation and the IBS S5 DCB T without electrical isolation boards Both types have three software interfaces which are accessible from the PLC side They can be used by the user without additional tools Process data interface This interface can be used in the two operating modes AUTOMATIC START and CONT
27. b Program structure of the example c Schematized program example OB 20 21 22 Startup block FB 210 UN M 8 0 Lo M 8 0 SPA FB 210 gt FB 210 a SPB FB 62 FB 62 E and start supplement on next page LOOP U M80 5003B621 ds i pcm AV 2 The start sequence bit 0 of the EEPROM card is only activated by resetting the controller board or by switching the PLC off and on If the controller board is to start with STOP RUN as well the start sequence bit 0 in the OB 20 and M 80 OB 21 must be called before the INITIB driver is a en called The associated program code is listed below the following program example OB 20 FB 210 It is called Start supplement Its position in the FB 210 is given in the schematized program example under item c or the program example itself 5003B PHCENIX 6 5 7 CONTACT 6 Startup online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS d Detailed program example with organization function and data blocks OB 20 SPA FB 210 NAME EB 210 de LOOP NAME LBDB FEN3 AV RRST ONES RRMW CIMW C DEB STEP BUSY TO RET gt ANLAUF BE UN M 80 M 8 0 Activation bit INITIB L KY 20 22 CON IND REQ RES T MW 18 DB PCP header tables U M 8 0 OPB FEB 60 FANE EIB DB 9 InterBus data block KF 200 Base address of window 3 KF 2 EEPROM operation DB 23 REQ RES standard DB DB 21 CON IND standard DB KF 20 Activa
28. nnns 9 40 9 2 1 Messages of the User Interface 9 41 9 2 2 Messages for Bus Operation 9 41 9 2 3 Messages for Configuration nnnm 9 43 9 2 4 Messages for Error Recovery nennen 9 49 9 2 5 Messages for System 60 10 nenne 9 60 9 2 6 Messages for Addressing nennen 9 61 9 2 7 Messages for Process Data Linkage 9 63 9 2 8 Messages for Event Processing nennen 9 65 9 2 9 Messages for Communication 9 66 9 2
29. nere rennen nnne 4 33 4 8 Using the Monitor Program for INTERBUS S on the PC 4 34 4 9 9 E E 4 35 4 9 1 LISTOI ENOS a naan eseunuuanaaeas 4 36 5 System Interfaces CENE 5 1 5 1 Interface Description nmn 5 1 5 1 1 Mace Function 2 eene nnnm ener nnn nennen nennen 5 2 5 1 2 Internace GlasStiealloRi ursinipridetavtidintumm Uns Grhbduptnt nt booa eus U FE dais wes tbi tinsuiee 5 9 5 2 Command and Message Structure 5 4 5 2 1 Structure of Commands and Messages 5 4 5 3 Interface Description nnne nnns 5 5 5 3 1 lem a E E E E A A E E E EN E E EN 5 5 5 9 1 1 e NORTE 5 6 5 9 1 2 INTERBUS S System CONWO 5 8 5 3 1 3 FUNCION 22 5 10 5 3 2 Bit Controlled Command 60 5 13 5 3 2 1 Bree T TH
30. 3 37 3 5 12 Modules for Thermocouples 3 38 li PHCENIX ia CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Contents 4 Diagnostic IMGT ACCS emet 4 1 4 1 Diagnostics on the Controller Board s Front Plate 4 2 4 1 1 Operating Indicators mE 4 4 4 1 2 ENON AMON NETT T UN 4 5 4 1 3 Error Codes for Controller Errors CTRL 4 8 4 2 Notes on Error 0 80009108 nene 4 11 4 2 1 Indication of Errors on the Front Plate 4 12 4 2 2 Example of a System Documentation 4 19 4 3 Diagnostic Registers 4 23 4 3 1 Diagnostic 2 2 cd Dp tara cred Oa 4 23 4 3 2 Diagnostic Parameter Register
31. cee 8 72 8 2 5 7 Communication Reference 1 8 73 8 2 6 ERRINFO FB TA e ie 8 74 8 2 6 1 Controller Error Code FKT O am We 8 76 8 2 6 2 Bus Information FAT 1 8 8 76 8 2 6 3 Defective Group 8 77 8 2 6 4 Module Error FKT 3 d 8 78 8 2 6 5 Local Bus Module Error FKT 4 8 79 8 3 Message Functions reiner nennen nnn nna nnns 8 80 8 3 1 TT 8 80 8 3 2 RECONFIG 8 82 8 3 3 EVENT FE 8 83 8 4 Working with Communication eene 8 84 8 4 1 lico 8 84 8 4 1 1 Control During Communication 8 86 8 4 1 2 Call Structure of
32. 8 18 8 1 3 2 Overview or FUNCIONS m 8 20 8 2 Command NENE UM TAN RIETI NS 8 24 8 2 1 een ME eM sis MR LT 8 24 8 2 1 1 Contigure INTEHBUS S FKT Q uessxsasniissisess meatu A 8 26 8 2 1 2 Start INTERBUS S Cycle FKT 1 8 26 8 2 1 3 SlOP 2 2 E E 8 26 8 2 1 4 8 26 8 2 1 5 Glear Display E 8 26 8 2 1 6 Disable All Messages FKT 5 8 27 8 2 1 7 Implement All Logical Address Map FKT 6 8 27 8 2 1 8 Init Communication FKT 7 nnn 8 27 8 2 1 9 IITERBUSSO DSIBVAEIST 8 osspmsstesmot iecit gerne E 8 27 8 2 1 10 Quit Module Error All FKT 9 8 27 IV PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Contents 8 2 2 DEFINE FB G9 M 8 28 8 2 2 1 Physical Configuration Map FKT 0
33. UNSIGN 16 5003B829 Figure 8 46 Example of a READ service 8 96 PHCENIX POUE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 2 Request Confirmation The following services are available to the user Commands Messages Primitive Request Response Indication Confirmation READ 808tyex 80Atug 81Atyex 81814 WRITE 80824 80A2 ex 81A24 81824 START 8083 80A34ex 81A34 81834 STOP 8084 80A4 ex 81A4uex 81844 INFORMATION REPORT 8085 808544 81A5yex unconfirmed STATUS 80862 80864 8186 IDENTIFY 80874 80ABuek 81874x INITIATE 808Bue 80AChex 81ABue 81882 INITIATE ERROR 80ADue 818Cyey ABORT 808D 80ADyex 81ADyex unconfirmed REJECT 81842 3 The individual primitives are described in Chapter 9 Commands and Messages The service structure of the individual services is described on the following pages The parameter entries depend on the modules addressed Their meanings are as follows Name Type Explanation Abort S Service to abort the communication connection Abort Detail BY Application specific detailed designation for the abort Add Code wo Application specific detailed designation of the error Client D Service requester the commun
34. 9 60 9 2 6 Messages for Addressing sssscxoescibxves inve RvDpU UFU RE UN NEUEN EVE IHNEN EUIS 9 61 9 2 7 Messages for Process Data Linkage 9 63 9 2 8 Messages for Event Processing 9 65 9 2 9 Messages for Communication nennen 9 66 9 2 10 Messages for the EEPROM Management 9 67 WO APPEND ee ee eee ete epee etcetera ee Am 10 1 10 1 Overview of the DOB Revisions 10 1 T Nm 10 5 10 3 Contents of the Data Diskette nne 10 6 Figures Tables Index 5003B PHCENIX vii CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Contents Vili PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Chapter 1 System Overview This chapter provides information on the INTERBUS S system and its components
35. 5 13 5 3 2 2 Access to the Bit Controlled Command Sequences 5 13 5 3 3 S 5 16 5 3 3 1 B eges i T E A E E EEE E E 5 16 5 3 3 2 OTANI TRITT UTE 5 18 5003B PHCENIX Iii CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Contents 6 jid A A 6 1 6 1 AOUR M E 6 1 6 1 1 General Information About Physical Addressing 6 1 6 1 2 General Information About Logical Addressing 6 2 6 1 3 Modes of Operation nennen 6 2 6 1 4 equa tatanessseneatts 6 3 6 1 5 Acknowledgment Behavior 6 4 6 2 Hardware Sening eerca i a dee deat ubur usen atte tex e iud aret 6 5 6 3 Software SelllliQ esu essen rtt mas eu ai INE RREA RUE Su RUVC E XN PRIME PES SE 6 6 7 Inicie 7 1 7 1 Slots for the Controller Board 7 1 7 2 Cable Installation
36. Services Write Read Start Stop Stingof W Module profile DRIVECOM ENCOM data string with the length as Profile specified under the length parameter always 2 Version W Application specific version designation VFD Virtual ID Represents that part of an application process that is visible and can Field be manipulated by the services Device Key D Designator o Service BY Byte W Word 5003B PHCENIX 8 99 CONTACT 8 ISFP 8 4 2 1 Read Request Command Code Parameter Count Structure 8081 Communication Reference 8 4 2 2 Write Request Command Code Structure 8082 Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Reference Index Subindex Data Length Data ww ww Data 8 4 2 3 Start Request Command Code Parameter Count Structure 8083 Communication Reference Invoke ID 8 4 2 4 Stop Request Command Code Parameter Count Structure 8084 Communication Reference Invoke ID PHCENIX ids CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 4 2 5 Information Report Request Command Code Parameter Count Structure 8085 Communication Heference index _ Subindex Length Data MEE Data 8 4 2 6 Status Request Struct
37. 6 Startup Hardware setting for the DCBPHY example DCBPHY J001 Board in the CEU ES CC O O O O O O O O O E J009 e e o J003 e e J007 e e 008 Q9 Lm 7 Qu Hardware error disabled io o o enabled disabled 9 9 9 enabled Bus error SW6 e e o J005 otart a E m 3controlled 4 2 DCB O O J006 1 O O ON gt O O SW1 SW3 Mode J010 Window 1 Window 2 sw5 ida Oma TAA Mz E M installed on 64 eH 64 a 64 not installed off 3022 89 5 32 B5 32 B5 16 B4 106 M4 16 Ma 81 EN 1M B 3 2 HB SW2 SWA Communi _ ON cation register 5003B MO R amp O1 N oO C2 NO m Jm NUORA OONO 5003A605 Figure 6 5 Hardware setting for automatic start with physical addressing PHCENIX di CONTACT 6 Startup Bus topology for the DCBPHY example IBS S5 DCB I T Diagnostic Bit 30 0 131 7 register Parameter 1128 0 1129 7 Window 3 IW 200 202 OW 200 202 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DCBPHY
38. a 098 7 2 7 3 Pin Assignment of the Hardware 068118069 7 3 7 3 1 SVSICM CONMCCION EU th E 7 4 7 3 2 Remote Bus 817906 a 7 7 5 7 3 3 Serial Interface V 24 RS 232 7 6 7 3 4 Ordering Information ssec Ml ww AN ante iced onan sneuscevaqesaucedanieenewanes acsaescetaceoaue 7 8 8 VL thc e c 8 1 8 1 Interface Descripjgr Yat cece ccc ccecseeeseeeecseseseeseessoesesesssassoeesoeeseeesseaenes 8 1 8 1 1 Program 590 8 2 8 1 2 Inclusion of the Interface Drivers 8 5 8 1 2 1 lh 9 m 8 6 8 1 2 2 8 10 8 1 2 3 setstss AE nin oummusei aeesetyeacesets 8 12 8 1 2 4 INTERBUS Data Block 8 8 14 8 1 3 INTERBUS S System Control nen 8 16 8 1 3 1 Structure of the 01 8
39. 8 30 8 2 2 2 Logical Local Bus Address Map FKT 1 8 31 8 2 2 3 Logical IN Address Map FKT 2 8 32 8 2 2 4 Logical OUT Address Map FKT 3 8 33 8 2 2 5 Communication Reference FKT 4 8 34 8 2 2 6 8 35 8 2 2 7 Group Numbers FKT 6 ere ti deserat 8 37 8 2 2 8 Parameter Timeout Constant FKT 7 8 38 8 2 2 9 RecCeEweKBL FRT 8 euni E 8 39 8 2 2 10 Receive Bit Manipulation FKT 9 8 41 8 2 2 11 Group Error Characteristics FKT 10 8 50 8 2 2 12 Module Error 8 52 8 2 3 Sr INFO 7 ere 8 53 8 2 3 1 Physical Configuration Map FKT 0
40. 9 5 9 1 1 Commands for Bus Operation 9 6 9 1 2 Commands for Configuration 9 9 9 1 3 Commands for Error Recovery my 9 18 9 1 4 Commands for System Control WE JP 9 24 9 1 5 Commands for Addressing 9 25 9 1 6 Commands for Process Data Linkage 9 27 9 1 7 Commands for Event Processing 9 34 9 1 8 Commands for Communication 9 38 9 1 9 Commands for the EEPROM Management 9 38 9 2 Controller Board Messages
41. 2 IBS 24 0032 L 141 8Dh 2 4 4 IBS 24D0 32 B L 141 8Dh 2 4 4 IBS 24DO 32 F2 L 141 8Dh 2 4 4 IBS 24 RELS Lb 145 9th 1 _ 2 2 IBS 60 RELS Lb 157 9Dh 1 L3 2 IBS 24 DO R Lk 161 Ath 1 2 2 IBS 120 DO 137 89h 1 2 2 IBS 230 DO 133 85h 1 _ 2 2 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F R 9 9 129 Ca j 1 IBS IP CDO 2 24 F R 9 9h 129 _ 1 IB 9724 00 322 L 189 BDh 2 2 IB 9724 00 163 L 189 BDbh 1 2 1 IB ST 24 u L 185 B9 81 2 1 8 3 2A uii For controller boards with a firmware version that allows the manual combination with logical addressing of two IB ST 24 DO 8 3 2A modules For controller boards with a firmware version that does not allow a manual combination with logical addressing of two IB ST 24 DO 8 3 2A modules 3 4 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces IB S station Local Physical ID code Length IN AR OUT PCP Register Module type Remote address dec hex code bytes AR AR width bytes bytes PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces BS24IPDIOBBTT R 1 Fh 2 4 2 4 Operator
42. 2 11 2 5 1 PLC Address 68 emere ens 2 11 2 5 2 Hardware Term Definitions 2 12 2 5 3 Configuring the Default 88 2 13 009b PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Contents 2 6 Hardware 88 98 2 19 2 6 1 Mounting Positions of the 06 3 2 19 2 6 2 Operation in the Central Controller and Controller Expansion Unit 2 20 2 6 3 Startup and Operating Mode Selection 2 21 2 6 3 1 INTERBUS S in the PLC s Address Area 2 28 2 6 3 2 Address Locations for Automatic Start
43. 3 14 3 4 Logical Addressing DCB Mode 3 17 3 4 1 a oh 3 17 3 4 2 Structure of an INTERBUS S Address 1 3 18 3 4 3 e olie cc i e qe 3 19 3 5 Access to INTERBUS S 0 69 3 23 3 5 1 Digital Modules with 16 Inputs cccccececceseeceeecceeeeceseceeeeseueesseeesseeens 3 24 9 5 2 LC Modules with 16 Digital 8 3 25 310 3 Digital Modules with 32 Inputs 3 26 3 5 4 Digital Modules with 16 3 8 3 27 3 5 5 LC Modules with 16 Digital Outputs 3 28 3 5 6 Digital Modules with 32 2 8
44. Subindex Length Data pO MEE Data PHCENIX CONTACT 8 107 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 3 8 Initiate Indication Structure 81AB Message Code Parameter Count Communication Reference Invoke ID Access groups 8 4 3 9 Read Response Structure Positive Negative 80A1 80A1 Command Code Command Code Parameter Count Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Invoke ID Communication Reference Reference Result Length Result ErrorClass Data Error Code Add Code Ld Code Data 8 4 3 10 Write Response otructure i Positive i Negative Message Code Message Code Parameter Count 80A2 80A2 Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Invoke ID Communication Heference Heference Result Resut EmorClass Error Code Add Code 8 108 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 4 3 11 Start Response otructure Positive Negative 80A3 80A3 Command Code Command Code Parameter Count Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Invoke ID Communication Reference Reference Result _Result ErrorClass_ Error Code Add Code Add Code 8 4 3 12 Stop Response Structure Positive Negative Command Code Command Code 80A4 80A4 Parameter Count Parame
45. gt Error in the KR list gt Error in the group address list INTERBUS S start not gt possible gt Communication cannot be initialized 5003A818 Figure 8 30 Assignment of the error register EREG 35 During addressing i e the ADDRESS function block FB 72 is active none of the I O addresses on the controller board must be accessed because the I O does no correspond to the inputs outputs when the bus is stopped 8 64 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PX M 12 0 SPB FB 72 NAME ADDRESS IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block BUGY 4 M 12420 ActIvatlon Dit T T 2 Timer IDDB DB 10 DE D Code list IDDW KP 0 lst data word of the ID list LEDE 3 DB 11 DB LB address list LBDW KP 0 1st data word of the LB list INDB DB 12 DB IN address List INDW KP 0 lst data word of the IN list OUDB 1 DE ib DE QUT address list OUDW KE 40 lst data word of the OUT list KRDB DB 10 DB KR address List KRDW KP 0 lst data word of the KR list GRDB DB 0 DB group no list GRDW KF 0 lst data word of the group no list MODE M 10 5 MODE setting EREG MB 8 Error register TO M 3 1 Timeout bit RET 3 M 14 2 Return value Figure 8 31 Call of the ADDRESS function block FB 72 Parameter meanings The required address lists of the ADDRESS function are described on the fo
46. structure Location no Module type DB 12 DWO 0 KY 0 13 Module quantity DW 1 1 KY 0 0 1 IBS 24 BK T DW 2 2 KY 0 20 2 IBS 24 DI DW 3 3 KY 00 3 IBS AO 1 DW 4 4 KY 00 4 IBS 24 DO IDW 5 5 KY 0 140 5 IBS PT 100 A2 DW 6 6 KY 0 28 6 IBS IP DIO 1 24 P DW 7 7 KY 0 0 7 IBS IP CBK1 24F DW 8 8 KY 0 30 8 IBS IP CDI1 24F DW9 9 KY 00 9 IBS IP CDO1 24F DW 10 10 KY 0 31 10 IBS IP CDI1 24F DW 11 11 KY 0 46 15 IBS 24 BK I O T DW 12 12 KY 0 38 16 IBS 24 DI 32 DW 13 13 KY 0 164 13 IBS Al 3 DW 14 14 KY 0 126 14 Diagnostic bit register DW 15 15 KY 0 128 15 Diagnostic parameter register Figure 3 6 Data block with input addresses PHCENIX CONTACT 3 User Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Inputs du PW 170 PW 168 i PW 166 a PW 164 PW 162 Base address PW 160 Window 3 2 3 4 BS 0 IB
47. 63 1 8 101 8 4 2 8 MUE ROU e EE E EEEE 8 101 8 4 2 9 ADON ROGUGS oreco eee cee ene E ETE 8 102 8 4 2 10 FOG CONIATO e e E 8 102 8 4 2 11 Write Confirmation REO OE 8 102 8 4 2 12 Start 60 dS Ne 8 103 8 4 2 13 Stop CODD WOM a seni uod 8 103 8 4 2 14 tatus COMMMMALNOMN 44 4 Dette tatto ae rettet 8 103 8 4 2 15 Identify Confirmation sees 8 104 8 4 2 16 INITIATE 0829 8 104 8 4 2 17 Initiate Error Confirmation nnn 8 104 8 4 3 Hesponse lIndication cedes eee nene nnn nennen nnns 8 106 8 4 3 1 Abort Indication 4 8 8 106 8 4 3 2 Reject selezione TS Tm 8 106 8 4 3 3 Start Indication 8 106 8 4 3 4 Stop Indicat
48. IBS IBS PT 100 24 DO A 2 20 0 21 7 OW 138 O 32 0 33 71 IW 146 OW 136 IW 144 OW 134 IW 142 OW 132 IW 140 IBS IP DIO 1 24 F BS 11 28 0 28 7 28 0 28 7 IBS IP CBK 1 24 BS 22 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F i IBS IP 1 24 F E nud gom IBS IP CDI 1 24 F T 30 0 30 7 essei ID 10 BS 23 O 29 0 29 7 iesus 31 0 31 7 BS 24 BS 25 IBS IBS IBS Al 3 Al 3 16 O46 0 47 7 O40 0 41 7 OW 170 47 0 47 7 11 38 0 39 7 Ow 168 IW 100 OW 166 OW 164 IW 170 IW 168 ius 5003B611 Figure 6 12 Exemplary I O address allocation for the DCBECP example controlled start logical addressing system start in the PLC s program or startup control with memory card and additional PCP communication 5003B PHCENIX Pros CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DCBECP software setting for controlled start with logical DCBECP addressing for a system start in the PLC s program or startup
49. Relay on the module Relay on the expansion unit n n 6 n5 n 4 n 3 n 2 n 1n 0 m 7m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3m 2m 1 m O lt Byte n gt lt Byte m gt E Word n gt 5003A316 Figure 3 27 Address assignment for relay modules n Even output address m n 1 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 11 Communication Interface Boards Boards IBS S5 SL IBS S5 SL I IBS BA SL IBS BA SL I Access The controller board in the master PLC treats a communication interface board in a slave PLC like an I O bus terminal module with 8 or 16 byte output and input addresses The master PLC writes IBS output data into registers on the communication interface board and is able to read IBS input data from the registers of the communication interface board Addressing Set the address of the communication interface board slave PLC with the DIP switches on the interface board The size of the address area 8 or 16 bytes is set with a jumper Please refer to the user manual for your communication interface board to get more detailed information Figure 3 28 Communication path from the master PLC with DAB or DCB board to the slave PLC with communication interface board n INTERBUS S output address must be specified for LOGICAL ADDRESSING k Input address of the slave PLC is set with the DIP switches on the
50. Run state of the controller board Ad Invalid address setting XXX A parameter is output in case of an error Software diagnostics The diagnostic registers contain an image of the operating and error indicators LEDs as well as the error parameters display on the front plate Further information can be recalled by means of the SYSERROR FB 73 and ERRINFO FB 74 functions blocks during the PLC cycle or with a PC which is connected to the V 24 RS 232 interface 5003B PHCENIX s CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 1 1 Operating Indicators Four LEDs indicate the operating state of INTERBUS S and the PLC The LEDs are designated READY BASP RUN and BSA Further information is indicated on the display READY The controller board has completed the self test without errors occurring and is ready for operation BASP The PLC has activated the BASP signal Befehls Ausgabe SPerren disable command output and is in the STOP state In this operating state INTERBUS S resets all outputs 35 This signal is activated by the PLC All outputs of the INTERBUS S system are reset RUN When INTERBUS S is active the RUN LED lights up BSA The BSA signal Bus Segment Abgeschaltet bus segment disabled indicates that one or several bus segments is are disabled The remaining bus configuration is running properly The I O data of disabled local buses does not correspond to t
51. Further errors Cause Remedy 5003B Error code The code is given in a hexadecimal form The letters A to F are represented as capital or small letters in accordance with the display User hardware or firmware error Indicates which of the red error LEDs is active on the host controller board Indicates whether the INTERBUS S data cycle is running RUN LED on or has been stopped RUN LED off Indicates whether a reset has been triggered on INTERBUS S or not Indicates any follow up errors Describes the cause of the error in more detail Gives information on how to remove the error cause and the error PHCENIX us CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 9 1 List of Errors No Command Code Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Cause Remedy Command Write Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Cause Remedy 4 36 0007 User error Controller error On An undefined command code has been sent to the controller board Check the application program e g PCP commands 0008 User error Controller error On Instead of a parameter still expected a command has been sent to the host controller board Check the application program e g PCP commands PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Parameter Wri
52. 3 4 n 8 0 9 1 10 205 11 30 12 40 13 505 14 60 15 70 mE MODE ADDRESS BYTE n 1 0 0 1 10 2 2 3 3 O 4 140 550 6 60 7 170 L 1 S xL BASP RUN BSA 5003A416 READY O OQ O CTRLO RB LB MOD Decimal E01 E02 INTERBUS S operation was disturbed and 00 STOP the bus was stopped All outputs were reset The display indicates the number of the defective remote bus segment Check for the remote bus segment e the voltage supply of the remote bus module e the cabling to the remote bus module with the help of the LEDs on the BK Remote bus error due to a short interruption of the bus After the diagnostic procedure the bus is recognized as being ready for operation Possible causes e Missing or incorrect shielding of the data line e Voltage dips at the logic supply U of the remote bus modules Remote bus error due to defective hardware or invalid hardware configuration Check the definition list the ID and length codes for the addressing Acknowledgement a Via the addressing blocks addressing the system from the PLC b Via the EEPROM card with the start sequence for addressing c Automatic start power up reset Figure 4 10 Remote bus error Further remote bus error descriptions E4 E6 are given in Chapter 4 1 2 Error Indicators in the subse
53. Alarm Stop function triggers a reset on INTERBUS S This sets all module outputs to zero and the INTERBUS S cycle is stopped If the bus is then to be restarted it must be configured beforehand by a reset or with the Configure INTERBUS S function FKT 0 8 2 1 5 Clear Display FKT 4 The Clear Display function acknowledges an error message of the controller board This function clears simultaneously the red error LEDs and resets the seven segment display Only then can new errors be reported on the seven segment display f The error source is still available after the clearing 8 26 PH NIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 1 6 Disable All Messages FKT 5 The Disable All Messages function disables all messages from the controller board 35 The disabling of messages is canceled by calling any other function 8 2 1 7 Implement All Logical Address Map FKT 6 With the Implement All Logical Address Map function logical address lists become valid which were previously sent to the PLC From then on they are used to address the INTERBUS S modules will be triggered on the bus if an error should occur Otherwise the pending T This function must only be sent when the bus is in the stop state as no RESET output data on the modules would not be cleared in the event of an error The error location in the previously sent address list can be obtained with the Logical Addres
54. DW 7 7 KY 0 0 7 IBS IP CBK1 24F 8 8 KY 0 0 8 IBS IP CDI1 24F 9 9 KY 0 29 9 IBS IP CDO1 24F DW 10 10 KY 0 0 10 IBS IP CDI1 24F DW 11 11 KY 0 46 15 IBS 24 BK I O T DW 12 12 KY 00 16 IBS 24 DI 32 DW 13 13 KY 0 164 13 IBS Al 3 DW 14 14 KY 0 000 14 Diagnostic bit register DW 15 15 KY 0 000 15 Diagnostic parameter register Figure 3 8 Data block with output addresses PHCENIX CONTACT 3 User Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS J I e ecce BS 0 JEN IBS IP CDO 1 24 F PW 138 PW 136 PW 134 BS 1 PW 132 BS 2 ae IBS IP CDI 1 24 F BS eee BS 4 BS 5 12 aN BS 6 IBS 24 DV 32 I OO Q O0 GO 0 Outputs PW 170 PW 168 PW 166 PW 164 PW 162 PW 160 Base address IBS IP CDI 1 24 F Window 3 PW 138 PW 136 PW 134 PW 132 OW 46 OW 32 OW 28 5003A306 Figure 3 9 Logical addressin
55. DW m 0 KY 000 075 Parameter count m 1 KC FFFFFFFF Company name m 9 KC HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Host type m 25 KC TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT Controller board type m 41 KC OOOOOO00000000 Controller board option m457 KC RRRRRR Release no m 64 KC DDDDDDDDDDDD Data item n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins 50038 PHCENIX 8 55 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 3 3 Switch Information FKT 2 The Switch Information function requests the set values of the start addresses and area lengths of the controller board After successful termination of the function the values are available Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 005 Parameter count m 1 KY OOY XXX Start address of window 1 m 2 KY 000 XXX Length of window 1 m 3 KY OOY XXX Start address of window 2 m 4 KY 000 XXX Length of window 2 m 5 KY OOY XXX Start address of window 3 n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins Y O Address in the P area 1 Address in the Q area 8 2 3 4 INTERBUS S Cycle Counter FKT 3 The INTERBUS S Cycle Counter function requests the current status of the INTERBUS S cycle counter A 32 bit counter which counts the INTERBUS S cycles continuously runs on the controller board It is started after power on or after a res
56. Error Code Add Code Add Code PlState 8 4 2 13 Stop Confirmation otructure Positive Negative Message Code Message Code Parameter Count 8184 8184 Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Invoke ID Communication Reference Reference Result Resut ErrorClass Error Code Add Code Add Code PlState 8 4 2 14 Status Confirmation otructure Positive Negative Message Code Message Code Parameter Count 8186 8186 Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Invoke ID Communication Reference Reference Result Logical Status Result Error Class Physical Status Length Error Code Add Code String of Local Detail Add Code 50038 PHCENIX 8 103 CONTACT 8 ISFP 8 4 2 15 Identify Confirmation Structure Positive Parameter Count Communication Reference 8186 Message Code String of Revision 8 4 2 16 Initiate Confirmation i Positive 818B Structure Message Code Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Heference PHCENIX a CONTACT onlinecomponents com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Negative 8186 Message Code Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Reference Result Error Class 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 4 2 17 Initiate
57. Figure 6 2 Setting of DIP switch SW6 which is used to select the controlled start mode 6 1 4 Startup Behavior In principle the controller board is for the PLC an I O module with a variable address area The address area which the controller board occupies can be addressed by the PLC in the usual way L IW L PW LOW TOW T PW T QW UI S O When the PLC starts operation after the voltage has been switched on or the STOP RUN switch has been actuated the following startup results Supply voltage ON Hardware test owitch STOP RUN Response of periphery Startup blocks OB20 21 22 Cyclic program OB 1 NEM ae Figure 6 3 PLC startup STOP gt RUN 5003B235 Under the menu item Addressing the Periphery all correctly connected I O modules indicate their readiness They are entered in the PLC as existing I O components These addresses are copied cyclically into the process image of the inputs and outputs As soon as the application program addresses an address which was not recognized during startup an error message is output depending on the PLC 5003B PHCENIX Es CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup 6 1 5 Acknowledgment Behavior The acknowledgement behavior of the controller board is determined by the mode DCB or DAB and the start automatic controlled This connection b
58. PESE Switch Group On Failed Confirmation 80C5 Quantity of subsequent words Grupnumber 9 44 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Switch Group Off Confirmation 809d Meaning A group of bus segments was switched off The number of this group is transferred as a parameter Syntax Switch Group Off Confirmation 809d Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Group number of the switched off group Quit Groups Error Characteristics Confirmation OOF6 Meaning This message acknowledges the Define Groups Error Characteristics Request 0060 command Groups Error Characteristics Failed Confirmation 80F7 syntax Groups Error Characteristics Failed 80F7 Confirmation Quantity of subsequent words 1 Error number 2 Parameter number 2 The Define Groups Error Characteristics Request 0060 command was not executed without errors The information given in the command have not been accepted The error number specifies the error type The parameter number identifies the erroneous parameter Meaning of the ERROR NUMBER parameter 1 Elements exist twice 2 Group number does not exist 5003B PHCENIX 29 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Reconfiguration Indication 8106 Meaning The reconfiguration key REC of a bus terminal module was actuated oyntax Rec
59. The current configuration can also be displayed on the seven segment display coding switch positions 94xx 99xx Messages Positive acknowl Send Actual Configuration Confirmation 8119 oyntax send Actual Configuration Request 010D Send Actual Configuration V24 Request 010E Function The function corresponds to the Send Actual Configuration Request command The only difference is that the data is transmitted exclusively via the V 24 RS 232 interface Remark See remark on Send Actual Configuration Request Messages Positive acknowl Send Actual Configuration V24 Confirmation 811A syntax send Actual Configuration V24 Request 010E 5003B PHCENIX vel CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Quit Module Error Request 0064 Function Modules with a storage display continue to indicate the error even if the error has been removed Therefore the error message must be acknowledged This command acknowledges the module errors of the specified modules The logical local bus address and the requested module number are specified in pairs as parameters Prerequisite Module error on a module with a storage display Remark Even error LEDs on the module go out Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Module Error OK Confirmation OOFE Negative acknowledgment Quit Module Error Not Possible Confirmation BOFF syntax Quit Module Error Request 0064 Quantity of sub
60. The first word of the first I O module with digital inputs in the INTERBUS S system is assigned the base address even word address set in the controller board of the first window The next I O module with digital inputs on the bus is given the next available address even word or byte address observe address orientation etc PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces Addressing digital outputs The same is true for the digital outputs The first word of the first I O module with digital outputs in the INTERBUS S system is assigned the base address set in the controller board even word address of the first window The next I O module with digital outputs which occurs on the bus is given the next available address even word or byte address observe address orientation etc Addressing analog inputs The first word of the first I O module with analog inputs in INTERBUS S system is assigned the base address set on the controller board even word address of the second window The next I O module with analog inputs on the bus is given the available free address even word address etc Addressing analog outputs The first word of the first I O module with analog outputs in the INTERBUS S system is assigned the base address set on the controller board of the second window The next I O module with analog outputs on the bus is given the next available address even word address etc
61. 5 GND Ground o inc 7 CTS Heceiver Clear to Send is not supported by the firmware A programming unit e g a Siemens PG 750 can be connected to this interface by means of an appropriate adapter cable PSM KA V24 TTY P PA BB Order No 27 61 70 3 or PSM KA V24 TTY P PA SB Order No 27 62 20 3 from Phoenix Contact the letters BB and or SB indicate whether the V 24 and or TTY side connector is a male Stecker or female Buchse connector Figure 7 4 shows the connection between the programming unit and the controller board 1 6 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation Siemens PG cable PHOENIX adapter Siemens PG 750 lt l re IBS host controller board L 15 pos connector female 15 pos connector male 9 pos connector COMI female for DCB board 25 pos connector male D SUB 15 pos D SUB 9 pos female female 2 p om e o 9 TTY IN V4 RXD 2 d o o 2 TTY IN l TXD 3 2 6 TTY OUT VCC 4 9395 7 TTY OUT TTY GND 5 5 07778 OY J d O Solder side Solder side 5003A702 Figure 7 4 Connection between programming unit and the controller board as well as the pin assignment of the adapter cable PSM KA V24 T TY P PA BB PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE
62. 6 Operational Problem Cause The object dictionary just loaded contains errors 0 Other Cause The error cannot be assigned to an error code Error class 8 other This type of error is reporting in the event of other errors occurring Table 8 29 Service specific error messages error class 8 other l PH NIX E is CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ABORT 8 120 Abort ID 8 122 Abort Identifier 8 122 Abort Indication 8 118 Abort Request 8 113 ABORT Request 8 121 Access 8 129 Activation flag 8 103 8 108 Additional error messages 8 125 ADDRESS 8 23 8 69 8 98 8 101 8 119 Address length 8 74 Addressing 8 100 8 101 8 119 Addressing block 8 98 Alarm Stop 8 29 Application reference 8 127 Automatic start 8 6 Auxiliary block 8 5 B Bit MOD 8 88 Bit manipulation 8 46 Bit manipulation register 8 50 Bit number 8 46 BK Alarm OFF 8 67 BK Alarm ON 8 67 BUS bit 8 85 8 87 8 91 Bus Information 8 85 Bus output bit 8 46 Bus segment address list 8 75 Bus segment number 8 67 Bus segment numbers 8 35 Bus structure physical 8 74 Bus terminal alarm output 8 67 BUSY bit 8 17 Busy bit 8 19 Byte orientation 8 46 C Call structure 8 3 CIDB 101 8 108 CIDB data block 8 105 CIH 8 5 8 10 CIMW 8 105 8 108 8 119 CIST 8 108 8 119 Clear Display 8 29 Client 8 96 Command functions 8 25 Command list 8 51 Communication 8 96 8 98 8
63. KR Communication reference 2 63 000 016 000 0005 000 000 000 gd Stes 0009000 00g 000 900 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 002 000 000 000 000 Parameter count IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS IBS Al BK T DI 1 DO 100 A72 DIO 1 24 CBK 1 24 F CDI 1 24 F CDO 1 24 F CDI 1 24 F BK I O T 8 8 3 3 16 Diagnostic bit register Diagnostic parameter register PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup OB 1 Cyclic program SPA FB 62 NAME OON IND IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block CIDB MB 18 CON IND header table db T ac Timer TO M 8 3 Timeout SPA FB 66 NAME REQ RES IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block RRDB MB 19 REQ RES header table ili T 3 Timer TO M 8 4 Timeout BE DB20 Data block CON IND header table The service headers which are indicated by the message bits 1 15 are entered into this data block Description Signal bit no 1st CODE Service code PC Quantity of subsequent parameters KR Communication reference DB DW Pointer to body with data block and data word 5 KH OOOO Llst CODES ie KH OOOO Pes 2 KH OOOO KR os KY 000 000 DB DW 4 KH OOOO 20da CODE 23 KH OOOO Eo 6 KH OOOO KR 3 23 KY 000 000 DB DW 90
64. Local bus disabled Reconfiguration key RD Outgoing remote bus disabled reen Da PE Protective earth d Reconfiguration input Alarm output 5003A420 Figure 4 22 Example for LED diagnostics on a bus terminal module 4 6 3 Diagnostics on Third Party Devices There are two types of diagnostic indicators on third party devices Device specific indicators The indications depend on the device and are described in the device manual or can be obtained from the manufacturer Bus specific indicators The indicators comply with the Phoenix I O module diagnostics LED diagnostics on I O modules LED diagnostics on bus terminal modules If other messages are displayed they will be described in the device manual or can be obtained from the manufacturer 4 32 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 7 Using the Hand Held Monitor For startup or servicing the Hand Held Monitor HHM facilitates the checking of individual bus stations in relation to their functions and correct connection to the periphery The monitor is accommodated in a handy and sturdy plastic housing The connection to INTERBUS S is established through the local bus interface The connecting cable is plugged between the bus terminal connector and the outgoing local bus cable Therefore the monitor does not require an external power supply because it ob
65. Tables Chapter 6 Table 6 1 Setting the types of operation and addressing with switch SW6 6 5 Table 6 2 Overview of the programming examples for different system starts and control and operating modes 6 7 Chapter 7 Table 7 1 Signal assignment of the system connector 7 4 Table 7 2 Signal assignment of the V 24 interface 7 6 Chapter 8 Table 8 1 Parameter description of the INITIB function block FB61 or FB60 8 8 Table 8 2 Startup behavior 8 8 Table 8 3 Description of the parameters of the CON IND function block FB62 or FB64 8 11 Table 8 4 Description of the parameters of the REQ RES function block FB66 or FB67 8 13 Table 8 5 Functions of the CONTROL FB 68 function block 8 24 Table 8 6 Parameters of the CONTROL function block FB 68 8 25 Table 8 7 Structure of the DEFINE function block FB 69 8 28 Table 8 8 Parameters of the DEFINE function block FB 69 8 29 Table 8 9 Supported Client Server services of the Supported Services Bit Fields 8 40 Table 8 10 Functions of the SYSINFO function block FB 70 8 53 Table 8 11 Parameters of the SYSINFO function block FB 70 8 54 Table 8 12 Functions of the ON OFF function block FB 71 8 58 Table 8 13 Parameters of the ON OFF function block FB 71 8 59 Table 8 14 Parameters of the ADDRESS function block FB 72 8 63 Table 8 15 Functions of the ERRINFO function block FB74 8 75 Table 8 16 Parameters of the ERRINFO function block FB74 8 75 Table 8 17 Parameters of the SYSERRO
66. UB a E IBSIP CDI 1 24 F Oo 0 0 O O O O IBS IBS 24 DI 32 AI3 5003A302 E Figure 3 2 Example configuration PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 2 2 Order of the Modules on the Bus The physical addressing of the I O modules depends on the order of the modules in the bus topology Counting direction and order of the modules The first module of a bus segment is a bus terminal module BK All other modules are I O modules The first I O module is coupled to the BK the second I O module is coupled to the first module etc Counting direction and order for the local buses and installation remote buses Bus segment 0 BS 0 is the bus segment the BK of which is directly coupled to the controller board in the PLC through the remote bus Bus segment 1 is coupled to the BK of bus segment O through the remote bus etc 35 Bus terminal modules with I O functions BKs for the installation remote bus and installation remote bus modules have their own bus segment number BS as shown in Figure 3 2 BS 7 10 Table 3 5 Counting direction order for the entire bus configuration Module Bus segment BS Module number 1 0 0 2 0 38 0 2 0 ton CN Sli 0 Lond 1 11 O ne2 1 2 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User
67. may follow Negative acknowledgment Unexpected Group Number Confirmation 0059 Meaning An unknown group number was used or the number is not within the permissible range Negative acknowledgment Switch Group On Failed Confirmation 80C5 Meaning The group could not be switched on because the configuration was changed or the group has already been operated The process output data which have been used for bit manipulation might have been reset when a group has been switched on Ensure by means of the application program that this data is set to the correct state Switch Group On Request 0020 Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Group number of the O0xx group to be switched on XX 00 xx x FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal PHCENIX ro CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Switch Group Off Request 0021 Function Prerequisite A Messages Syntax Key 9 14 The command switches off a group of bus segments which has been defined before The outputs of all IBS stations in those bus segments are set to O The groups must have been defined before this command is called The process output data which have been used for bit manipulation might have been reset when a group has been switched on Ensure by means of the application program that this data is set to the correct state Positive acknowledgment Switch Group Off Confirmati
68. 0009 Parameter Write Error Indication 0000 No Error Code Indication 000C Controller Parameter Timeout Indication 000d Host Parameter Timeout Indication 0027 Bad Exception Indication 0028 CPU Not Implemented Interrupt Indication 0029 CPU Illegal Instruction Indication 002b Logical Address Error Confirmation 0038 Bus System Error Indication 003b IPMS Extern Error Indication 003C IPMS FiFo Overflow Error Indication 003d IPMS Undefined Error Indication 003E Invalid DCF Condition Indication see 003F Invalid DCF State Indication Chapter4 0040 Impossible MC Condition Indication 0041 Invalid MC State Indication 0042 Invalid UC State Indication 0046 47 Wrong Base Address Window 1 2 0048 49 Wrong Length Window 1 2 004A No Executable Configuration Confirmation 004b Command Parameter Error Confirmation 004d IPMS No Error Indication 004E Communication Invalid Indication 0050 Invalid D State Indication 0051 Invalid D Condition Indication 0055 Receive Group Numbers Failed Confirmation 0057 Invalid EC State Indication 0058 Invalid EC Status Indication 0059 Unexpected Group Number Confirmation 005A _ BK Alarm Failed Confirmation 005b Un
69. B ADR Special ID code DW y n KY B ADR Special ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n B Address area 0 P area of the PLC 1 Q area of the PLC ADR Base address of the module 0 255 Base address word oriented module even address byte oriented module odd even address DB12 0 KY 000 015 Parameter count 1 KY 000 000 IBS 24 BK T Ai KY 000 020 IBS 24 DI 35 KY 000 000 IBS AO 1 4 KY 000 000 IBS 24 DO bs KY 000 140 IBS PT 100 A 2 G3 KY 000 0285 IBS IP DIO 1 24 T3 KY 000 000 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 8 KY 000 030 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F je KY 000 000 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F LO KY 000 031 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F lle KY 000 046 IBS 24 BK I O T 12 KY 000 038 IBS 24 DI 32 13 KY 000 164 IBS AI 3 14 KY 000 126 Diagnostic bit register KY 000 128 Diagnostic parameter register 16 6 38 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB13 OUT address list The OUT address list includes the logical output addresses of the modules The list is an image of the ID code list Every place in the list which is occupied by an output module is allocated an output address This address is the base of the module in the PLC In the example DW 4 KY 000 032 IBS 24 DO The digital output module becomes visible in the PLC in output word 32 Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY B ADR 1
70. CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 New Command Create Default CRL 012D Should the controller board detect PCP devices in the bus configuration after the Default CRL was already generated because of the startup of the controller board or the PLC system this command can be used to adapt the default communication relationship list Afterwards the command generates a new default communication relationship list according to the valid configuration The valid configuration may also be predetermined by means of logical addressing This command is used to cancel the services Init Communication Receive CHRL 33 Req and Receive CR Req which might have been active before Command Create Default CRL Req 012Dhex Positive Message Create Default CRL Con 81236 Parameter block length 0001 Result 00 00 Protocol Extension for the Bit Controlled Command Execution Up to now it was possible to initiate only one command sequence in the protocol with the associated action bit at a given point in time Firmware 3 72 however allows to set several action bits regardless of whether a command sequence is still being processed The command sequences of several set action bits are processed in turn thus from bit 0 to bit 15 and starting again with bit 0 The consequence is that still only one command sequence is exectuted at at time The action bit register is eval
71. OI eo x OG g ES eo Oo O Confimation Indication Bodies 5003B828 CIST B ows HdQqvdH A 08 Figure 8 45 PCP message flag Confirmation Indication 5003B PHCENIX 8 93 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 1 8 Principle Service Sequence 1 Enter service 2 Enter expected message and set message flag 3 Initiate service by setting the activation flag BUSY bit Enter service If a service is to be executed it must either be entered in the standard data block RRST or in the header data block RRDB e RRST example DB RRST DWO Code DW 1 PC Service header DW 2 KR DW 3 Service body service dependent HRDB example DB RRDB DW3 DW 4 Code DW 5 PC Service header DW 6 KR DW 7 DB DW DW 8 m DB DBn Poe DWDW DW 1 Service body DW 2 service dependent 8 94 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Enter expected message and set message flag On the receiving end the message is stored either in the CIST standard data block or in a data block defined by the message header in the CIDB header data block e Message in the CIST standard data block nthe CIMW message flag only bit O is set If bit 0 0 the message has arrived and must be fetched in the same cycle The message may be overwritten by
72. Process image of the inputs and outputs 2 11 Program packages 2 16 Programming unit 7 6 Q Quit Module Error All 8 27 Quit Module Error 8 52 R RB error 4 5 RB ERR 8 64 RB 2 7 RC 8 113 Read Confirmation 8 102 8 108 Read Request 8 100 READ service Exmp 8 96 READY 2 6 4 4 Reason code 8 113 Receive bit manipulation 8 41 Receive block 5 6 5 8 8 2 8 86 Receive KBL 8 39 RECO bit 8 82 PHCENIX re CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS RECONFIG 8 23 8 82 Reject Indication 8 106 Reject service 8 115 Remote bus 1 2 1 10 1 12 1 16 check 1 4 connector 2 2 error HB ERR 1 4 interface 7 5 module with two wire interface 1 14 segment error message for the 1 15 REMOTE 2 7 Representation Ad 2 5 REQ RES header blocks 8 88 REQ RES 5 8 8 4 8 12 8 15 8 16 8 86 8 88 8 110 Request service primitive 8 84 Hequest 8 96 RESET 1 4 HESET 2 7 2 39 4 17 4 18 4 28 29 4 40 45 4 A8ff 4 54 Reset Out In01 8 46 Heset Out In01 Switch 8 47 Reset Out In10 8 46 Reset Out In10 Switch 8 47 Heset2 Out In01 8 46 Heset2 Out In10 8 46 Resource 8 118 Response service primitive 8 84 Restart automatic 8 50 Return bit register 5 13 RETURN bit 5 8 Return bit 8 18 RRDB 8 88 8 90 8 94 RRMW 8 90 8 95 8 110 RRST 8 94 8 95 8 110 RS 232 2 7 5 1 Run status of the controller board 2 6 RUN 2 6 4 4 S Scan time 1 6 oecondary diagnostic fun
73. Selection of operating mode Automatic start Controlled start EEPROM fitted A NO Function Function LIU Function Function Function IH HIT IH I IV V VI IV V VI V Function Function Function IH HIT IV V VI V T I IV V VI Physical addressing A PLC start up I Logical addressing B Cyclic processing OB1 I Additional definitions IV PCP communication V Diagnostics via registers Li 50 VI Extended diagnostics LS Control block 5003A234 Figure 2 9 Startup modes of the controller board 5003B PHCENIX 2 19 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Host controller board diagnostics The controller board diagnostics is subdivided into three areas 1 Detection of an operating or error state e Automatic diagnostics This includes the complete error detection and processing As soon as a bus error RB LB a controller board error CTRL or a module error MOD is detected the error location or error parameter is determined and displayed 2 Display of diagnostic data e Front plate error group with LEDs and error parameters with seven segment display Diagnostic registers Using two input words the status and error indicators LEDs and the parameters seven segment display are overlaid in the PLC s input area e Acknowledgment delay By setting a jumper it can be determined whether or not an acknowled
74. The system is still in the RUN status 35 In the event of an error the SYSERROR function block FB 73 sets the CON BUS and MOD bits The bits can be only reset by the user SPA FB 73 5003A821 Figure 8 35 Structure of the SYSERROR function block FB 73 8 80 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Table 8 14 Parameters of the SYSERROR function block FB73 Name Attr Type Designation IBDB B DB INTERBUS data block No of a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be specified by the user Length DW O DW 199 CON A Bl Controller board error BUS A BI Buseror INTERBUS S in the STOP state MOD A BI Module eror INTERBUS S in the RUN state SPA FB 73 NAME SYSERROR IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block CON M 4 0 Error on the controller board BUS 1 M 4 1 Bus Seror signal bic MOD M 4 2 Module error signal bit Figure 8 36 Call of the SYSERROR function block FB73 5003B PHCENIX 8 81 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 3 2 RECONFIG FB 75 The RECONFIG function block FB75 indicates a reconfiguration to the user by setting the RECO bit This configuration has been triggered by pressing the reconfiguration key on the bus terminal module The RECO bit is set to the value ONE RECO 1 if the reconfiguration was successful Otherwise the RECO bit is set to the value ZERO R
75. e iImplement All Logical Address Maps Request 0040 e Check Physical Configuration Request 0058 Positive acknowledgment Send Log Address Error Confirmation 80F5 Meaning The result is given with this message see Chapter 9 2 PHCENIX E CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 6 Commands for Process Data Linkage Receive Processing Instructions Request 005d Function This command allows the bit manipulation of the process output data connected to the bus by means of programmable instructions which are automatically executed by the controller board Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Receive Instructions Confirmation OOF2 Meaning There are no errors in the parameters All listed instructions have been accepted and are appended to a possibly existing list Negative acknowledgment Processing Instructions Error Confirmation 80F3 Meaning There are errors in the parameters The sent list must not be accepted Transfer the command lists before the INTERBUS S system is started and if used after the Implement All Logical Address Maps Request command The bit manipulation must not be re defined during operation and must not be used in connection with the group definitions because the process output data used for the bit manipulation might by reset A memory of 1 000 entries is available for the instructions because the instructions can have a different number o
76. e the number of parameters e sequence of ID numbers and the modules as well as e the locations of registers and special ID codes Communication Not Ready 0069 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause Remedy 5003B A request or response command has been sent although communication is not yet initialized Initialize Communication by e specifying the KR addressing list with the FB address in the PLC or e sending the INIT COMMUNICATION command with the help of the EEPROM card PHCENIX oos CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Wrong Base Address Window 006A Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset HESET Further error Cause The user did not set the start address for window 3 correctly The READY LED is off when this error occurs Remedy Check the base address for window 3 The lowest permissible base address is PW 128 Defective Address Decoder 006b Error type Hardware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause Remedy A Defective EEPROM Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Cause Remedy 4 56 Hardware error of address decoding Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again 006c Hard
77. system are put into operation sequentially and bit by bit After this configuration phase the host controller board knows the connected INTERBUS S system and can operate it This configuration algorithm is also used to locate the error if a malfunction occurs in the course of normal data traffic 1 2 3 INTERBUS S Protocol Sequence Starting with a loopback word the controller board clocks the output data in the output direction into the data ring of the INTERBUS S system At the same time the controller board receives in the input direction the input data which has previously been stored in the data ring by the INTERBUS S modules The loopback word is transferred between the output and input data through the entire data ring which is formed by all system modules When the controller board receives the loopback word all output data is in the ring and all input data is in the controller board The checksums calculated by the CRC generators are transferred to the next module where they are checked When the loopback word is read back correctly and the comparison of the checksums resulted in an error free transfer on all bus lines the output data becomes valid and the modules put the data to their outputs The controller board also passes the read input data to the PLC for processing Afterwards the controller board causes the modules to store all new input data in the ring before it clocks a new loopback word and new output data in
78. when they are on or off Figure 4 4 shows how the LEDs are represented in the following drawings of the front plate LEDon 4 LED off or on LED off 5003A421 Figure 4 4 Representation of the LEDs in the drawings Host controller board check Display Description Outputs Bus 013 4 Blinking The READY LED is off 00 STOP c c cj numbers MODE ADDRESS decimal There is a hardware error on the host 20 controller board 8 0 C 0 1 Replace the board 11830 3 80 c When you send the board in for repairs 14 6 6 60 please include a note with the number i indicated by the display READY CTRLO BASP RB RUN O LB BSA MODO a Figure 4 5 Host controller board check 4 12 PHCENIX 20038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 0134 n 8 0 OO 9 O 10 20 11 30 12 40 13 5O 14 65 1570 MODE ADDRESS BYTE n 1 0 0 CO 110 2 2 O 3 30 4 40 5 5 6 60 7ITO 5003B READY 6 CTRLOO BASP RB RUN OLB BSA MODO The controller board has completed the self 00 STOP test without errors occurring and is now waiting Operating mode controlled start a The board waits for a command f
79. word If bits 1 to 15 have the value zero all services are written into the standard confirmation indication buffer Once such as service has arrived the user must evaluate or save the data in the buffer within the same PLC cycle In the next cycle a new service may arrive that will overwrite the buffer The data is received by the CON IND function block FB62 or FB64 By means of a pointer to the entries of the service headers belonging to expected services in the CIDB data block it is possible to specify the data area into which the service bodies should be written For an expected service the application activates the flag bit belonging to a data header for this purpose If a data with the code entered in the table and the associated KR is received by the CON IND receive block the service body is written into the data area identified by the pointer Reception of data is indicated to the application by resetting of the flag bit Thus the data requested by a Read Request for example is transferred directly to its destination by the entry in the table and not indirectly through the standard buffer 8 92 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS CIMW ro a 2 3 5 E 7 E EJ Ho m 12 13 14 15 Messag Flag H3Qv3H Nz H3QvaH Hu3avaH 2 u3avaH ri N MO TFT O 202 al e CIDB PC _ ow Confimation Indication Header Table Bi o 2 3 c
80. 0 that the command sequence was started by the controller board The PLC must reset the activation bit output 35 0 which it has set before 4 The controller board terminates the processing when the controller board has completely processed the command sequence and the PLC has already reset the activation bit output 35 0 The PLC can now evaluate the return bit input 35 0 0 gt No error 1 gt Error during processing The programming sequence below clarifies the steps 1 to 3 JCO m 35 0 33 0 35 0 x any input word that is combined with the outputs word 35 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 PHCENIX ids CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces Structure of the initial configuration Command sequence otored programming Bit 0 Quit Error Configure INTERBUS S Start INTERBUS S Cycle Bit 1 Alarm Stop Bit 2 Clear Display Bit 3 Send Al Module Error Bit 4 to 15 are not programmed 3 The command sequence 0 is at the same time the power on or start sequence The controller board starts this sequence automatically after every voltage recovery or a reset PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 5 3 3 IBS SYS SWT 5 3 3 1 Description IBS SYS SWT provides the user interface of the controller board on the PC With this program the functions of the INTERBUS S controller board and the modules connected to
81. 000 002 Parameter count 70 KY 000 YYY Parameter no 71 KY 000 00X Error no MMMM Message code YYY Ihe parameter no indicates the line no in which the error has been detected in the instruction list 2 Unknown logical local bus number 3 Specified module number does not exist 4 Module can currently not be addressed e g group was switched off 8 52 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 3 SYSINFO FB 70 The functions of the SYSINFO function block request a list of parameters from the controller board The pointers DB and DW point to the memory area in which this parameter list is to be stored The DB pointer contains the number of the data block IBDB which is to include the parameter list The pointer DW points to a data word at which the parameter list is started Table 8 10 lists the functions which can be executed with the SYSINFO function block Each of these functions can be activated by setting the BUSY bit If the activated function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred during function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The error register EREG describes the cause of the error The error register is mapped into the INTERBUS data block IBDB on the data word 62 DW 62 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not be activated within the spe
82. 003F Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset HESET Further error Remedy A Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again Impossible MC Condition Error 0040 Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Remedy A 5003B Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again PHCENIX dn CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Invalid MC State Error 0041 Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Remedy A Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again Invalid UC State Error 0042 Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Remedy A Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again Wrong Base Address Window1 0046 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause Remedy 4 46 The user has not set the start address for window 1 correctly Check the base address of window 1 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Di
83. 016 024 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 10 KY 016 025 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 11 KY 000 012 IBS BK I O T 1125 hr 000 000 IBS 24 DIIS 13 KY 000 000 IBS AI 3 LAs KY 000 000 IBS AI 3 16 ils KY 000 000 Diagnostic bit register SS KY 000 000 Diagnostic parameter register 17 5003B PH NIX 6 47 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB12 IN address list The IN address list includes the logical input addresses of the modules The list is an image of the ID code list Every place in the list which is occupied by an input module is allocated an input address This address is the base of the module in the PLC In the example DW 12 KY 000 038 IBS 24 DI 32 The digital input module becomes visible in the PLC in the input words 38 and 40 Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY B ADR 1st module DW y 2 KY B ADR 2nd module DW y n 2 KY B ADR nth module DW y n 1 KY B ADR Special ID code DW y n KY B ADR Special ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n B Address area 0 P area of the PLC 1 Q area of the PLC ADR Base address of the module 0 255 Base address word oriented module even address byte oriented module odd even address DB12 0 KY 000 016 Parameter count 1 3 KY 000 000 IBS 24 BK T uo KY 000 020 IBS 24 DI Ji KY 000 000 IBS AO 1 8s KY 000 000 IBS 24 DO 5e KY 000 1405 IBS PT 100 A 2
84. 1 when a function of the DEFINE function block FB 69 could not be processed within the specified time The functions of this block demand a list of parameters The pointers DB and DW point to the memory area into which this parameter list is mapped The DB pointer contains the number of the data block which contains the parameter list The DW pointer points to the data word with which the parameter list begins Table 8 7 Structure of the DEFINE function block FB 69 No Function 0 Physical Configuration Map 1 Logical Local Bus Address Map 2 Logical IN Address Map 3 Logical OUT Address Map 4 Communication Reference 5 Event Map 6 Group Numbers 7 Parameter Timeout Constant 8 Receive KBL 9 Receive Bit Manipulation 10 Group Error Characteristics 11 Quit Module Error SPB FB 69 5003A812 Figure 8 18 Structure of the DEFINE function block FB 69 8 28 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The functions 8 11 of the DEFINE function block can send an error message 33 with parameters which are stored in the INTERBUS data block IBDB starting at the data word 69 DW 69 and may be evaluated there within the current cycle If the return value is negative RET 1 see Table 8 8 the data words must be checked Table 8 8 Parameters of the DEFINE function block FB 69 IBDB B DB INTERBUS data block No o
85. 10 10 Appendix 10 1 Overview of the DCB Revisions There are different versions revisions of the DCB host controller board for Siemens S5 PLCs These versions differ in the location and function of the jumpers 35 The revision of your DCB controller board is given with the last letter in the serial number of the motherboard The location of the serial numbers is given in the following figure Designation y Revisions A and B MODE ADDRESS BYTE n n 1 800 00 9105 110 10220 2 20 11 300 330 12 40 440 1350 550 14 605 6 605 15 70 77 ILLI LILILI READY 5 CTRL BASP Q RB Q RUN OLB O BSA MOD O m SS MAE LAI SE REMOTE RS 232 RESET Designation Revisions C and D 5003AA01 D LAS A LL Figure 10 1 Location of the serial numbers on the motherboard of the DCB controller board 5003B PHCENIX Hd CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 10 Appendix The revisions A to C are shown in the following No setting possible IC025 Jo AS 215 to be installed only when AS215 O is used J3 o Interrupt disable left enable right 74 Master horizontal slave vertical E N setting J8 OoK WYO 7 D7 3611 SRQ enable left disable right J4 32 Sethost acknowledgm
86. 10 Messages for the EEPROM Management 9 67 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX iid CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 Commands and Messages Table 9 1 Overview of the commands 0001 Start Bus Cycle Request 9 6 0002 X Stop Bus Cycle Request 9 7 0008 Send Software Revision Request 9 24 0009 Send Software Revision V24 Request 9 24 0020 Switch Group On Request 9 13 0021 Switch Group Off Request 9 14 0023 Configure Bus Request 9 9 0024 Set BK Alarm Logical Request 9 23 0025 Reset BK Alarm Logical Request 9 23 002A Receive Events Request 9 34 002b Enable Event Number Request 9 36 002C Disable Event Number Request 9 36 002d Enable All Event Request 9 37 002E Disable All Event Request 9 37 0040 Implement All Logical Address Maps Request 9 26 0049 Receive Group Numbers Request 9 12 004A Alarm Stop Request 9 8 004 Clear Display Request 9 18 0050 Send Switch Information Request 9 24 0058 Check Physical Configuration Request 9 11 005A Send Bus Error Information Request 9 18 005b Send Local Bus Module Error Request 9 19 005C X Send
87. 119 5003B Communication abort 8 120 Communication data 8 98 Communication Reference 8 38 Communication reference 8 101 8 102 8 109 Communication reference list 8 81 Communication references 8 38 Communication registers 8 98 Communication relation ship list 8 43 Communication stations 8 102 CON bit 8 84 8 91 CON IND 8 4 8 10 8 15 8 17 8 98 8 100 8 105 8 119 CON IND header blocks 8 101 Configure InterBus S 8 28 Confirmation service primitive 8 96 Confirmations 8 105 Connection abort 8 121 Connection establishment 8 121 CONTROL 8 26 Control 8 17 8 21 8 98 Controlled start 8 6 Controlled start with EEPROM 8 6 Controller Error Code 8 84 Controller Parameter Timeout Erro r 8 42 Counter 8 62 D Data block header data block 8 107 8 108 standard data block 8 107 8 108 Defective Group 8 87 DEFINE 8 21 8 32 8 53 Definition 8 127 Disable All Messages 8 29 disconnectible 8 80 Driver blocks 8 101 E EREG 8 71 ERRINFO 8 24 8 82 Error classes 8 126 Error codes 8 126 Error messages 8 122 EVENT 8 24 8 95 Event code 8 40 Event identifier 8 40 8 68 Event Map 8 39 Event OFF 8 68 PHCENIX 8 121 CONTACT Event ON 8 68 F Function block 8 2 Function blocks 8 98 G Group definition 8 78 Group Error Characteristics 8 53 8 80 Group nos list 8 78 Group Numbers 8 41 Group OFF 8 66 Group ON 8 66 H Hilfsfunktions
88. 13 error 2 18 8 78 identification code 8 30 number 8 52 Modules byte oriented 3 14 capable of communication 5 1 with bus acknowledgement 4 6 word oriented 3 14 Monitor software 5 2 Mounting positions of the jumpers 2 19 Multiprocessor operation 2 41 O ON OFF 8 21 8 58 Operating and diagnostic indicators 2 2 Operating indicators 2 6 4 4 Operating mode of the controller board 2 25 Operating addressing modes 2 15 Operation in the central controller and controller expansion unit 2 20 Operation with and without EEPROM card 2 22 Ordering information 7 8 Organization block 8 110 Other 8 120 OUT address list 8 69 Output addresses 8 69 Output bit 8 43 OV Error 8 120 Overview of commands and messages 9 1 9 2 9 3 P Parameter counter 3 18 5003B list 3 3 frame 5 4 settings 2 7 2 39 timeout constant 8 38 Parameterization software 2 22 Parameterization of the host controller board 2 7 PC board 7 10 PCP activation flag 8 91 communication interface 5 1 communication system 8 84 message flag 8 93 services 8 97 stations 5 7 stations 8 86 Peripherals Message Specification 3 1 Physical addressing 2 14 of the input output modules 3 1 1 Physical configuration map 8 30 8 55 8 57 PLC 2 15 address area 2 11 startup of the 3 8 4 36 STOP request of 4 14 STOP state of the 4 15 4 17 4 28 Process data 8 86 Process data interface 3 1 3 8
89. 18 PHCENIX POUE CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP CON IND HEN Application The function is MEE activated via an edge 6 8 4 gt t 1 Enter function number FKT 1 2 The function is activated when the BUSY bit is set CONTROL 3 The function works in several cycles INTERBUS is started 4 The function is terminated BUSY 0 In the event of an error a TO 1 Timeout of the function b RET 21 The function could not be executed SUUDADTE Figure 8 15 Function call and timing PHCENIX 8 19 CONTACT 8 ISFP online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 1 3 2 Overview of Functions The CONTROL function block No Function 0 Configure INTERBUS S 1 Start INTERBUS S Cycle 2 StopINTERBUS S Cycle 3 Alarm Stop 4 Clear Display 5 Disable All Messages 6 Implement All Logical Address Map 7 Init Communication 8 INTERBUS S Delay 9 Quit Module Error All 10 Enable all Messages No Function 0 Physical Configuration Map 1 Logical Local Bus Address Map 2 Logical IN Address Map 3 Logical OUT Address Map 4 Communication Reference 5 Event Map 6 Group Numbers 7 Parameter Timeout Constant 8 Receive KBL communication relationship list 9 Receive Bit Manipulation 10 Group Error Characterist
90. 2 3 2 Software Revision FKT 1 enne 8 55 8 2 3 3 ej dire Information FKT 2 PR Em 8 56 8 2 3 4 INTERBUS S Cycle Counter FKT 3 8 56 8 2 3 5 Logical Address Error FKT 4 ies pint obire ea apod 8 57 8 2 4 N a eee eemenencenegenenseasetene nanesneseeeneseseee 8 58 8 2 4 1 WOU ON Eig qom 8 60 8 2 4 2 AOU OFF UE 8 60 8 2 4 3 Per OIN d qm c 8 60 8 2 4 4 sie cine sigues 8 61 8 2 4 5 EVENTON PETA o 8 61 8 2 4 6 mA IZOdEqM EE M 8 61 8 2 5 ADDRES SFB T2 ee mare tiui oe Sh Ameen eae 8 62 8 2 5 1 ID Code ABL M fe 8 66 8 2 5 2 Bus Segment Address List ae MuR eo 8 67 8 2 5 3 IN Address List Of 8 68 8 2 5 4 BN Adaro S ee 8 69 8 2 5 5 Group No List 8 70 8 2 5 6 Group Error Characteristics
91. 25 11 IBS 24 BK IBS IBS l O T DI 32 BS 12 or ors C O46 0 47 7 OW 170 46 0 47 7 38 7 39 7 OW 168 OW 166 OW 164 IW 170 5003B609 IW 168 IW 166 LW 464 Figure 6 10 Exemplary I O address allocation for the DCBZYK example controlled start logical addressing system start in the PLC program control via function blocks 5003B PHCENIX poe CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DCBZYK software setting for controlled start with DCBZYK logical addressing during system start in the PLC program control via function blocks a Short description of logical addressing during startup The logical addressing of the INTERBUS S system is initiated with the FB 210 function block It includes an initialization block INITIB two driver blocks REQ RES CON IND an auxiliary driver CIH and the addressing block ADDRESS See also Figure 6 7 In this example digital and analog I O modules are addressed After the initalization of the controller board and the driver blocks the PLC startup is exited Afterwards the logical addressing is started in the cyclic program The application must be disabled in the cycle until the addressing block has been processed without errors occurring BUSY RET 0 In the cyclic program the application can now access the defined module addresses 6 28 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPO
92. 4 2 2 Example of a System Documentation Using the bus topology which has already been described in Chapter 3 the following example describes the documentation of system parts of an INTERBUS S system Figure 4 13 gives an overview of the demo system Figure 4 14 lists the bus segments BS 1 through 6 in a table You may use the following form Figure 4 15 to enter modules of your own system 5003B PHCENIX s CONTACT 4 Diagnostic Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS p us EL BS 0 IBS ies BS Central control cabinet Z 100 0 IBS IP DIO 1 24 P Feed for robot Z 100 1 BS 1 Turntable with toolholder Z 100 2 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F mE BS E Positioning of the turn E table Z 100 3 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F BS 3 mE Gripping jaws of the turntable n bottom Z 100 4 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F BS4 BS IP CDO 1 mE TT Gripping jaws of the turn p table top Z 100 5 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F BS 5 T BS 6 E Control cabinet for p robot Z 100 6 i 5003A410 4 20 Figure 4
93. 4 5 Timeout bit Figure 8 8 Call of the CON IND function block FB62 or FB64 The parameters marked PCP are needed only if PCP stations Counter 32 V24 are to be addressed Cf Chapter 8 4 Use of Communication These parameters are assigned a 0 DB 0 KF 0 if there are only I O modules in the INTERBUS S system By means of an entry into the memory location DL 18 of the IBDB you may use up to 64 PCP message bits Enter 4 into DL 18 24 PCP words 50038 PHCENIX 8 11 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 1 2 3 REQ RES The REQ RES function block FB66 or FB67 is the send block to link the PLC and the controller board With the help of the communication registers window 3 it sends a command to the controller board 35 The address location of the communication registers determines the selection of the driver blocks Addresses Block FB No P area REQ RES FB 66 Qarea REQRESQ FB 67 To get an optimized response with respect to time this block must be called unconditionally at the end of the cyclic program By way of default the block sends 20 data words in every cycle The user can modify the quantity of parameters in the INTERBUS data block IBDB after the INITIB function block FB60 has been called IBDB DL27 Quantity of data words which are transferred with every call of the CON IND FB62 function block Up to one command is sent in every cycle even i
94. 6 KY 000 028 IBS IP DIO 1 24 T KY 000 0005 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 8 KY 000 030 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F PE KY 000 000 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 10 KY 000 031 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F Ii KY 000 046 IBS 24 BK I O T l2 KY 000 038 IBS 24 DIJ 7 lo KY 000 164 IBS AI 3 la KY 000 100 IBS AI 3 16 Ta KY 000 126 Diagnostic bit register qus KY 000 1207 Diagnostic parameter register L7 6 48 PH NIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB13 OUT address list The OUT address list includes the logical output addresses of the modules The list is an image of the ID code list Every place in the list which is occupied by an input module is allocated an output address This address is the base of the module in the PLC In the example DW 4 KY 000 032 IBS 24 DO The digital output module becomes visible in the PLC in the output word 32 Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY B ADR 1st module DW y 2 KY B ADR 2nd module DW y n 2 KY B ADR nth module DW y n 1 KY B ADR Special ID code DW y n KY B ADR Special ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n B Address area 0 P area of the PLC 1 Q area of the PLC ADR Base address of the module 0 255 Base address word oriented module even address byte oriented module odd even address DB13 0 KY 000 016 Parameter count KY 000 000 IBS 24 BK T Ai
95. 74 5003A820 Figure 8 33 Structure of the ERRINFO function block FB 74 8 74 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS No of a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be created by the user DB INTERBUS data block Length DW 0 DW 199 O After termination of the function the BUSY bit is BI 1 The function is activated by setting the BUSY bits automatically reset by the function block 1 Timeout of the function has elapsed The function could not be activated BI TIMEOUT bit O The function is active O Function terminated positively BI Return bit 1 Function terminated negatively IBDB B tT T FKT E NR E DB B DW E BUSY E TO A RET A M 12 4 SPB FB 74 NAME ERRINFO IBDB DB 9 T rw FKT MB 15 NR MB 21 DB DB 13 DW MB 14 BUSY M 12 4 TO M 12 5 RET M A126 5003B LNIERBUS data block Occupied timer Function no No of the local bus Pointer to the data block Pointer to the data word must be entered by the user same as above same as above same as above Activation bit Timeout bit Return bit Figure 8 34 Call of the ERRINFO function block FB74 PHCENIX CONTACT uis THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 6 1 Controller Error Code FKT 0 After the SYSERROR function block has signaled a controller error by means of the CON bit the Controller E
96. 8 2 8 98 Server 8 96 Service 8 128 Service execution 8 102 oervice Message Flag 8 105 Service primitive 8 102 Confirmation 8 105 8 109 Indication 8 105 5003B Service request 8 121 Service Structure 8 102 oervice primitive Request 8 109 oervice specific error messages 8 126 Signal changes 8 44 Simatic S5 8 98 ooftware Revision 8 60 Start Confirmation 8 114 Start InterBus S Cycle 8 28 otart Request 8 111 otartup 8 119 Status Confirmation 8 115 otatus Request 8 112 Stop Confirmation 8 115 otop InterBus S Cycle 8 28 otop Request 8 112 Switch Information 8 61 Synchronization 8 98 SYSEHROR 8 23 8 82 8 91 SYSINFO 8 22 8 57 T TIMEOUT bit 8 19 U Use 8 119 User process 8 96 V VFD State 8 126 W Write Confirmation 8 114 Write Request 8 11 1 PHCNIX CONTACT Ves THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Chapter 9 Commands and Messages This chapter provides information on commands which are required to control the controller board for different tasks e g configuration addressing etc messages which the controller board sends to the programmable controller as an acknowledgment for received commands or after events 9 Commands and Messages ee eeeeeee eere nene nnn 9 1 9 1 Controller Board Commands
97. 8 95 8 110 CIST 8 95 8 110 Clear Display 8 26 Client 8 84 Code switches 4 26 Coding binary 3 33 3 35 two s complement 3 33 3 35 Command block 5 7 execution bit controlled 5 13 functions 8 24 list 8 48 Commands and Messages overview of the 9 1 9 2 9 3 structure of the 5 4 Communication 8 84 8 86 8 90 8 96 8 110 abort 8 111 data 8 86 reference 8 34 8 88 reference list 8 73 register window 3 2 25 2 31 6 4 registers 2 13 2 30 5 3 8 86 relationship list 8 39 stations 8 90 CON bit 8 76 8 80 CON IND block 5 8 CON IND header blocks 8 88 CON IND 8 4 8 10 8 15 16 8 86 8 88 8 92 8 110 Configuration of the controller board 2 11 Configure INTERBUS S 8 26 Configuring the default setting 2 13 Confirmation service primitive 8 84 Confirmations 8 92 l 2 Connection abort 8 112 Connection establishment 8 112 Control 8 16 8 20 8 86 CONTROL 8 24 Controlled start with EEPROM 8 6 Controlled start 2 21 2 24 2 25 6 2 6 4 8 6 Controller board 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 11 2 2 3 23 4 28 5 1 5 15 5 16 7 6 check 4 11 components 2 8 configuration of the 2 1 1 diagnostics on the front plate 4 2 error 2 18 error codes for 4 7 hardware interfaces of the 7 3 initialization of the 3 1 operating and error states of the 4 23 operating mode of the 3 8 slots for the 7 1 startup 4 28 stop 2 6 Controller error code 8 76 Controller errors CTRL error codes for 4 8 Cont
98. 9033 ed 10119 01 spuodsaJ o9 s1011 usueJi ueul OO uopeuuoo e qeo snq 9 9 8AI99Jep JO OU uedo si e qeo snq 9 9 y JO Hulssiw si jueuuDes sng uoneanfijuoo erui eui JO ejnpoul Mg 99JJ e 0 pejoeuuoo Se G7 eui esneoeq uiejs s snq y ui 6u04M y ye SI g7 pejoeuuoo JOU Se ul8js s snq eui esneo9q ui peau eq jou pjnoo uoneun6iuo uonean amp ijuoo euiDuo y ur yey UUM eonuepi JOU SI 9003 qi ejnpouJ e g7 payloads y ul uogeJjedo Buunp parowa Se ejnpouuJ e esneoeq pejoedxe uey 1910us s g7 uoneJjedo Buunp pappe se e npouiJ e esneoeg pojoedxe uey 1e8uo si g7 se npoui g7 ow 10 ejnpoul G7 IS eui pue yg e ueewvieg uoinoeuuoo 98AIn99Jep 10 OU S qeo g7 uedo JO Buissiui s g7 O I M8 payejas 1nq LOG 84 exi uonduosep 1043 10119 93 90 JO jueujooe dai SOIASP L 0 enp H uoneunDijuoo eurDuo y JO euo y YIM 99JDe zou SBOP yg L JO G SUL 96 6 906 uoneoipu uoneun0Ju 40413 sng 033 ed 1048 y 10 sjequunu 10448 BU JO suomeue dxe pe oJduii pue uoisuox3 cvdd dcdd viaa 6raa 8r ada Srada cada LECICI JOdd goad voad eodd 800d Z0dd 900d 90 voad eoad coad i 5003BC04 Pe CONTACT co THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Chapter 3 1 ID Code of the Modules Page 3 4 Table 3 2 With the firmware update V3 71 the new IBS IP KES A 4 IN module is assigned to the
99. All Module Error Request 9 19 005d Receive Processing Instructions Request 9 27 005E Send Physical Configuration Request 9 10 005F Send Log Address Error Request 9 26 0060 Define Groups Error Characteristics Request 9 15 0061 EEPROM Management 9 38 0064 Quit Module Error Request 9 22 0065 Quit Module Error All Request 9 22 0069 Receive Local Bus Code Map Request 9 25 0106 Send Group Number Request 9 16 0107 Send Group State Request 9 17 0108 Send Local Bus Code Map Request 9 17 0109 Send Located Error Counter Request 9 20 010A Send Located Error Counter V24 Request 9 20 010B Send Last Module Status Error Request 9 20 010C X Send Last Module Status V24 Error Request 9 21 0100 Send Actual Configuration Request 9 21 010E X Send Actual V24 Configuration Request 9 21 0112 Read KBL Loc Request 9 38 The commands listed on the following pages are error indications for the CTRL error They are indicated with a CTRL error on the front plate and entered in the diagnostic registers Chapter 4 Diagnostic Interfaces describes these messages in detail 5003B PHCENIX zd CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Table 9 2 Overview of the messages for a CTRL error Code Message 0007 No Command Code Indication
100. CCCC gt 1st error number lt dddd gt mth RB number lt eeee gt mth error number lt ffff gt LOCAL BUS block FFO3 Local bus quantity lt pppp gt 1st local bus number gggg 1st error number lt hhhh gt pth local bus number lt iiii gt oth error number lt jjjj gt Key PC Parameter count is generated automatically nnnn Quantity of the groups which have been switched off aaaa Number of the 1st group that was switched off bbbb Number of the nth group that was switched off mmmm Quantity of remote buses with errors CCCC Number of the 1st remote bus with errors dddd Error number of the 1st remote bus with errors see table below ceee Number of the mth remote bus with errors ffff Error number of the mth remote bus with errors see table below FF03 LOCAL BUS parameter block oppp Quantity of local buses with errors 0990 Number of the 1st local bus with errors hhhh Error number of the 1st local bus with errors see table iii Jil 5003B below Number of the pth local bus with errors Error number of the pth local bus with errors see table below PHCENIX ES CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages The length of the blocks GROUP REMOTE BUS and LOCAL BUS depends on the length of the errors which occurred Response in the event of group definitions Group Error Characteristics An error occurs while data is transmitted on the bus The
101. CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup 6 Startup 6 1 Introduction 6 1 1 General Information About Physical Addressing For the physical addressing the assignment of the addresses for the I O modules depends on the order of the modules in the bus topology Thus the counting direction and the order of modules local buses and installation remote buses have to be observed N If one or several modules area removed from the bus topology and physical addressing is used the controller board cannot recognize this modification Depending on your application this may lead to dangerous situations The local buses and INTERBUS modules are counted as follows The first module of a local bus is a bus terminal module BK All other modules are I O modules The first I O module is coupled to the BK the second I O module is coupled to the first 1 O module etc Local bus 0 LB 0 is the local bus the BK of which is connected to the PLC by means of the remote bus Local bus 1 is coupled to the bus terminal of local bus 0 through the remote bus etc 35 BKs with I O functions BKs for the installation remote bus and installation remote bus modules have their own remote bus segment number RBS When addresses are allocated to the modules a difference is to be made between digital and analog l Os Digital I Os occupy the first window in t
102. CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Chapter 3 User Interfaces This chapter provides information on how the INTERBUS S controller board and the PLC exchange process data the identification of modules in the bus configuration the two basic method of addressing the I O modules the input and output as well as the allocation of digital and analog I O data 3 User Interfaces 3 1 3 1 ID Code of tne 969 trt m Nl iun 3 3 3 2 Process Data Interface ecrire reta MAM Ra Leva 3 8 3 2 1 Example Configuration enne 3 9 3 2 2 Order of the Modules on the Bus 3 11 3 3 Physical Addressing DCB 0 9 3 12 3 3 1 minc 4 3 12 3 3 2 3 12 3 3 3 Address Orientation
103. Code Map Confirmation 8114 Quantity of subsequent words 3 1 Result Error code FFxx 2 Error code Additional code XXXX 3 Additional code XXXX Explanations for the following errors are given in Chapter 4 Check Configuration Error Confirmation 0068 Unknown Bus Module Confirmation 005b No Executable Configuration Confirmation 004A Heceive Group Numbers Failed Confirmation 0055 Unexpected Group Number Confirmation 0059 35 The messages are indicated with a CTRL error on the front plate and entered in the diagnostic registers 9 48 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 2 4 Messages for Error Recovery Explanations for the following errors are given in Chapter 4 No Error Code Indication CPU Bus Error Indication CPU Address Error Indication CPU Zerodivision Indication CPU Bad Exception Indication 0027 CPU Not Implemented Interrupt Indication CPU Illegal Instruction Indication 0029 Bus System Error Indication 0038 IPMS External Error Indication 003b IPMS FiFo Overflow Error Indication 003C IPMS Undefined Error Indication 003 Invalid DCF Condition Indication 003 Invalid DCF State Indication Impossible MC Condition Indication Invalid MC State Indication Invalid UC State Indication 0042 IPMS No Error Indication Communication Invalid Indication Invalid D State Indication 0050 Invali
104. ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup Bus topology for the DCBADR example DCBADHR IBS S5 DCB I T Diagnostic register Window 3 Bit Parameter 126 0 1 127 7 128 0 1 129 7 IW 200 202 OW 200 202 IBS 24 DI ID 130 L d SS IBS AO1 IBS 24 DO ID 129 L ch O 32 0 33 7 PT 100 A 2 ID 70 IW 146 IW 144 IW 142 IW 140 BS 21 IBS IP DIO 1 24 F O 28 0 28 28 0 28 7 BS 11 BS 22 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F BS 12 oo 0000 oO Sa d hes IBS IP CDO 1 24 F G G 0 0 9 O Oo o0 0 O O p 2 TI Ed ji ji IBS IP CDI 1 24 F o OO 0r O0 iO 0290 297 BS 24 11 EET CTT WAS 2 O46 0 47 46 0 47 7 IBS DI 32 A Ie 40 0 41 38 7 39 7 IBS BS 25 5003B604 Figure 6 8 Exemplary I O address allocation for the DCBADR example controlled start logical addressing and system
105. Error Confirmation Structure Negative 818C Message Code Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Reference Result Error Class Services PHCNIX CONTACT dius 8 ISFP 8 4 3 Response Indication 8 4 3 1 Abort Indication otructure 81AD Message Code Parameter Count Communication Heference Locally Abort ID Generated 8 4 3 2 Reject Indication otructure 81AE Message Code Parameter Count Communication Reference Detected here Original Invoke ID Reject Reject Code 8 4 3 3 Start Indication Structure 81A3 Message Code Parameter Count Communication Reference 8 4 3 4 Stop Indication Structure 81A4 Message Code Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Reference l PHCNIX SEN CONTACI THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 4 3 5 Information Report Indication Structure 81A5 Message Code Parameter Count Communication Heference Index Subindex Length Data pO E 0 Data 8 4 3 6 Read Indication Structure o esM Message Code Parameter Count Communication Heference 8 4 3 7 Write Indication Structure 5003B 81A2 Message Code Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Reference index
106. Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 005A User error Controller error On Causes One of the following command was not executed successfully e SET BK ALARM LOGICAL 0024 e RESET BK ALARM LOGICAL 0025 e SET BK ALARM PHYSICAL 0026 e RESET BK ALARM PHYSICAL 0027 Errors which cause this message are e no parameter or more than one parameter specified e non existent local bus addresses Remedy Check the application program for non existing local bus addresses and incorrect numbers of parameters Unknown INTERBUS S Module 005b Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Causes Unknown ID numbers were used in the RECEIVE PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION MAP command e An invalid I O word length has been specified in the CHECK PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION code 0058 command Aninvalid number of process data has been specified e The first module does not have bus terminal functionality Hemedies Check the parameterization lists of the ID numbers for non existent A 5003B length codes and the numbers of process data The bus changes without RESET to the stop state Output data is not reset The data cycle of the bus can only be re initialized with the WARMSTART command or the RESET button PHCENIX Tou CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENT
107. F IBS 24 BK I O T IBS BK T IBS 24 BK LC 2 IBS 24 BK I O IBS 230 BK IBS 24 BK IBS 24 BK LC There are also bus terminal modules with additional I O functions I O is included in the name If the supply voltage at a bus terminal module fails the controller board stops the N system and generates an error message for the remote bus segment concerned Bus terminal functions Coupling an installation remote bus and or local bus to the remote bus Supplying the I O modules with the operating voltage for the bus electronics Regenerating data in the remote bus Electrical isolation between remote bus segments Switching on or off the local bus installation remote bus and the outgoing remote bus Indicating errors via a floating alarm output For the IBS 24 BK LC 2 reconfiguration by means of an external pushbutton 5003B PHCENIX Ini CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview Incoming remote bus Local bus or installation remote bus ia nk EH UH EM on g EAA T T TT Bus terminal module Outgoing remote bus 5001A106 Figure 1 7 Remote bus at the interface to the local bus 1 3 5 Local Bus The local bus is a local branch of the main remote bus line which is used inside of a switch cabinet It allows the variable and low cost installation of a distributed substation The local bus is coupled via a bus terminal module to the main remote bus line In
108. IBS 24 BK I O T 2 2 2 IBS 24 DI 32 4 4 IBS 24 AI 3 8 8 8 28 22 n 42 The numbers are given in bytes Number of user data bytes 42 Number of the remote bus modules installed 7 Cable length copper e g 400 m tcycle 13 6 n 1 5 m tgit tsw ten cycle 13 6 42 1 5 7 0 002 ms 0 2 ms 0 016 ms km 0 4 km 1 475 ms 1 8 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview PLC oo o E o o o o Oo o ri o o o o o o o LUTTER EXER 2I LE Host controller board Bus terminal IP 20 Remote bus Installation remote bus OOo 0 Bus terminal pe nose 0 NE 8 IP 65 Local bus Bus terminal IP 20 ALI 5001A108 Figure 1 3 INTERBUS S topology with the various bus types 5003B PHCENIX 1 9 CONTACT 1 System Overview 1 2 5 Basic System Specifications Remote bus Max bus cable length between
109. ID code 23 hex This has the following consequences The messages battery and power fail are not used for the motor relay module The I O data is processed byte by byte The inputs and outputs of a bus terminal module can be switched off As of firmware 3 71 IBS devices with a process data length of 26 words are supported These devices have a length code of 1 7180 in the more significant byte of the ID word Chapter 8 3 3 Function block EVENT FB 76 Page 8 85 valid as of ISFP version 2 3 The following features were implemented for the event processing Comparison of an input with a given pattern Counting of the occurred events in the associated event counters Suppression of event indications Readout of the event counters Event processing is only possible with digital IBS modules Chapter 2 3 1 1 I O Status Indicators Page 2 5 ff Mode 9 settings Besides the familiar direct error indication with the red LEDs CTRL RB LB MOD and the associated parameters on the diagnostic front plate firmware 3 71 includes further service information This service information can be accessed with the switch setting MODE 9 and an associated address The associated data is displayed via the three position diagnostic display Note MODE 9 must be used for service purposes only Table 3 summarizes the data shown on the front plate 5003BC04 PHCENIX 9 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementa
110. Interfaces o y O BSBT R Wnom 4 2FPh 1 2 2 2 BSBTKET R Jj 4 f Fh 1 2 2 J j 2 BSCNT L jWidow2 199 C h 1 2 2 2 4 BSV24 L J X3 CBh 0 2 2 BSAIS6 L 207 crn 1 2 2 2 4 BSAISjB L 207 07 1 2 2 2 4 BSAIGB L 207 07 1 2 2 2 4 BSUTHJ L 1 2 2 2 4 BSUTHK L J2Y CFh 1 j 2 2 2 j 4 Local Remote states whether the IB S station is a local or remote bus station Physical address states whether the IB S station is located in window 1 or window 2 when physical addressing is used ID code ID code in a decimal and hexadecimal form Length code IN AR specifies the address area which a module occupies with its IN addresses OUT AR specifies the address area which a module occupies with its OUT addresses PCP AR specifies the address area which a module specifies with its PCP addresses Register width Quantity of bytes which an IB S station uses in the data ring This information facilitates the address assignment and provides information on the bus utilization The maximum INTERBUS S extension has 256 data words This information refers to the physical bus structure The quantity of words results from the sum of the register widths quantity in bytes Bus utilization The quantity of PCP bytes must be considered when the bus utilization is determined as it influ
111. ONE RET 1 Common error causes are e the use of an unknown group number e the use of a group number which is not within the permissible range 0 to 255 Result The bus is stopped and the outputs are reset The Start INTERBUS S Cycle function from the CONTROL function block FB 68 FKT 1 can be used to restart the bus The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not be activated within the specified timeout 8 2 4 2 Group OFF FKT 1 The Group OFF function allows to deactivate a group of local buses which has been defined before FB 72 FB 69 FKT 6 The number of this group is to be passed to the function as a parameter If the Group OFF function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 The group is put into operation and can be addressed via the application program When an error occurred during function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 Common error causes are e the use of an unknown group number or e the use of a group number which lies not within the permissible range 0 to 255 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not been activated within the set time 8 2 4 3 BK Alarm ON FKT 2 The BK Alarm ON function sets the bus terminal alarm output The bus segment number of the local bus in which the bus terminal module is located is specified as a parameter If the function has been executed without errors the
112. ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 3 Diagnostic Registers The host controller board has two registers for evaluating the error indications through the PLC The registers occupy one word each in the PLC s input area and are an image of the diagnostic indicators LEDs display on the controller board 4 3 1 Diagnostic Bit Register The diagnostic bit register represents the operating and error states of the controller board and corresponds to the LEDs on the front plate Every error bit indicates a certain type of error MOD LB RB CTRL When the bit is logically 1 the corresponding status is active Byte n Byte n 1 7654321076543210 B MOD Heserved LB RB CTRL BSA RUN A BASP RE ADY 5003A406 Figure 4 16 Diagnostic bit register 4 3 2 Diagnostic Parameter Register The diagnostic parameter register provides additional information about the type of error or the error location It corresponds to the seven segment display on the front plate Byte n Byte n 1 7654321076543210 5003 407 Parameter Figure 4 17 Diagnostic parameter register 5003B PHCENIX Tues CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 3 3 Diagnostic Register Locations The locations of the registers depend
113. OOO OO OO OOOO O O J001 J003 J007 J008 J004 J005 006 J010 5003A205 Figure 2 10 Mounting positions of the jumpers and DIP switches The jumpers marked with do not exist on a board with revision C Chapter 2 3 2 shows how to find out the revision of your controller board These jumper settings must not be changed PHCENIX CONTACT 2 Technical Description THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 6 2 Operation in the Central Controller and Controller Expansion Unit Jumper J1 configures the host controller board for the use in a central controller CC or a controller expansion unit CEU 4 D CEU CC OIOIO Q0 ONE Q A8 A9 A 10 A 11 CEU CC Default state CC central controller 4 d Setting CEU Q A8 A9 A 10 A 11 CEUCC controller expansion unit 5003A206 Figure 2 11 Jumper J 1 configures the use in a CC or CEU The settings shown must always be kept Mixed alternate settings are not permitted The default state of the jumper below must be kept J9 Q Q 5003A227 Figure 2 12 Jumper J 9 in the default state 2 22 PHCENIX ix CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 6 3 Startup and Operating Mode Selection owitch SW6 can be used to configure t
114. P 0 Q 1 ADR Base address SW1 SW3 SW5 LE Window length in bytes Quit Receive Local Bus Code Map Confirmation 0105 Meaning The Receive Local Bus Code Map RHequest 0069 command was executed 9 2 7 Messages for Process Data Linkage Quit Receive Instructions Confirmation 00F2 Meaning Positive acknowledgment of the Receive Processing Instructions Request 005d command Processing Instructions Error Confirmation 80F3 Meaning Negative acknowledgment of the Receive Processing Instructions Request 005d command syntax Processing Instructions Error 80F3 Confirmation Quantity of subsequent words 2 1 Error number xxaa 2 Parameter number xxbb Key xxaa Error number acc to table xxbb Parameter number 00 lt bb lt FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal 5003B PHCENIX aoe CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages The error number gives the error type The parameter number identifies the parameter with the error Meaning of the error number 1 All memory occupied no instructions can be accepted parameter number 0 2 Unknown instruction code 3 Not enough parameters in the last instruction parameter number 0 4 No internal RAM free 5 Reserved 6 Logical output address does not exist 7 Logical input address does not exist 8 Invalid bit number A bit number larger than 15 for words or larger than 7 for bytes was spe
115. PHCENIX 8 41 CONTACT 8 ISFP THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Instruction code 1st instruction parameter mth instruction parameter Figure 8 21 General instruction structure If the Receive Bit Manipulation function was executed without errors the RETURN bit of the DEFINE function block FB69 is set to the value ZERO RET 0 All instructions listed are now accepted and appended to a possibly existing list If an error occurred when the function was executed the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 and the sent list is not accepted The error cause is described in the INTERBUS data block IBDB in the data word 62 DW 62 AN Instructions with invalid addresses will not be executed No special message is sent in this case Addresses and thus instructions become invalid e with logical addressing when previously used addresses do no longer exist or e with deactivated groups when the address is within the range of the deactivated group 8 42 Output data Process output data B Host output us output Input data Process Bus input Host input input data P n 7 Host INTERBUS S INTERBUS S PLC controller board module 5003A813 Figure 8 22 Bit manipulation PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Function groups of the bit manipulation Up to 300 instructions can be communicated with this command Bit manipulation prol
116. PLC is in operation 35 This block must not be programmed into an EEPROM The data block can be created with the following program sequence L KB 200 5E DB 9 DWO KH 0000 DWI KH 0000 DW199 KH 0000 Figure 8 11 DB 9 structure The data block is preset through the INITIB initialization block Contents of the IBDB The data block is used exclusively by the ISFP software and must not be modified by the application program However the user may change some parameters once These parameters must be set directly after the INITIB initialization block was called 1 Parameter quantity data words of the definition lists which the driver blocks transfer in every cycle With every call of a driver block one part of a command or a message between the controller board and the PLC is copied cf DEFINE function block The quantity of the parameters data words to be copied is preset to 20 parameters by the initialization block INITIB If the user requires a different data throughput this default value can be changed once after the initialization block has been called 8 14 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Quantity of the PCP activation or message bits to be used SPA FB 60 5003A831 Figure 8 12 Structure of the INTERBUS data block IBDB The INTERBUS data block IBDB allows to set the parameters of the CON IND function block which are to be sent or the par
117. RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred during function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 Possible error causes are the use of an unknown bus segment number or an address which does not lie in the permissible range 0 to 255 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not be forwarded to the controller board 8 60 PHCENIX POUE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 4 4 BK Alarm OFF FKT 3 The BK Alarm OFF function resets the bus terminal alarm output The bus segment number of the local bus in which the bus terminal module is located is specified as a parameter If the function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 2 0 If an error occurred during function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 Possible error causes are the use of an unknown bus segment number or an address which does not lie in the permissible range 0 to 255 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not be forwarded to the controller board 8 2 4 5 Event ON FKT 4 The Event ON function enables a previously defined event FB 69 FKT 5 The event identifier is to be specified in the NR parameter If the parameter has the value FFFF all defined events are enabled Event identifier 1 Event is enabled 0 Event is not enabled If the function has been executed without errors
118. Remark If there are one or several installation remote buses the location of the module in the bus system installation depth must be declared with the Receive Local Bus Code Map Request 0069 and Implement All Logical Address Maps Request 0040 commands Only then is the configuration complete Prerequisite When this command is used the INTERBUS S cycle must have been stopped Messages Positive Physical Configuration Map Valid Confirmation acknowledgment 007 Meaning The requested bus configuration agrees with the connected one and was stored on the controller board as initial configuration Negative acknowledgment Check Configuration Error Confirmation 0068 Meaning Requested and connected bus configuration are not identical Remark Nevertheless the controller board attempts to store the requested configuration as initial configuration If this is possible the board returns the message Check Configuration Error Confirmation 0068 Neg acknowledg Unknown Bus Module Confirmation 005b Meaning e The first module in the bus configuration is not a bus terminal module e A number of process data words was specified which is not permitted Hemark Only in this case is the requested configuration not stored as initial configuration Pune Check Physical Configuration Request 0058 Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 tstmodle n nhmodue ppi Number of process data ID code Key PC Para
119. S5 PLCs Controller boards and documentation concerned Boards IBS S5 DCB I T Order No 27 58 156 IBS S5 DCB T Order No 28 06 21 5 Firmware Previous version 3 71 Update version 3 72 Upgrade A hardware upgrade with the update version is possible with Hardware version IBS GB S5 9166835 C Plug on board type MA5 The firmware can be updated as of Firmware version 3 3x User manuals German IBS S5 DCB UM Order No 28 06 23 1 English IBS 35 DCB UM E Order No 27 58 36 3 12 PHCENIX 5003BC04 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Diagnostic Performance as of FW 3 72 With firmware version 3 72 the diagnostic performance of the controller board was further improved This performance manifests itself when bus operation was frequently interrupted In this case the controller board stops bus operation and resets all outputs In an additional diagnostic phase the entire bus configuration without the controller board is examined The blinking display on the front plate and a set analysis bit in the diagnostic register bit 15 indicate this error analysis phase mE m Detection of remote bus local bus module errors in the bus configuration and hardware or firmware errors on the controller board Diagnotics GHI operato Detection of changes in the bus configuration Detection of located CRC errors Long reset aft
120. The RETURN bit is cleared RET 0 if both configurations are identical The RETURN bit is set RET 1 if the read and sent configurations differ The TIMEOUT bit is set to ZERO TO 0 if the function could be executed The specified configuration is taken as the initial configuration by the controller board An INTERBUS S error must be expected if the bus is now started The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not be processed within the specified time Parameter meanings example DB n DW m 0 KY 000 XXX m 1 KY ZZZ YYY Length and ID codes of module 0 m 2 KY ZZZ YYY Length and ID codes of module 1 m 3 KY ZZZ YYY Length and ID codes of module 2 m k KY ZZZ YYY Length and ID codes of module k n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter lists begins k Quantity of subsequent parameters ZZZ Length code of the module address width YYY Module identification code ID no of the module XXX Parameter count 35 The list of the module identification codes ID codes and the length codes can be found in Chapter 3 User Interfaces 8 30 PHCENI X 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 2 2 Logical Local Bus Address Map FKT 1 The Logical Local Bus Address Map function communicates the list of logical bus segment numbers to the controller board The bus segment numbers logical local bus address are ente
121. a 1 KY 2 Xy a 1 DW m a maa KY x y a Abbreviations a Quantity of modules in the INTERBUS S system n Number of the data block used m Number of the first data word used X Details of the address area P area 0 Q area 1 y Start address for the module which is located at this position in the INTERBUS S system Figure 3 5 Structure of the parameter lists for the addressing PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 4 3 Addressing The bus topology in this example for the LOGICAL ADDRESSING is identical with Figure 3 2 The following example shows two data blocks which have been completely filled in The addresses which have been used in these data blocks lead to the address distribution shown in the two figures The settings of the DIP switches from the example for the physical addressing were kept The assignment of the addresses is independent of the set INTERBUS S windows 1 and 2 All modules which are connected to the bus and the registers diagnostic and bit controlled command registers which INTERBUS S makes available can be addressed in the entire I O area of the PLC The addresses which have been addressed in such a way must not be used by SIMATIC I O modules For modules which occupy addresses in the input field as well as in the output field it is now possible to use the same address for the respective input and output words Data words Data block
122. activated repeatedly in the cyclic program The functions of the ADDRESS function block are activated after the BUSY bit was set to the value ONE BUSY 1 If the function was executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The error cause is described in the EREG error register The function block contains different individual functions e Alarmstop INTERBUS S Cycle Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 3 e Configure INTERBUS S Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 0 e Physical Configuration Map Request DEFINE FB 69 FKT O e Logical Local Bus Address Map Request DEFINE FB 69 FKT 1 e Implement All Logical Address Map Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 6 e Logical IN Address Map Request DEFINE FB 69 FKT 2 e Implement All Logical Address Map Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 6 e Logical OUT Address Map Request DEFINE FB 69 FKT 3 e Implement All Logical Address Map Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 6 Communication Reference Request DEFINE FB 69 FKT 4 e Group Numbers Request DEFINE FB 69 FKT 6 e Clear Display Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 4 e Start INTERBUS S Cycle Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 1 e Init Communication Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 7 e Disable All Messages Request CONTROL FB 68 FKT 5 SPB FB 72 5003B817 Figure 8 29 Structure of the ADDRESS function block FB 72 8 62 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS IBDB B DB INTERBUS d
123. address B Input address ADR Bit number input address B B Bit number is to be specified as number 0000pney 000Fnex ADR l O address 00180 255gec 35 If the specified bit in the bit manipulation register is set the instructions act like Heset OUT INO1 and Reset OUT IN10 If the specified bit in the bit manipulation register is not set the command is not effective and no bit manipulation takes place The bit manipulation register is to be defined with logical addressing before the two commands are used ID code register bit manipulation ID 19 Up to 15 register can be defined 50038 PHCENIX 8 47 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Instruction list structure The controller board is programmed by means of an instruction list in which the edge type CODE1 2 the output bit and the input bit are described The commands are appended to the existing list once they have been communicated Thus it is possible to communicate commands individually and to test the result If the first sent parameter is a O any list existing in the controller board is deleted before subsequent parameters are checked Appending a list n Parameter count C CODE instruction 1 BIT ADR Output bit BIT ADR Input bit C CODE instruction 2 BIT ADR Output bit BIT ADR Input bit BIT ADR Input bit Deleting of the old list and transferring a new one n Parameter
124. an additional diagnostic function on the controller board which monitors the system while the bus is running A PC evaluates the data and displays them MOD ERR The MOD ERR Module Error occurs in the event of an error in an INTERBUS S module The display and or the diagnostic parameter register indicate the number of the bus segment in which the reporting module is located The error is indicated only for modules with a bus acknowledgment The error does not lead to the stopping of the bus A The I O data of the reporting local bus module does not correspond to the up to data signal states There must be no access to the bus addresses concerned 4 6 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Display of errors The different error types have different priorities If several errors occur simultaneously the error with the highest priority will be displayed If several errors occur with the same priority the error which occurred first will be displayed Priority 1 is always the highest Table 4 1 Priorities of error types Error type Parameter Priority CTRLERR Ermorcode hex RB ERR Bus segment no dec 1 LB ERR Bus segment no dec 1 MOD ERR Bus segment no dec 2 CTRL ERR The CTRL ERR Controller Error reports an error that is limited to the controller board or to its parameterization The display and the diagnostic par
125. an error has been detected in the logical addressing lists sent to the controller board for example the consistency for a module is incorrect The bus changes without RESET to the STOP state The outputs are not N reset Remedy Check the logical addressing lists e The EREG register of the addressing block indicates the erroneous list e n the addressing sequence EEPROM an error is output which can be fetched by the parameterization software via the V 24 RS 232 interface 35 The erroneous parameter can be displayed with the SEND LOGICAL ADDRESS ERROR command INTERBUS S System Error 0038 Error type INTERBUS S error Error LED IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause An error has occurred in the INTERBUS S system that leads to a situation in which a system is no longer executable with the last configuration This error is reported immediately by the controller board A test routine is then running to localize the error in the system The LBERR LED or RBERR LED becomes active error found after the routine was executed While the error is located the bus does not run a data cycle The error is only sent as a message The diagnostics indicates an LB or RB 4 42 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces IPMS Extern Error Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Causes Hemedies A 003b Har
126. be assigned only once The 4th parameter is the mask 1 for positive edges A 1 means that an edge change from zero to one for this bit is reported as an event 0 to 16 bits can be identified If a zero appears no edge check takes place for the bit concerned The 5th parameter is the mask 2 for negative edges A 1 means that an edge change from one to zero is reported as an event for the bit concerned O to 16 bits can be identified If a zero appears no edge check takes place for the bit concerned PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 2 7 Group Numbers FKT 6 Several local buses can be combined to one group If no groups have been defined all local buses belong to one group To be able to deactivate a single local bus or installation remote bus this bus must be assigned a group of its own The group s number can be freely chosen between 0 and 255 Equally several installation remote buses can be combined in one group Bus stations which have only one remote bus connection such as the IBS IP N modules can only form a group of their own This does not apply to bus stations of the type IBS BK I O T and IBS BB1 The Group Numbers function communicates the list of group definitions to the controller board The controller board does not accept the list until after a test This test checks whether e the addresses are valid e the addresses do not occur several times e the group
127. bits 12 14 Measuring range Upper Limit from bits 12 14 Measuring Value from bits 00 11 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Chapter 4 Diagnostic Interfaces This chapter provides information on the possibilities for hard and software supported diagnostics on the controller board the I O status indications in the connected bus system the diagnostic functions on modules and bus terminal modules the use of the Hand Held Monitor and the monitor program for diagnostic support 4 Diagnostic Interfaces e 4 1 4 1 Diagnostics on the Controller Board s Front Plate 4 2 4 1 1 Operating Indicators 4 4 4 1 2 449 92198 RT 4 5 4 1 3 Error Codes for Controller Errors CTRL 4 8 4 2 Notes on Error 0 80009108 nenne 4 11 4 2 1 Indication of Errors on the Front Plate 4 12 4 2 2 Example of a
128. block is given presettings and the function is terminated In the controlled start mode with EEPROM the controller board is monitored with the INITIB function during the initialization If it reports READY the IBDB data block is given presettings Only after the board is in the RUN state addressing via EEPROM card will the function be terminated 35 The address location of the communication registers determines the selection of the driver blocks Addresses Block FB No P area INITIB FB 60 Q area INITIBQ FB 61 The INITIB initialization block operates independently when the automatic start or the controlled start with EEPROM card are used However if the board is addressed cyclically controlled start via the function blocks the CON IND and REQ RES driver blocks must be loaded 8 6 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS OB 20 21 22 SPA FB 210 eee INITIB SOPA FB62 CON IND 807 FROG REQ RES U M 10 0 SPB LOOP 5003B803 Figure 8 3 Call with a driver With the help of the driver blocks the initialization block accesses the controller board The artificial cycle U M 10 0 gt SPB LOOP is terminated after the INITIB function block has synchronized the controller board with the PLC When the INITIB function block has been completed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred during the function blo
129. board 2 2 Asynchronous communication 2 2 Automatic diagnostics 2 18 Automatic start 2 21 2 24 6 2 6 4 8 6 Auxiliary function block 8 5 8 10 B Base address with even base address 3 14 with odd base address 3 14 Base address 2 30 Basic package 7 8 Basic specifications 2 40 Basic system specifications 1 10 BASP 2 6 4 4 Beginning of the process data s address area 2 30 Bit MOD 8 80 manipulation register 8 47 manipulation 8 43 number 8 43 controlled command register 5 3 BK for the installation remote bus 6 1 BK Alarm OFF 8 61 BK Alarm ON 8 60 Blocks active 5 8 passive 5 8 Block types 5 6 Board with system connector 2 3 BSA 2 6 4 4 Bus address 4 29 cable length 1 13 cable 1 1 cycle 2 7 2 39 display with an active 4 13 error 2 18 2 39 information 8 76 in the STOP 4 28 output bit 8 43 segment address list 8 67 segment number 8 31 8 60 8 61 stopping of the bus 4 5 structure physical 8 66 system start 5 2 Bus stations overview of the 3 4 PHCENIX zi CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Bus terminal alarm output 8 60 8 61 functions 1 15 module 1 3 1 13 1 15 module with I O functions 6 1 BUS bit 8 76 8 77 8 80 Busy bit register 5 13 Busy bit 5 8 8 16 8 18 Byte orientation 8 43 C Cable installation 7 2 Cable types 7 2 Cabling error 4 5 Call structure 8 3 CIDB data block 8 92 8 88 8 95 CIH 8 5 8 10 CIMW 8 92
130. code m v 1 5 3 KY 000 AAA Address m v 1 5 4 KM PPPP PPPP PPPP PPPP Mask 1 m v 1 5 5 KM NNNN NNNN NNNN NNNN Mask 2 n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins 5003B PHCENIX 8 35 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP The parameter block listed above defines an event Up to 15 further events in the form shown above parameters 1 to 5 can be programmed with the subsequent parameters The parameter count which is to be entered into the data word is 10 for 2 event definitions or 15 for 3 event definitions etc 8 36 An identifier is assigned in the first parameter of each block As the identifier one bit in the data block must be set to 1 and the rest must be set to 0 Thus for example KM 0000 0000 0000 0001 Identifier event 1 KM 0000 0000 0000 0010 Identifier event 2 KM 0100 0000 0000 0000 Identifier event 15 Each identifier must be assigned only once During the program routine the identifier is reported if an event occurs Several bits may be set if several events occur in one INTERBUS S cycle the identifiers are ORed The 2nd parameter is the event code At the moment only events for digital inputs can be defined The code is KH 0004 The 3rd parameter contains the logical IN address of the word that is to report an event in response to an edge change Each address must
131. code Quantity of subsequent parameters Communication reference Pointer to the body with the data block and data word lst CODE PC 3 KR DB DW 2nd Cg PC x KR amp DIB 72 lA4thCODE BC KR 3 DB DW LOCO CODE PG 3 KR DB DW PHCENIX CONTACT 6 53 6 Startup DB23 CON IND standard DB Unexpected services and service bodies are entered into this data block A service which was entered is indicated with the message bit O Structure CODE PC KR Body Us The KH 2 KH iy KH 4 KH oi KH 6 KH J KH Ds KH J KH 10 KH UE KH l2 KH nS T KH l4 KH 6 54 KH gH PE Hg WoH Wo J H W H MW I OOO COO OO OOOO OOO COO OOO OOOO OOOO cc OOOO OOOO OOO Service code Quantity of subsequent parameters Communication reference Module dependent service body CODE 3 PC 5 KR BOGY PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup Bus topology for the DCBECP example IBS S5 008 T Diagnostic register Window 3 Functions Bit Parameter Active bits Busy bits Return bits 60 0 61 7 DCBECP 126 0 1 127 7 128 0 129 7 IW 200 202 OW 200 202 O 60 0 61 7 62 0 63 7 IBS BS 21 20 I IBS AO1
132. command was successfully executed Start Bus Not Possible Confirmation 00E3 Meaning This is a negative acknowledgment of the Start Bus Cycle Request 0001 command It is sent if no data traffic operation is possible Cause e Hardware error on the controller board e All groups are switched off Configuration change in the remote bus 9 42 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 2 3 Messages for Configuration Send Physical Configuration Confirmation 80F4 Meaning Positive acknowledgment of the Send Physical Configuration Request 005 oyntax Send Physical Configuration Request 80F4 Quantity of subsequent words 1 Bus register ID code rrii n Bus register ID code rrii 15 0 Key PC Parameter count quantity of the connected modules rrii Number of registers O lt rr lt 127 ID code 0 lt ii lt FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal The parameters 1 to n provide information on the physical bus configuration The BUS REGISTER parameter gives the number of registers bus registers used for the process data on the bus The number is always given in accordance with the data type of the registers With byte oriented modules bit 15 is set to 1 The ID NUMBER parameter gives the identification code of the connected modules in the order of the module installation Example A byte oriented module with 2 bytes has two bus
133. components for their specific application 5003B PHCENIX a CONTACT 1 System Overview Overview of INTERBUS S compatible devices Host controller boards interface boards for programmable logic controllers PLC industrial computers and or PCs O units for digital inputs outputs analog inputs outputs degrees of protection IP 20 IP 65 High tech control systems for automatic wrenching positioning robots Drives DRIVECOM standard general motion control Pneumatic valve terminals Encoders Identification systems Operator and display units Further devices with INTERBUS S interface are in preparation 1 2 INTERBUS S Topology THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS INTERBUS S is installed in the system as a compact single circuit line following one direction Starting at the host controller board the bus system connects the respective control or computer systems with the distributed I O modules INTERBUS S modules The main line that is led through the plant is called remote bus and covers the distances between the distributed substations Local branches spur lines are possible from the remote bus Depending on the type they are either called installations remote bus or local bus 1 2 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview The installation remote bus corresponds according to its structure to the remote bu
134. describes the logical assignment between the physical segment structure with the help of the module position and the logical segment numbering Another parameter defines the remote bus structure installation depth A bus segment consists of a BK with connected local bus b Remote bus modules with inputs outputs c IBS ST bus terminal module d Installation remote bus module The logical numbering of the segments is done with the bus terminal module The structure of the list parameter count is adapted to the ID code list The segment number 0 to 255 is entered at every bus terminal location in the list Installation depth The remote bus structure is divided into the main remote bus line installation depth 0 and the installation remote bus installation depth 216 Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY IT SN 1st module BK DW y 2 KY 000 000 DW y n 2 KY IT SN nth module BK DW y n 1 KY 000 000 Special ID code DW y n KY 000 000 Special ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n SN Bus segment no 0 255 IT Installation depth 0 Main line 16 Installation remote bus DB11 J KY 000 016 Parameter count Li KY 000 021 IBS 24 BK T 23 KY 000 000 LBS 24 Di Se KY 000 000 IBS AO 3 2s KY 000 000 IBS 24 DO 5s KY 000 000 IBS PT 100 A 2 6 Ky 000 011 IBS IP DIO 1 24 7 KY 000 022 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 8 Rx OG 027 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 9 KY
135. field who are entrusted with the applicable national standards Phoenix Contact assumes no liability for erroneous handling of or damage to Phoenix Contact or external products resulting from disregard or information contained in this manual PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Supplementary Notes IBS S5 DCB UM E Order No 27 58 36 3 Revision B Although the manual was thoroughly checked some additions became necessary after its publication Please observe the following notes Chapter 7 2 Cable Installation InterBus was designed for industrial use Compatibility and the listed harmonized European standaras the following speci fica tions are to be observed besides the installation guidelines in the relevant ma nuals and Data Sheets To fulfill the requirements of the EMC directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Connect in the immediate vicinity max 25 cm of the controller board the remote bus cable shield to the equipontential bonding conductor see figure below lt S E X 50010010 Figure C1 Example for grounding the shield with a metal clamp The controller board shown is of no specific type Expose the braided shield only over the length required for grounding the shield 33 without causing damage to the b
136. function block FB 76 No of a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be created by the user IBDB B DB INTERBUS data block Length DW 0 DW 199 fev la 0 li Event has occurred Cf identifier 0 No event occurred The identifiers are ORed if several events occur EVKN A W Event identifier of the events which occurred SPA FB 76 NAME EVENT IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block EV M 4 7 Event message EVKN MW 18 Event identification Figure 8 40 Call of the EVENT function block FB 76 5003B PHCENIX 8 83 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 Working with Communication 8 4 1 Introduction Communication is a term used to describe the fact of being able to talk to each other and understand each other A prerequisite is that both partners speak the same language and are able to contact each other Besides dedicated communication its direction is also defined in order to perform a specific task The sequence can be described as follows e Two partners are always required for successful communication On the one side orders are issued and on the other side they are executed e An order is not issued until it is certain that the entity entrusted with the order is also capable of executing it e After execution of the order its success or failure is reported back to the one who ordered e In an equivalent relationship both par
137. get the message the CON IND driver block FB 62 and its CIH auxiliary driver FB63 must be linked to the OB1 same parameterization as for the startup 6 14 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup b Program structure of the example OB 20 21 22 SPA FB 210 gt FB 210 SPB FB 60 gt FB 60 SPA FB 62 SPB FB 72 FB 62 FB 63 SPA FB 66 gt FB72 c Schematized program example Startup Block FB 210 M 80 ON M 8 0 S M 80 S M 10 0 LOOPF U M 80 SPB FB60 SPA FB62 UN M 80 U M 10 0 8608 FB72 SPA FB66 M 80 M 10 0 SPB LOOP 5003B FB 66 5003A612 gt INITIB FEN3 AV 3 CON IND ADDRESS ID code list Bus segment list IN address list OUT address list REQ RES 5003B613 PHCENIX CONTACT 6 15 6 Startup OB 20 21 22 NAME EB ZLO LOOP NAME LBDEB FEN3 AV RRST CIST RRMW CIMW CIFB SLEP BUSY IO REI 6 16 ADIPS C IE UC 63 Z SSNSSEES SPA FB 210 gt ANLAUF BE NE OWN F onlinecomponents com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS d Detailed program example with organization function and data blocks Activati
138. has been identified as disconnectible beforehand The INTERBUS S system does not need to be started again If none of the groups is identified as disconnectible the bus changes to the STOP state Parameter DB n DW m0 m 1 m 2 m k 8 2 meanings KY 000 OOK Parameter count KY YOO OXX Characteristics Local bus address KY YOO OXX Characteristics Local bus address KY YOO OXX Characteristics Local bus address No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored No of the DW with which the parameter list begins Quantity of parameters local buses 2 Local bus address group number of the previous local bus Characteristics 1 Operation continues 0 Disconnection default For the sequence schematic refer to the DEFINE function block and its Group Error Characteristics function FB 69 FKT 10 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 5 7 Communication Reference List The communication reference KR is the address designation of each PCP station It designates each station and simplifies allocation The KR addresses are entered for PCP stations only No entry is made for the other modules KR numbers from 2 to 63 are allowed KR numbers must be assigned continuously without gaps 2 3 4 starting with KR 2 The parameter count i e the module quantity is entered in data word m 0 Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Pa
139. in a different order PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 4 2 Structure of an INTERBUS S Address List The address lists which determine the assignments of the logical addresses for the INTERBUS S modules are stored in the data blocks of the PLC or via the PC in the EEPROM memory card The address lists are established according to a typical pattern which is also used for other INTERBUS S definition lists The entries of an address list are called parameters e The first parameter of a definition list is the parameter COUNTER It indicates how many parameters follow In most address this value equals the number of modules which are connected to the INTERBUS S system e All parameters of a definition list have to be entered one after another The must be no gaps within one list e The position of a parameter in a definition list corresponds to the location number of the module in the INTERBUS S system to which the entry of this parameters has been assigned That means that the first parameter of the first list after the COUNTER parameter refers to the first module in the system The second parameter after the COUNTER parameter refers to the second parameter etc Data words Data block Location number used structure on INTERBUS x DW m m KY 0 a DW m 1 m 1 KY Xy 1 DW m 2 m 2 KY 2 Xy 2 DW m 3 m43 KY Xy 3 DW m a 1 m
140. in the decoder EEPROM addressing the I O modules Then the controller board updates the contents of the decoder EEPROM by adding the new addresses The PLC cannot recognize these address changes in the decoder EEPROM N anymore This results in an acknowledgment delay or the non recognition of the changed addresses 33 This may also occur during the first startup because each controller board has been tested at the factory so that the decoder EEPROM contains valid addresses Remedy for case a Press the STOP RUN switch of the PLC again Then the PLC is communicated the new addresses and the application program can recognize them opecial case b When you set the communication register window 3 4 bytes inputs 4 bytes outputs to addresses which have previously been occupied by other modules the ADDRESS and INITIB function blocks of the ISFP software software to simplify INTERBUS S operation see Chapter 8 cannot address the controller board Hemedies for case b 1 Switch off the voltage 2 Set the controller board to the automatic start mode hardware switch SW6 switch 3 to ON switch 2 to OFF see Figure 2 17 3 Set the base addresses of window 1 and window 2 to valid addresses hardware switches SW1 and SW3 4 Change the PLC to the STOP mode and switch on the voltage indication on the board the READY BASP and RUN LEDs light up 5 Switch off the voltage 6 Parameterize the controller board and for logical addressi
141. in which the parameter list is stored m Number of the data word DW with which the parameter list starts k Quantity of the subsequent parameters here module quantity 277 Length code XXX ID code for modules The INTERBUS S configuration is entered in the list To do this the ID numbers and the length codes of the individual I O modules and BKs Table 3 2 have to be known PHCENIX CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces IB S station Local Physical ID code Length INAR Pte RCP AR Register Module type Remote address dec hex code bytes bytes bytes width _85240 L Windows 130 8h 1 2 2 _85600 L 130 82 1 2 J 2 85 24 0 0 L 150 9 1 2 J 2 BS24D 32 L 142 EH 2 4 J j 4 BS24DIS2UF2 L M2 8h 2 4 J 4 _85240 L 146 92 1 2 J j 2 _851200 L 1388 8 1 2 J j 2 _852300 L 134 8h 1 2 J 2 83 0 CDI 1 24 R 10 An 429 1 J 1 BSIPCDI2DAF R 10 An 122 1 1 BST24DI322 L 190 BE 2 4 2 BST24DIT64 L j 190 BE 1 2 J j j 1 IBS 24D0a 1 L Widow 129 81 1 2 2 IBS 24 DO B L Window 129 8th 1 2 2 86 24 00 0 L 149 95h 1
142. is disconnected or connected If an error LB RB error occurs in this group the bus is stopped and the defective group is disconnected provided that this group was identified as disconnectible beforehand The remaining bus parts can be put into operation again with the Start INTERBUS S command 35 I O bus terminal modules communication interface boards slave boards or similar modules the I O words of which cannot be defined and disconnected as a local bus must not be combined in a group with other bus elements Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1 KY 000 OXX Local bus address m 2 KY 000 OYY Group no 0 255 m 3 KY 000 OXX Local bus address m 4 KY 000 OYY Group no 0 255 m k 1 KY 000 OXX Local bus address m k KY 000 OYY Group no 0 255 n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of parameters local buses 2 XXX Local bus address YYY Group number of the previous local bus 50038 PHCENIX 8 71 CONTACT 8 ISFP THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 5 6 Group Error Characteristics Prerequisite Group definition The combining of several local buses to one group determines that these local buses can only be ope automatical rated together If an error LB RB error occurs in a group the defective group is ly disconnected provided that it
143. length of window 1 window 1 49 Invalid address length Address length Correct address length of window 2 window 2 4A _ Differences between ID list and ID list or bus Compare the ID list and the existing existing bus configuration bus configuration 4b Too many parameters in the User program Reduce parameter quantity command 4C Error in event list User program Check event list 4d Hardware error Controller board Perform RESET 4E Toomany PLC commands sent User program Reduce number of sent PLC within a short time commands per time 4F Not available 90 Firmware error Controller board send in controller board 1 Firmware error i 55 Group definition error User program Check group definitions 56 Notavailable 57 Firmware error Controller board send in controller board 08 Firmware error 99 Undefined group no User program Check definitions of group numbers 5A Undefined BK alarm set User program Check local bus addresses and or parameter quantity 5b Invalid ID code or invalid I O word User program Check the RECEIVE PHYSICAL length CONFIGURATION MAP and CHECK PHYSICAL 998 CONFIGURATION commands Not available 65 Too many communication modules User error Reduce number of communication modules 66 Invalid communication reference o
144. location 1 4 System connector INTERBUS S master board The system connector is the link between host controller board and PLC 5 Mounting location 2 6 Jumper IBS S5 DCB I T Reserved location Settings Mode of operation Interrupt selection Master slave 7 DC DC converter 8 DIL switch for addressing Two DC DC converters for electrical The addresses of the controller board are set isolation of the board s voltage supply by means of DIL switches No address settings one converter is fitted are required for the controlled DCB mode see 2 5 3 2 3 6 9 Version number 10 Decoder EEPROM Version and controller board designation The decoder EEPROM stores the configured are noted on the back of the board addresses PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 4 Host Controller Board Installation 2 4 1 Slot Allocation and Installation The DCB consists of a printed board in the double Euroformat The front plate covers two slots for printed circuit boards In SIMATIC PLCs of the type 130 U and larger the controller board can be directly inserted In SIMATIC 115 U PLOs an adaptation casing must be used A standard EEPROM memory card stores the non volatile configuration data e g logical addressing On the host controller board the memory card is located below the mounting location 1 see Figure 2 4 3 The memory card sits in a holding support with an
145. means of front plate diagnostics diagnostic registers software diagnostics via the PLC RS 232 via PC monitor Two wire remote bus connection 9 pos D SUB connector female RS 232 connection 9 pos D SUB connector male PHCENIX bas CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 10 Appendix Hardware oize The controller board occupies two narrow slots 115 U with adaptation casing 130 U 155 U directly pluggable Address area P area Q area Multiprocessor operation Yes Interrupt operation NO Current consumption 1 3 A at 5 volts Temperature Operation 0 to 60 C Storage 25 C to 80 C Humidity Operation 70 96 Storage 95 EEPROM 16 64 kbytes memory card format 10 3 Contents of the Data Diskette The files listed below are stored on the diskette which is included in the delivery These files contain example programs which are mentioned and explained in Chapter 6 They illustrate the addressing and programming methods shown in Chapter 6 All files should only be used for SIMATIC S5 PLCs a DCBPHYST S5D DCBADRST S5D DCBEEPST S5D DCBZYKST S5D DCBCP ST S5D DCBECPST S5D The following files are not mentioned in the user manual However they are useful when counter modules V 24 modules or communication compatible analog input modules have to be addressed b DCBCNFST S5D DCBCNTST S5D DCBV24ST S5D DCBAI ST S5D The diskette also contains a file with the ISFP software V2 2
146. numbers are within the range from 0 to 255 O BKs or similar modules are only defined singly in one group If the Group Numbers function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred during the function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 50038 PHCENIX 8 37 CONTACT 8 ISFP Parameter meanings DB DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1 KY 000 OXX Local bus address m 2 KY 000 OXX Group no 0 255 m 3 KY 000 OXX Local bus address m 4 KY 000 OXX Group no 0 255 ade 1KY 2 000 OXX Local bus address m k KY 000 OXX Group no 0 255 n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Parameter count local buses 2 XX Local bus address YY Group number of the previous local bus 8 2 2 8 Parameter Timeout Constant FKT 7 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The Parameter Timeout Constant function initializes the timeout constant after which the Controller Parameter Timeout Error message is reported The error occurs if the acknowledgment for a command could not be retrieved in time The function expects 2 parameters containing the timeout in milliseconds hex Parameter meanings DB P m 0 KY 000 OOK m 1 KH 00xx Most significant word m 2 KH xxxx Least significant word n No of the DB in which the p
147. occurs in the INTERBUS S system Reasons CTRL Error on the controller board RB Remote bus error LB Local bus error Jumper J4 2 1 Bus error message 2 Bus error message disabled enabled OO 0 O O O 5003A223 Figure 2 33 Enabling and disabling of bus error messages 2 6 7 Disconnecting the RESET Button The RESET button is located on the front plate of the PLC below the RS 232 interface When actuating the button only possible with a tool the host controller board and the connected INTERBUS S will be reset During the startup phase it might be necessary to reset the host controller board for test purposes During start however it is not desirable to press the RESET button Jumper J 10 allows to disable the RESET button Jumper J 10 ON OFF O O O Q 5003A224 Default state Figure 2 34 Disabling the RESET button with jumper J10 A RESET must only be performed when the PLC is in the STOP state When N the host controller board runs its self test no up to date inputs are read and no outputs are set In the controlled start mode the bus cycle is not re started no RUN All parameter settings are lost log addressing event definitions When an EEPROM card is inserted the boot sequence is run through PHCENIX CONTACT 2 Technical Description THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 7 Data Sheet Designation Basic specifications Contr
148. of a BK module and the preceding remote bus cable Parameter Decimal value No of the bus segment concerned LB Local Bus Error LED description RedLED Wrong local bus segment consisting of the individual local bus modules and the connecting bus cables Parameter Decimal value No of the bus segment concerned MOD Module Error LED description Red LED Defective module periphery O voltage failure Short circuit at the output Only for devices with status message Parameter Decimal value No of the bus segment concerned RB and LB Indication of the error location by specifying an area LED description Red LED Parameter Decimal value The parameter specifies the base bus segment number of the area concerned Group error messages with the error codes E01 E02 E04 E05 and E06 The error was assigned to a bus area which may consist of several bus segments 6 PHG NIX 5003BC04 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Table 1 Indication of the diagnostic data on the front plate Error in the displayed local bus segment Error in the displayed remote bus segment on on See Figure 2 the error cause is limited to the branch of the 1 preceding remote bus 2 preceding IB ST compact station local bus segment 3 preceding installation remote bus and the bus segment whose number is shown on the seven segment display of the fr
149. on the controller board s type of operation Permissible types of operation are the automatic and the controlled start Automatic start When the automatic start is used the diagnostic registers are placed below the input area of the two INTERBUS S windows The diagnostic bit register is located below the base address of window 1 register address base address minus 2 Window 1 Output Base address _ of window 1 Register Input 5003A404 Figure 4 18 Diagnostic bit register The diagnostic parameter register is located below the base address of window 2 register address base address minus 2 Window 2 Output Base address of window 2 Register Input 5003A405 Figure 4 19 Diagnostic parameter register 4 24 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Controlled start When the controlled start is used the diagnostic registers in the input area of the two INTERBUS S windows can be freely assigned The addresses are assigned by means of an ID code in the logical addressing ID code Diagnostic bit register ID 16 Diagnostic parameter register ID 17 The logical addressing assigns an address to the ID code at which the corresponding register is located Example ID List IN Address List KY 000 016 KY 000 032 KY 000 017 KY 000 034 Diagnostic bit register IW 32 Diagnostic parameter
150. overall current consumption of these components must not exceed 4 5 A The current consumption of the actuators is not added to the calculation because the actuators are supplied with a separate voltage 1 14 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview Calculation example for determining the number of modules in the installation remote bus Let us assume that the following components are used in an installation remote bus The information on the current consumption of the I O modules and initiators is taken from the appropriate data sheets Table 1 1 Example for testing the load capacity of an installation remote bus Current consumption by the module electronics of 100 mA a CDO or CDI module Current consumption of a typical initiator 25 mA Number of CDO modules 4 Number of CDI modules 8 Number of the connected initiators 27 Bus operation is ensured in this example 1 3 4 Bus Terminal Module A bus terminal module belongs to the remote bus It connects a local bus cf Chapter 1 3 5 and or installation remote bus to the remote bus cf Chapter 1 3 2 The supply voltage of a bus terminal module must be maintained even when parts of the system are disconnected Only then can it be guaranteed that the remaining part of the bus system can continue operation Bus terminal modules may be identified by the designation BK IBS IP CBK 1 24
151. parameters keep timeout Not available 23 Bus error causes the triggering Controller board Check bus configuration 24 Interferences on the address Controller board Localize and remove interferences and or bus or addressing error of the addressing errors controller board 2A Unknown IB module Order new firmware inquire at Phoenix Contact 2b Address list error User program Check address lists Not available l l 3b Cycle end due to external signal Controller board Check bus configuration for interferences 3C FIFO overflow error Controller board Perform RESET 3d Hardware error Controller board Perform RESET SE __ Firmware error Controller board send in controller board SF Firmware error send in controller board 40 Firmware error i i 41 Firmware error i i 42 Firmware error i 43 _ Firmware error i 44 Firmware error i 45 Firmware error i 46 Invalid base address Base add window 1 Change base address of window 1 4 8 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Code Meaning Error location Remedy 47 Invalid base address Base addr window 2 Correct base address of window 2 48 Invalid address length Address length Correct address
152. parameters that were not sent within the specified time of 5 s Check the application program e g PCP services The PLC is in the STOP state A command which has just been written has not yet been transferred completely The timeout can be set with the SET PARAMETER TIMEOUT CONSTANT command It has been specified to 7 88 s If required the time can be set to a higher or lower value The error message is written regardless of the handshake If this error message interrupts receipt of another message the message which has already been partly received is no longer valid because it is overwritten by the error message Hardware error Controller error Off RESET Triggering of the watchdog Please contact Phoenix Contact PHCENIX CONTACT 0023 4 39 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Add Error Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Causes Hemedies CHK Zerodiv Error Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Cause Remedy A Bad Exception Error Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Remedy A 4 40 0024 Hardware error Controller error Off RESET Addressing error on the host controller board or interferences on the address bus of the controller board Check the addressing list on the controller board In the case of interferences please contact Phoen
153. registers Window 3 of the controller board is called communication register The application program is not allowed to read or write the register areas Access is exclusively done via standard function blocks The function blocks are included in a software package called ISFP The software includes two driver blocks which send commands to the controller board FB REQ RES and receive messages such as error and control messages from the board FB CON IND These components ensure simple operation of the communication registers 2 Bit controlled command register Input and output words are defined as registers for bit controlled commands The register areas which are addressed by means of an ID code are divided into two input words and one output word Every bit 0 15 represents a program sequence e g logical addressing which has been stored in the EEPROM card The program sequence can be started with an output bit so called activation bit and the execution can be monitored with two input bits BUSY and RETURN These registers allow simple operation of complex program sequences during startup or in the PLC cycle 3 Serial interface RS 232 This interface can be used to couple a programming interface to the controller board A 9 pos D SUB connector is provided on the controller board s front plate for this PHCENIX CONTACT 5 System Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 2 Command and Message Structu
154. system functions for the PLC 5 2 5 5 systems installation 7 2 Interface description 5 1 Interface driver 5 6 5 7 8 110 Interfaces 2 7 2 40 Interrupt line of the controller board 2 12 Interrupt line selection 2 37 Interrupt operation 2 41 Interrupt processing 2 36 Invalid address set with the coding switch 2 6 ISFP 5 1 5 3 5 5 function block package 2 22 interface 8 88 software program 2 18 L LB ERR 8 64 LB error 4 5 LB 2 7 Length codes 8 30 8 55 Local bus 1 3 1 10 1 16 1 17 8 37 8 70 module error 8 79 modules 1 18 Location of windows 2 33 Logical address error 8 57 Logical addressing 2 1 2 14 Logical IN addresses 8 32 Logical IN address map 8 32 Logical local bus address map 8 31 Logical local bus address 8 52 logical numbers 8 67 Logical OUT address map 8 33 Logical OUT addresses 8 33 Loopback word 1 4 8 49 M INTERBUS S diagnostics 4 29 Manipulation of OUT words 8 41 address list structure of a 3 19 Mask 1 8 36 cycle counter 8 56 Mask 2 8 36 4 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Index Master PLC 3 37 Master slave access method 1 3 Maximum INTERBUS S expansion 3 7 Memory component MPM 2 1 Message flag 8 95 Message functions 8 80 Message header 8 95 Messages overview of the 9 1 9 2 9 3 MOD 2 7 MOD bit 8 80 MOD ERR MODule Error 2 7 4 6 MODE 2 5 4 27 8 64 MODE 4 to 9 4 27 Module addresses 2
155. test no current inputs are read and no current outputs are set When the controlled start is used the bus cycle is not re started no RUN All parameter settings are canceled log addressing event definitions 2 3 1 4 Interfaces REMOTE The INTERBUS S remote bus interface links the host controller board with the INTERBUS S I O modules The interface port is a 9 pos D SUB female connector which is located on the front plate of the host controller board The connection to INTERBUS S is designed as a two wire remote bus RS 232 The host controller board has a serial interface implemented The interface port is a 9 pos D SUB male connector which is located on the front plate of the host controller board PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 33 The connector pinouts can be found in the section where the interface is described 2 8 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 3 2 Controller Board Components 4 E 9 2 1 5003A204 Figure 2 4 DCB with system connector 1 Front part 2 EEPROM slot The front part comprises the interface Slot for the EEPROM memory card ports and the diagnostic indicators 3 Mounting
156. the 68 ene 4 30 4 6 1 Diagnostic Functions on I O Modules 4 31 4 6 2 Diagnostic Functions on Bus Terminal Modules 4 32 4 6 3 Diagnostics on Third Party Devices 4 32 4 7 Using the Hand Held 10 4 33 4 8 Using the Monitor Program for INTERBUS S on the PC 4 34 4 9 exi TOK NS OS TR m m 4 35 4 9 1 EGEO ETTO acess ctr enden eee seen E E EMEND iMM UE 4 36 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 Diagnostic Interfaces This chapter describes the different diagnostic options of the IBS DCB controller board 1 Diagnostics on the controller board s front plate 2 Software diagnostics Diagnostic bit register Diagnose parameter register 3 Diagnostics on the I O modules 5003B PHCENIX T3 CONTACT 4 Diagnostic Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR O
157. the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 2 0 If an error occurred during function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not activated within the set time 8 2 4 6 Event OFF FKT 5 The Event OFF function disables a previously defined event FB 69 FKT 5 The event identifier is to be specified in the NR parameter If the parameter has the value FFFFpex all defined events are enabled Event identifier 1 Event is disabled 0 Event is not disabled If the function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 2 0 If an error occurred during function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not activated within the set time 5003B PHCENIX 8 61 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 5 ADDRESS FB 72 The ADDRESS function block is used exclusively to address the module By means of this function block the set addressing functions are called and the bus is started The ADDRESS function block simplifies the logical addressing for the user by communicating all necessary address lists to the controller board by means of a function call The user specifies the length of the address lists by pointers This list is not transferred if the value zero is specified for the data block s pointer The function can also be
158. the basic INTERBUS S system specifications the specific terms of the INTERBUS S system 1 System Overview eee eren d 1 1 Networking with 85 3 1 2 INTERBUS S Topology 4 9 P 1 2 1 General Method of Operation 1 2 2 Error Protection Mechanisms 1 2 3 INTERBUS S Protocol 580 870 6 1 2 4 INTERBUS S Scan Time Calculation 1 2 5 Basic System 6080 1 2 8 1 3 System Components d 1 3 1 Host Controller Board Hm 1 3 2 Remote Bus 488 amp 9b nnne nnns 1 3 3 Installation Remote 8 1 3 4 Bus Terminal Module eee 1 3 5 TC m O 1 3 6 INTERBUS S WO Modules
159. the local bus itself different I O modules can be combined with one another Local bus modules cannot be integrated into the remote bus or installation remote bus Conversely it is not possible to use remote bus modules in the local bus 35 The local bus is also referred to by its abbreviation LB Please take this into account for the error diagnostics of the host controller board Chapter 5 1 16 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview Incoming remote bus Local bus max 10m max max max 15m i5m PEE m m l Y Bus terminal module Outgoing remote bus 5001A107 Figure 1 8 Local bus structure and maximum dimensions Basic local bus specifications Max total current consumption 0 8 A Max bus cable length between BK and the first local bus module 1 5 m two I O modules 1 5m BK and last local bus module 10m Max number of I O modules in the local bus 8 35 You may use preassembled connecting cables with lengths of 10 cm 27 84 17 5 20 cm 27 06 31 2 50 cm 27 59 43 0 100 cm 27 84 18 8 and 150 cm 27 84 19 1 from Phoenix Contact The order numbers are given in parentheses 5003B PHCENIX Isi CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview 1 3 6 INTERBUS S I O Modules The I O modules link the sensors and actuators to the INTERBUS S system Here a distinction is to be made be
160. 0 255 Base address word oriented module even address byte oriented module odd even address DB 12 g KY 000 015 Parameter count cle KY 000 000 IBS 24 BK T 2 KY 000 020 IBS 24 DI 3 KY 000 000 IBS AO 1 a KY 000 000 IBS 24 DO Ds KY 000 1405 IBS PT 100 A 2 6 KY 000 028 IBS IP DIO 1 24 p KY 000 000 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 8 KY 000 030 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 9 KY 000 000 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 10 KY 000 031 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F ti KY 000 046 IBS 24 BK I O T l2 KY 000 038 IBS 24 DIJZ lo KY 000 164 IBS AI 3 14 KY 000 126 Diagnostic bit register ines KY 000 128 Diagnostic parameter register 16 6 20 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB13 OUT address list The OUT address list includes the logical output addresses of the modules The list is an image of the ID code list Every place in the list which is occupied with an output module is allocated an output address This address is the base of the module in the PLC In the example DW 4 KY 000 032 IBS 24 DO The digital output module with 16 outputs becomes visible in the PLC in output word 32 Structure of the list DB x DW y KY DW y 1 KY DW y 2 KY DW y n 2 KY DW y n 1 KY DW y n kY 000 PC B ADR B ADR B ADR B ADR B ADR Parameter count 1st module 2nd module nth module Special ID code Special ID code PC Quantity of subs
161. 0 and switch SW5 are described in detail in Chapter 2 These default settings have to be kept for a quick startup when extended functions are not required Table 6 1 Setting the types of operation and addressing with switch SW6 Operation Automatic Controlled Addressing Fixed Free Fixed Free areas areas Mode DAB DCB DAB DCB 3 3 3 3 e 2 2 2 Switch 6 1 1 1 1 ON ON ON ON Window 1 Base YES YES YES NO Switch 1 Length YES YES YES NO Switch 2 Window 2 Base YES YES YES NO Switch 3 Length YES YES YES NO Switch 4 YES to be set NO not relevant Setting Communication register Switch 5 Installation Central controller Jumper 1 Controller expansion unit Interrupt ON OFF Jumper 3 Error message but acknowledgment delay Jumper 4 Interrupt source Jumper 5 Interrupt destination Jumper 6 Interrupt master slave Jumper 7 Interrupt identification Jumper 8 Reset button active passive Jumper 10 5003B602 6 6 PHCENIX 50035 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup 6 3 Software Setting When the setting of switch SW6 has determined a certain type of operation and addressing the software may be set afterwards This setting depends on the different operational requirements made on the bus system These requirements are 1 The startup behavior of the controller board has already been det
162. 00 4 40 13 50 5 50 14 600 6 60 1570 770 READY CTRLO BASP e RB RUN B BSA MODO 5003A414 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Display Description Outputs Bus XX The programmable controller is in the STOP 00 Pre state vious state e With the active BASP signal disable command output all bus stations are instructed to set their output to O e All output modules are instructed to set their outputs to 0 e Data transmission on the bus continues e The PLC cannot evaluate the inputs because it is not in the STOP state The cause of the STOP state lies in the application program Figure 4 8 STOP request of the PLC PHCENIX Tem CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Parameterization error 0 1 3 4 n 8 0 9 O 10 2 O 11 30 12 4 C 13 5 14 6 5 15 7 MODE ADDRESS BYTE n 1 0 0 C5 110 2 2 3 3 O 4 4 C 5 5 6 60 7O E READY BASP 5 RUN BSA 5003A415 4 16 CTRL RB LB MOD CTRL indicates a parameterization error The display Acc to gives an error number hexadecimal which is table described further in Chapter 4 8 09 a The board is in
163. 024 Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Logical local bus address 00xx Key XX 00 xx lt FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal Reset BK Alarm Logical Request 0025 Function The command resets the alarm output of a BK Prerequisite Messages oyntax Key 5003B The alarm output of the addressed BK must have been activated Positive acknowledgment Quit Reset BK Alarm Logical Confirmation 0000 Remark Parameter 1 identifies the BK whose alarm output is to be reset Negative acknowledgment BK Alarm Failed Confirmation 005A Meaning Invalid local bus address Reset BK Alarm Logical Request 0025 Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Logical local bus address 00xx XX 00 lt xx lt FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal PHCENIX oo CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 4 Commands for System Control Send Software Revision Request 0008 Function The command requests the firmware version of the controller board Prerequisite None Messages Positive acknowledgment Send Software Revision Confirmation 8087 syntax send Software Revision Request 0008 Send Software Revision V24 Request 0009 Function This function corresponds to the Send Software Revision Request command The only difference is that the data is transmitted exclusively via the V 24 RS 232 interface Prerequisites None Messages Positive acknowledgm
164. 03B PHCENIX 8 89 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP The first word of the header contains the code by means of which the service primitive is selected e g the code 8081 identifies READ REQUEST service primitive The number of words belonging to the body plus one is entered in the second word of the header The third word contains the communication reference with which all communication stations can be addressed The data of the service body depends on the selected service 8 4 1 5 Service Execution The INTERBUS S function blocks offer the user the possibility of using the services of open communications in an easy way The following chapters show how to run PCP orders and order confirmations by setting or checking flag bits 8 4 1 6 Service Activation Flag If it is intended to execute a request or response primitive of a service the service s parameters must be entered in the Request Response data block DB The order or the acknowledgment is sent using the REQ RES FB66 or FB67 function block by setting bit O of the RRMW flag word Once the order or acknowledgment has been ended the data of a new order or a new order acknowledgment can be copied into the standard buffer and sending of the new data can be activated A free data block is recognized by the zero status of the RRMW bit 0 The bit for activating the service must only be set by means of an edge flag Alternatively to the standard buff
165. 05F command communicates the error which was found last during the logical addressing All parameters are 0 if no addressing error has been detected syntax oend Log Adaress Error Confirmation 8005 Quantity of subsequent words 3 1 List 2 Parameter number 3 Error number The LIST parameter names the list with errors The PARAMETER NUMBER parameter identifies the parameter with errors The error number names the error type 5003B PHCENIX oo CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Meaning of the LIST parameter 0 The Implement All Log Address Maps 0040 command was executed while data was transmitted The following parameters are invalid Logical local bus addresses ID list Logical address list Logical local bus address list including the remote bus level 0O Meaning of the PARAMETER NUMBER parameters e If the error number is 1 PARAMETER NUMBER gives the number of the first missing parameter in the list of logical addresses e If the error number is 2 PARAMETER NUMBER gives the number of the first parameter in the list of logical addresses which has been specified in excess e n all other cases the number of the faulty entry is entered Table 9 5 Error numbers used 0 Not defined 1 Not enough entries in the list which was sent with the command with the error 2 Too many entries in the list which was se
166. 07 XXX Acyclic control interval m 9 KY 008 XXX Type of connection m 10 KY 009 XXX Request length high m 11KY 010 XXX Request length low 51 246 m 12KY 011 XXX Indication length high m 13KY 012 XXX Indication length low 51 246 m 14KY 013 006 m 15KM XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Nibble by nibble description m 16KM XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Supported services bit fields m 17KM XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX m 18KY 014 XXX Max outstanding client server m 19KY 015 XXX Max outstanding server server Do m 20KY 016 XXX Type of communication not m 21KY 017 LLL Symbol length change m 22KC S S Symbol n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Parameter count L Quantity of the transmitted symbols S in bytes 5003B PHCENIX 8 39 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP The value for Request Length Low Indication Length Low must correspond to the Send Low value Receive Low value of the Initiate Error Confirmation see 8 4 2 17 provided that this confirmation caused an error message The set bits of the parameter m 15 bit 0 15 and the set first eight bits bits 16 to 23 of the parameter m 16 represent in an encoded form the available client services of the specified PCP station parameter m 1 23 bytes The set last eight bit of the parameter m 16 bits 24 to
167. 1 8 7 0 Contents Installation depth 0000 BS address FB level 0 for main line 1 for secondary line installation remote bus BS address 00 x xx lt FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal 35 Addresses from 0 to 255 are permitted e Each address must only be assigned once e he entries follow the order of the physical bus configuration e Enter all bus stations Only the entries for BKs are evaluated e After a hardware startup the bus segments are numbered starting with 0 in accordance with the physical bus configuration 5003B PHCENIX S CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Implement All Logical Address Maps Request 0040 Function Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit lmplement Confirmation 00d3 Meaning The addresses are valid and have been accepted Negative acknowledgment Logical Address Error Confirmation 002b Meaning There are incorrect values in the lists to be A implemented logical addresses The data traffic on the bus is stopped The process output data is not switched to a defined safe state The command may only be used when there are no data cycles on the bus The lists with the addresses of the process data which have been sent before are checked and accepted if they are correct Send Log Address Error Request 005F Function Messages 9 26 Request of the result of a command which has been executed before
168. 1 KY 000 OYY Parameter no MMMM Message code YY Ihe parameter no specifies the line no in which an error has been detected in the instruction list X Error No Meaning 3 Nomeeismeiscanbeaceped 2 Unknown instruction code 4 NointernalRAM free 8 Logical OUT address doesnotexst 6 OUT address does not exist in the NTERBUS ring 7 loaliNadWessdesmotexs SSCS amp w PHEN 449 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 2 11 Group Error Characteristics FKT 10 35 A prerequisite for using the Group Error Characteristics function is a group definition The group is initiated with the DEFINE function block FB69 FKT 6 If no group definition was performed all local buses belong to one group The group number can be freely selected between 0 and 255 Several local buses can be combined in one group To disconnect a local bus it must be assigned its own group If a bus error occurs the defined group is disconnected from the INTERBUS S ring and the bus is stopped The outputs of the group are set to ZERO Further cycles without the disconnected group can only be run with the start command in the CONTROL FB 68 FKT 1 function block The bus system is only started automatically if the disconnectible groups have been specifically identified Disconnectible groups are groups whose malfunction does not lead to the automatic restart of the bus Th
169. 10 Chapter 6 Bus topology for the example DCBADR DCBEEP DCBZYK DCBCP DCBECP Pages 6 12 6 22 6 26 6 40 6 54 The addresses for the diagnostic bit register in the example diagrams on the above pages are not I 30 0 131 7 but 126 0 127 7 Chapter 6 Pages 6 51 6 53 6 60 and 6 62 data block designations The numbers in the data blocks are reversed between the Pages 51 and 53 as well as between Pages 60 and 62 Correct is Pages 51 and 60 describe the data block 23 and Pages 53 and 62 describe the data block 21 5003BC04 PHCENIX 3 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 New Firmware Revision V3 71 for the IBS S5 DCB I T Controller Board for SIMATIC S5 PLCs Owing to functional extensions technical improvements and corrections in the firmware there are some innovations for the IBS S5 DCB I T controller boards for SIMATIC S5 PLCs Controller boards and documentation concerned Hardware IBS S5 DCB I T Order No 27 58 156 IBS S5 DCB T Order No 28 06 21 5 Firmware Previous version 3 5x Update version 3 71 Upgrade A hardware upgrade with the update version is possible with Hardware version IBS GB S5 9166835 C Plug on board type MA5 The firmware can be updated as of Firmware version 3 3x User manuals German IBS S5 DCB UM Order No 28 06 23 1 English IBS S5 DCB UM E Order No 27 58 36 3 4 PHCE
170. 10 module to which the most transmission errors can be assigned After every configuration the data is automatically reset newly determined and can be scanned with the command call Remark The error indication includes malfunction in the periphery and on the transmission path Bus cycles with errors as a result of malfunctions in the periphery are also counted as transmission errors The module numbers of the ten modules with the most errors can be displayed one after another on the seven segment display with the coding switch position 918x beginning with the module with the most errors Messages Positive acknowledgment Send Located Error Counter Confirmation 8115 syntax oend Located Error Counter Request 0109 Send Located Error Counter V24 Request 010A Function This function corresponds to the Send Located Error Counter Request The only difference is the data is exclusively transmitted via the V 24 RS 232 interface Remark See remark on Send Located Error Counter Request Messages Positive Send Located Error Counter V24 Confirmation acknowledgment 8116 syntax Send Located Error Counter V24 Request 010A Send Last Module Status Error Request 010B Function This command returns the local bus numbers of the ten module which reported the last ten module status errors Remark The local bus numbers can be displayed one after another on the seven segment display coding switch setting 919x Messages Po
171. 13 Demo system corresponds to the topology from Chapter 3 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 0 1 3 4 n 8 0 CO 9 1 O 10 2 11 30 12 40 13 5 O 14 6 5 15 7 i MODE ADDRESS BYTE n 1 0 0 CO 110 2 20 3 3 O 4 140 5 50 6 60 770 Page 1 1 Name NN 5003B Project No 08154711 READY CTRLO BASP O RB RUN OLB BSA MODO 5003A411 Display Description Bus segment number 0 Central control cabinet Feed for robot 2 Turntable with toolholder 3 Positioning of the turntable 4 Gripping jaws of turntable bottom 5 Gripping jaws of turntable top Figure 4 14 Description for the example configuration PHCENIX CONTACT 4 21 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 0134 i MODE ADDRESS BYTE n n 1 8 000 0 00 910 110 10 20 2 20 11830 33O 12 40 4 40 1350 5 50 14 600 6 60 1570 Jo READY CTRLO BASP O RB RUN OLB BSA MODO 5003A411 4 22 Display Description Marking Bus segment number Figure 4 15 Form for your own system PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE
172. 2 1 0 Bit Output data of A D converter Encoded information on meas range Error status of open circuit indicator 5003A321 Figure 3 31 Allocation of the bits in the IN data word PHCENIX CONTACT 3 User Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Determination of the transmitted temperature value First the temperature value has to be determined from the data words which were transmitted by the IBS PT100A This value is then available in the controller for a further processing Second bit 15 of the IN data word is to be checked If it is set the open circuit indicator of the respective measuring channel responded and the transferred measuring value does not need to be processed any further Afterwards the measuring range to which the transferred measuring value refers is to be determined from bits 12 14 At present modules are available with a measuring range from 0 600 C Table 3 10 Measuring range and encodings Lastly the measuring value which was transmitted in bits 0 11 is used for the calculation It is output in the straight binary code which means that there is no sign bit Even when bit 11 is set this does not mean that there is a negative measuring value The temperature is calculated according to the following formula Temperature C MLL MV with MLL MUL MV Measuring range Lower Limit from
173. 2 24D 33 2 142 o 0 o o 3 0 0 0 13 _ ais 4 z 0 0 o o 14 o 164 o 4 aaae 1 207 o of o o 100 o 100 2 15 Diag Bit o 16 o o o o 1266 o o 0 16 DagPaa 0 17 o of o o 1288 o o 0 17 BigComm o 18 o 0 o o 6 o jo o 6 56 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup Address lists of the example ID code list Bus segment list IN address list OUT address list KR address list After the start of the system and the enabling of the messages from the controller board to the PLC the startup block is exited In the cyclic program the application can now access the defined module addresses The messages must be enabled by means of the program sequence Application register The program sequences which have been stored in the EEPROM can be initiated with the register for bit controlled commands Hegister assignment OW Activation bit The sequence 0 15 is initiated IW BUSY bit A set busy bit indicates a tested sequence or one which has just been processed IW RETURN bit Value 0 Sequence was processed without errors Value 1 Sequence was processed with errors Diagnostics The function of the system can be monitored with the diagnostic registers diagnostic bit parameter register The diagnostic registers have to be defined by means of logical addressing
174. 2 423 004 075 000 0165 000 0 L7 Parameter count LBS IBS LBS IBS LBS IBS LBS IBS IBS IBS LBS IBS LBS 24 24 AO 24 EL LE LE LEP LE IP 24 24 AI BK T DI 1 DO 100 A 2 DIO 21224 CBK 1 24 CDI 1424 CDO 142 CDI 1 724 BK I O T DI 32 3 Hj nj j nj Diagnostic bit register Diagnostic parameter regist PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB11 Bus segment list The bus segment list describes the logical assignment between the physical segment structure with the help of the module positions and the logical segment numbering The remote bus structure installation depth is defined with another parameter A bus segment consists of a BK with connected local bus b Remote bus module with inputs outputs c IBS ST bus terminal module d Installation remote bus module The logical numbering of the segments is done with the bus terminal module The list structure parameter number is adapted to the ID code list The segment number 0 to 255 is entered in the list at every bus terminal location Installation depth The remote bus structure is divided into the main remote bus line installation depth 0 and the installation remote bus installation depth 216 Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY IT SN 1st module BK DW y 2 KY 000 000 DW y n 2 KY IT SN nth module BK
175. 3 Meaning Depending on the result this message indicates which of the defined groups are switched on or off Positive message syntax send Group Status Confirmation 8113 Quantity of subsequent words En 1 Resut 00 2 Switching state group 1 xxOx n 1 Switching state group n xxOx SWITCHING STATE GROUP parameter Bits 8 15 of this parameter indicate the group number and bit O informs about the switching state of this group 02 switched off 1 switched on Negative message syntax send Group State Confirmation 8113 Quantity of subsequent words 3 1 Result Error code FFxx 2 Error code Additional code XXXX 3 Additional code XXXX Send Local Bus Code Map Confirmation 8114 Meaning When the result is positive this message indicates the local bus addresses with information on the installation depth requested with the Send Local Bus Code Map command Positive message Syntax Send Local Bus Code Map Confirmation 8114 Quantity of subsequent words ine 1 Result 00xx 2 Localbuscode XOX n 1 Local bus code 1 1 11 1 0 LOCAL BUS CODE parameter Bits 0 11 indicate the local bus number Bits 12 15 indicate the installation depth value 0 main line 1 secondary line of the local bus 5003B PHCENIX aoe CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Negative message syntax send Local Bus
176. 31 and the set bits of the parameter m 17 bits 32 to 47 represent in an encoded form the available server services of the specified PCP station Only bits 0 8 10 11 and 16 are of importance for the indication of the supported client services Only bits 24 32 34 35 and 40 are of importance for the indication of the supported server services All other bits must be O The following Table 0 1 shows which services are activated or indicated by the bits mentioned Table 0 1 Supported Client Server services of the Supported Services Bit Fields Bit number 0 8 8 10 11 16 Client Get OV Start Stop Read Write Information service Report o a o o T T T LLL Lh Bit number 24 32 faze 3 fa 40 Server Get OV Start Stop Read write Information service Heport The bits for the client services are always all set while bit 32 for the server services is not set by default If the used PCP station supports the server services Start and Stop you must additionally set bit 32 with the Receive KBL function and the associated data block 8 40 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 2 10 Receive Bit Manipulation FKT 9 In some applications it is expedient to react swiftly to signal changes of the inputs The response time to a signal change depends on the scan time when is the signal change recognized or the intelligence programmed re
177. 35 Some modules have input and output addresses The IBS Al analog input module for instance occupies e four words in the input field one word for each analog input channel e four words in the output field one word per channel for the gain Possible addresses would be e g input PW 132 output PW 140 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 3 3 Address Orientation Word oriented addressing Assign an even byte address to modules whose the address areas contain complete words Table 3 6 Example for word oriented addressing Module number Address area E g address n Input 1 word IB 30 n 1 Input 1 word IB 32 n 3 Output 4 words OB 30 n 4 Input 1 word IB 34 n 5 Output 1 word OB 38 Byte oriented addressing Modules the address area of which contain an odd number of bytes are assigned an even byte address if e the previous module is a word oriented module e the previous module is located in another I O area e g the module is an input module the previous module is an output module Table 3 7 Example for byte oriented addressing with even byte addresses Module number Address area E g address n Input 1 word IB 30 n 1 Input 1 byte IB 32 n 3 Output 1 byte OB 30 n 4 Input 1 byte IB 34 N 9 Output 1 byte OB 32 n 6 Input 1 byte IB 36 Modules the address are
178. 4 Local Bus Module Error BDB DB No ofthelBdatablock CON BI Sse NERBU S mn BI Bus error INTERBUS S in STOP state BI Er E o RUN state RECONFIG FB 75 Parameters Function IBDB DB No of the IB data block RECO BI REC triggered POSS BI RECO GR Group LB BY Local bus EVENT FB 76 Parameters Function IBDB DB No of IB data block EV BI Event EVKN W Event identification PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 5 3 2 Bit Controlled Command Execution 5 3 2 1 Description The bit controlled command execution allows to start program sequences such as logical addressing parameterization of a communication module by means of individual bits The user activates a previously defined command or program sequence through a bit Sequence 1 With the help of logical addressing the registers for the bit controlled command execution are overlaid in the I O area of the PLC 2 Creating the program sequence with the IBS SYS SWT program 3 Programming the EEPROM During the programming every single program sequence is assigned to a bit in the register for the bit controlled command execution Description in the user manual for the IBS SYS SWT software 4 Activating the sequence via the application by setting the programmed bits in the I O area of the PLC Bit
179. 4 KH OOOO POLO CODE gt D KH 0000 Be y J0 KH 0000 KR O9 KY 000 000 DB DW 60 KH OOOO 61 5003B PHCENIX 6 51 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB21 HEQ RES standard DB A service and a service body can be entered into this data block The service is activated by means of the activation bit O Structure CODE Service code PO 88 Quantity of subsequent parameters KR 88 Communication reference Body Module dependent service body J KH 0000 CODE 4 UR KH 0000 PC 2 KH 0000 KR 21 KH 0000 Body A KH 0000 9 KH 0000 6 KH 0000 KH 0000 gs KH 0000 J KH 0000 103 KH 0000 d 3 KH 0000 12 KH 0000 Lo KH 0000 14 KH 0000 iler KH 0000 Loe 6 52 PHOENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB22 Data block REQ RES header table The service headers are entered into this data blocks which are initiated by the activation bits 1 15 Description Structure OF 50038 CODE KR DB DW KH KH KH KY KH KH KH Hx KH KH IH KX KH KH KH KY KH 0000 0000 0000 000 000 0000 00005 00005 000 000 00005 0000 0000 000 04809 000 49 OOO QVO OO 000 0000 Activation bit no Service
180. 5 Group No List g T MMMEMMMMMIMIIIEEEEEEEEEMM 8 70 8 2 5 6 Group Error CRBC nisiut TENDO 8 72 8 2 5 7 Communication Reference 1 8 73 8 2 6 EN E EN EE TA 8 74 8 2 6 1 CombrolieRerror Code FKT 0 8 76 8 2 6 2 Bus Riommation FKT 1 8 76 8 2 6 3 Defective Group FKT ia rakaa aaia inara kiR 8 77 8 2 6 4 POU Error 8 78 8 2 6 5 Local Bus Module Error FKT 4 8 79 8 3 Message Functions 8 80 8 3 1 c 8 80 8 3 2 REQCONFIG FB 8 82 8 3 3 EVENT A RIPE EU 8 83 8 4 Working with Communication 8 84 8 4 1 H OCUCHON ereer a E E E E E 8 84 8 4 1 1 Control During Communication 8 86 8 4 1 2 Call Structure of the F
181. 54 data n 255 n first byte of the even start address of the data to be written see ADR parameter 5003BC04 PHCENIX 19 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Chapter 8 3 7 new function block GETINMW FB 82 The GETINMW function block FB 82 reads the data in the extended input area and copies it to the following flag words specified from MW onwards The start and end addresses of the output data are transferred with the ADR parameter they are to be specified in words even numbered The return bit indicates whether the function block has been executed error free FB 82 is called at the beginning of the cycle Table 8 22 Parameters of the GETINMW function block FB 82 InterBus data block Number of a data block DB 0 255 The data block is to be set up by you opecifies the area to be read 1 extended area 1 2 extended area 2 otart and end address of the data to be read Mw Number of the destination flag word MW 2 bytes in one flag word HET Return bit 0 1 Function executed without errors with errors Error causes Start address higher than end address Data area of the flags is insufficient for the volume of data to be read Call of the GETINMW function block FB 82 SPB FB 82 NAME GETINMW IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block EXT KF 1 Selection of the extended area ADR KY 0 128 Start and end address of the data to be read MW MW 100 Numbe
182. 80 SYSINFO 8 21 8 53 System connector 2 1 7 4 System interface 5 1 5 3 PHCENIX i CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Index Temperature 2 41 Test routines 1 4 TIMEOUT bit 5 8 Timeout bit 8 18 Transfer method 1 13 Transfer time 1 6 Transmission cycle 1 4 Transmission medium 1 13 Two wire INTERBUS S system 2 2 Two wire remote bus 2 7 Types of addressing 2 13 U Use 8 110 User process 8 84 V V 24 interface 2 18 VFD State 8 117 W Window 3 2 31 Window areas 2 13 Windows which extend from the P to the Q area 2 35 Write Confirmation 8 102 8 108 Write Request 8 100 5003B PHCENIX pr CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS l 8 PHCENIX i CONTACT
183. 9 must not be set ADDRESS The required address is set by means of these three code switches Only a word address even address from 0 to 254 is accepted as a valid address An invalid address setting is indicated with Ad in the display Status display The data item of the set address is output as a 16 bit word Display _ A valid module address was set with the coding switch Ad An invalid address was set with the coding switch Remedy Set only addresses which are occupied by modules Set an even module address 5003B PHCENIX TT CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 5 Startup and Acknowledgment Displays 4 5 1 Host Controller Board Startup In order to detect hardware and firmware errors the INTERBUS S host controller board runs through several test routines after a RESET or after POWER ON The number of the routine is indicated in decimal on the seven segment display see Table 4 4 This results in a startup countdown After the successful completion only the green READY LED is on and the display indicates the symbols or Ad or an error code depending on the type of operation and the INTERBUS S cabling Table 4 4 The seven segment displays during startup Startup Routine Seven Segment Display Start of hardware startup all LEDs on 8 8 Test of motherboard 9 CPU self test 8 Test of EPROM and checksum 7 RAM tes
184. ADR fo LE BEN 6 44 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT ADR NAME IBDB CIDB rO NAME I BDB BUSY IDDB LDDW LBDB LBDW INDB INDW OUDB OUDW KRDB KRDW GRDB GRDW MODE EREG TO REI NAME I BDB RRDB TO 5003B SPA FB 62 CON IND DB 9 MB 18 T 1 M 8 3 UN M 8 0 U M 10 0 SPB FB 72 ADDRESS DB 9 M 10 0 T 2 DB 10 KF 0 DB 11 KF 0 DB 12 KF 0 DB 13 KF 0 DB O KF 0 DB O KF 0 M 10 5 MW 12 M 10 1 M 10 2 SPA FB 66 REQ RES DB 9 MB 19 T 3 M 4 UA D 8 0 M 10 0 SPB LOOP LUN M 10 2 BEB COIP 7 BE onlinecomponents com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup InterBus data block Timer Timeout InterBus data block Activation bit Timer DB ID code list DW DB Bus segment list DW DB IN address list DW DB OUT address list DW DB KR address list DW DB Group definitions DW Mode of display Error register Timeout Return value InterBus data block REQ RES header DB Timer Timeout JANET PB ADDRESS 6 45 PHCENIX CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB10 Identification code list The ID code address list includes the physical bus structure The structure is described with the help of the ID numbers of the modules and their length codes The modules are counted starting from the controller board and through the entire bus structure The list is completed with the spe
185. Automatic start Starting at the base addresses of the windows 1 and 2 all modules are addressed and acknowledged The length specification depends on the space requirement of the modules The setting of the window area refers to the I O area of the PLC The diagnostic registers are located below the base addresses The set window lengths must not be shorter than the address area of the modules If the length setting of the windows is larger than the space requirement of the modules the unassigned addresses will also be acknowledged b Controlled start All module and register addresses e g diagnostic registers must be defined within the window area by means of logical addressing All window addresses are acknowledged 35 6 4 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup The communication registers window 3 must be set independently of the start automatic controlled and mode setting DAB DCB They always occupy two words in the I O area of the PLC 5003B PHCENIX oa CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup 6 2 Hardware Setting Table 6 1 shows how to set switch SW6 in order to get the required type of operation and addressing as it was described before The switch positions also show whether the settings require another determination of the base addresses and the window lengths with switches SW1 to SWA The given setting options of jumpers 1 to 1
186. B 83 SPB FB 83 NAME PBUTOUTMW IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block EXT KF 1 Selection of the extended area ADR KY 0 128 Start and end address of the data to be written MW MW 100 Number of the source flag word RET M 02 Return bit Assignment of the flag words for the selected extended area E g MWx data n data n 1 MW x 2 data n 2 data n 3 MW x 252 data n 252 data n 253 MW x 254 data n 254 data n 255 n first byte of the even start address of the data to be written see ADR parameter 5003BC04 PHCENIX 21 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 New Firmware Revision V3 75 for the SIMATIC S5 Controller Board IBS S5 DCB I T Owing to technical improvements of the hardware and the resulting adaptation of the firmware a new firmware revision V3 75 has been introduced for the SIMATIC S5 controller boards IBS S5 DCB I T Controller boards and documentation concerned Boards IBS S5 DCB I T Order No 27 58 156 IBS S5 DCB T Order No 28 06 21 5 Firmware Previous version 3 73 Update version 3 75 Revision marking 13 375 sticker at the lower edge of the front plate 22 PHG NIX 5003BC04 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Contents Table of Contents 1 SVS eM OVETVICW Pe c 1 1 1 1 Networking with 85 3
187. BDB B DB INTERBUS data block No of a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW 0 DW 199 T T T Tmerocwiedbyefunon FKT E BY Function no NR E W Number of the local bus BK alarm or events which is to be 1 The function is activated by setting the BUSY bit O After termination of the function the BUSY bit is reset automatically by the function block TO A BI TIMEOUT bit BUSY E Bl BUSY bit 1 The timeout of the function has elapsed the function could not be executed 0 The timeout has not elapsed RET A BI RETURN bit O Function terminated positively 1 Function terminated negatively SPB FB 71 NAME ON OFF IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block T T 2 Occupied timer NR MW 18 Number BUSY Maine NS Activation bit TO x 124 5 Timeout bit RET M 14 5 Return bit FKT 4 MB 15 Bunction Figure 8 28 Call of the ON OFF function block FB 71 5003B PHCENIX 8 59 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 4 1 Group ON FKT 0 The Group ON function allows to activate a previously defined group of local buses FB 72 FB 69 FKT 6 The number of the group is to be passed to this function as a parameter If the Group ON function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred during the function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value
188. DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation 7 3 4 Ordering Information This chapter provides an overview of other available INTERBUS S products in connection with the DCB controller board These products serve for a more convenient diagnostics of the DCB controller board used and they also allow a complete use of the capabilities of the controller board The respective item designations and order numbers are given in parentheses You may get a basic or advanced package assembled from the individual products Basic package e DCB controller board IBS S5 DCB T 28 06 21 5 IBS S5 DCB I T 27 58 15 6 e SFP software IBS 35 SWD 28 06 22 8 With this package INTERBUS S is exclusively operated via the connected PLC Advanced package e Basic package and e EEPROM memory in credit card format IBS MC 64k 27 58 96 5 e IBS SYS SWT software 27 80 88 1 e Connecting cable for direct connection of a PC to the DCB controller board IBS PRG CAB 28 06 86 2 This package allows the operation of INTERBUS on the PLC and PC side In the case of operation on the PC side the parameterization data can be stored in the EEPROM memory 1 8 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation The following individually available products simplify operating and error diagnostics Hand Held Monitor IBS HHM Order No 27 84 16 2 For the start up or in the case of a service the IBS
189. DW MB 17 Pointer to the first data word of the message BUSY M 142 3 Activation Dit TO 3 M 939 Timeout bit RET M 14 3 Return bit FKT 1 MB 15 Function no Figure 8 26 Call of the SYSINFO function block FB70 8 54 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 3 1 Physical Configuration Map FKT 0 The Physical Configuration Map function requests the physical INTERBUS S configuration in the form of identification codes and the length codes The function writes the configuration list into the memory area of a data block IBDB defined by the DB and DW parameters The quantity of the free data words must be equal to the quantity of connected modules plus one Parameter meanings on DW m 0 KY 000 OOK m 1 KY YYY XXX Module 1 m 2 KY YYY XXX Module 2 m 3 KY YYY XXX Module 3 m k KY YYY XXX Module k The bus configuration contains k INTERBUS S modules including bus terminal modules n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of subsequent parameters XXX Module identification code YYY Length code of the modules memory requirement 8 2 3 2 Software Revision FKT 1 The Software Revision function requests the version of the host controller board firmware The reported parameters of the function contain the version information in ASCII code Parameter meanings LE
190. DW INDB DB 12 DB IN address list INDW KF 0 DW OUDB DB 13 DB OUT address list OUDW KF 0 DW KRDB DB O DB KR address list KRDW KF 0 DW GRDB DB Q DB Group definitions GRDW KF 0 DW MODE M 10 5 Mode of display EREG MW 12 Error register TO M 10 1 Timeout RET M 10 2 Return value UN M LO Z UN M 10 0 SP FR 10 APPLICATION NAME ANWEND SPA FB 66 NAME REQ RES IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block RRDB MB 19 REQ RES header DB T T 3 Timer TO M 8 4 Timeout BE 6 32 PH NIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup e Description of the function blocks FB 10 and or FB 11 as example applications Both function blocks are exemplary for the application FB 11 differs from FB 10 only in the fact that when a module error occurs it updates the front plate displays and the registers as well as enters the list of the reported local bus segments This additional feature is marked in bold face in the example listing Structure The function of the block is divided into two areas 1 Always active This area of the block is also run through when the INTERBUS S system has stopped In the example error states such as RB and LB errors are acknowledged Entry condition None 2 Active when IBS is OK This area of the block is only run though when the INTERBUS S system is in the RUN state Entry condition ADDRESS block has been completed BUSY 0 RET 0 INTERBUS S system is in t
191. DW y n 1 KY 000 000 Special ID code DW y n KY 000 000 Special ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n SN Bus segment no 0 255 IT Installation depth 0 Mainline 16 Installation remote bus DB11 0 KY 000 015 Parameter count n KY 000 021 IBS 24 BK TI 2 KY 000 000 IBS 24 07 0 KY 000 000 IBS AO 1 4 KY 000 000 IBS 24 DO Ds KY 000 000 IBS PT 100 A 2 6 KY 000 011 IBS IP DIO 1 24 T Rx 000 022 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 8 KY 016 023 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 9 Ky e 016 024 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 10 KY 016 025 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 11 KY 000 012 IBS BK I O T 123 KY 000 000 IBS 24 DI 32 NS KY 000 000 IBS AI 3 14 KY 000 000 Diagnostic bit register 154 KY 000 000 Diagnostic parameter register Gs 5003B PHCENIX 6 37 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB12 IN address list The IN address list includes the logical input addresses of the modules The list is an image of the ID code list Every place in the list which is occupied by an input module is allocated an input address This address is the base of the module in the PLC In the example DW 12 KY 000 038 IBS 24 DI 32 The digital input module becomes visible in the PLC in the input words 38 and 40 Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY B ADR 1st module DW y 2 KY B ADR 2nd module DW y n 2 KY B ADR nth module DW y n 1 KY
192. ECO 0 The GR parameter indicates the number of the group while the LB parameter indicates the number of the local bus in which the reconfiguration was triggered SPA FB 75 5003A822 Figure 8 37 Structure of the RECONFIG function block FB 75 Table 8 15 Parameters of the RECONFIG function block FB 75 iBDB B DB INTERBUS data block No of a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW 0 DW 199 RECO IA BI 1 Reconfiguration was triggered The REC key on a bus terminal was actuated 0 No reconfiguration was actuated POSS A BI Like RECO GR A BY Group no of the reporting group LB A BY Local bus no of the reporting local bus SPA FB 75 NAME RECONF IG IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block RECO M 4 3 Signal bit for REC key POSS M 4 4 Signal bit for local group status GR MB 20 Reporting group no LB MB 21 Reporting logical local bus no Figure 8 38 Call of the RECONFIG function block FB75 8 82 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 3 3 EVENT FB 76 The EVENT function block FB76 indicates an event to the user by setting the EV bit Which of the predefined events has occurred is identified in the EVKN parameter Cf DEFINE FB69 Event Map FKT 5 SPA FB 76 5003A823 Figure 8 39 Structure of the EVENT function block FB 76 Table 8 16 Parameters of the EVENT
193. ET A BI Return value of the function U M lasl DPB KB 69 NAME CONTROL IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block FKT MB 15 Function BUSY M 12 1 Activation bit TO M 13 1 Timeout bit RET M 14 1 Return bit T T 2 Occupied timer Figure 8 17 Call of the CONTROL function block FB 68 50038 PHCENIX 8 25 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 1 1 Configure INTERBUS S FKT 0 The controller board is caused to configure the connected INTERBUS S system This configuration is declared to be the initial configuration Previously sent group definitions logical address lists or event definitions are no longer valid 8 2 1 2 Start INTERBUS S Cycle FKT 1 The INTERBUS S cycle is started when a permissible bus configuration is connected From this time on the controller board stores a cyclic data image of the INTERBUS S system in the DPM INTERBUS S will not be started if it is not allowed after an error e g a hardware error or if all groups are deactivated The yellow BSA LED is activated when a bus segment has been deactivated 8 2 1 3 Stop INTERBUS S Cycle FKT 2 The Stop INTERBUS S Cycle function stops the running of INTERBUS S cycles The IBRUN LED is switched off The last statuses of the outputs remain unchanged The ALARM STOP FKT 3 N command must be used if the outputs of the OUT module are to be set to zero 8 2 1 4 Alarm Stop FKT 3 The
194. F ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 1 Diagnostics on the Controller Board s Front Plate Operating indicators Controller boar ready BASP signal of PLC Is active I O JE L l J MODE ADDRESS BYTE n 1 0 00 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 77e n 8 0 9 1 10 720 11 206 12 206 13 56 14 60 15 7 gt READY CTRL INTERBUS running Bus segment disabled Error type Parameter CON LB RB MOD Error code Bus segment no Bus segment no Bus segment no BASP e RB RUN B Oe BSA MOD X2 X3 TESI REMOTE RS 232 RESET 2 2 Error indicators Parameter for the error type Error in the controller board Error in a remote bus Error in a local bus Error message of a module 5003A401 Figure 4 1 Diagnostics on the controller board s front plate 4 2 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Diagnostics on the controller board s front plate is subdivided into e Operating indicators and e Error indicators The various LEDs indicate the operating status of the INTERBUS S systems The current status is shown in a coded form on a three digit seven segment display The display shows the following characters and parameters STOP of the controller board
195. FB xx APPLICATION a continuously processed program part b program part which is only processed when the INTERBUS S system is active SPA FB66 REQ RES BE 5003B619 Besides the activation of the bus the application is also entered in the cyclic program observe marginal conditions Examplary for this are the FB 10 and or FB 11 function blocks of the above example The function blocks are divided into two program areas One area is only run through when the INTERBUS S system is active area of application The other area is continuously processed Additionally an example for error acknowledgment was integrated into the blocks In this example the acknowledgment is initiated by means of two Simatic inputs There is also a interlock error detection via the diagnostic bit registers LB RBeror 14 0 inFB t0 andFB11 MOD error 14 1_only in FB 11 5003B PHCENIX 6 31 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup d Detailed program example with organization function and data blocks OB 1 SPA FB 62 NAME CON IND IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block CIDB MB 18 CON IND header DB T T 1 Timer TO M 8 3 Timeout U M 10 0 OPB EFB 72 NAME ADDRESS IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block BUSY M 10 0 Activation bit T T 2 Timer IDDB DB 10 DB ID code list IDDW KF 0 DW LBDB DB 11 DB Bus segment list LBDW KF 0
196. H OOOO PO s 2t KE 0000 ot KY 000 000 WEP ON 4 KH OOOO cS CODE 5 KH 0000 Pe 6 KH 0000 KR 4 7 KY 000 000 DB DW ovr KH 0000 ord CODE 9 KH 0000 5 Po 3 10 KH 000 KR 11 KY OgU03000 DB DW 12 KH 000 4th CODE 13 KHEN OO PO 3 14 KHM 30000 KR amp 6 KH OOOO Loth CODES DW KH OOOO PE 3 De KH 0000 KR 5 KY 000 0005 DB DW 20 KH 00007 61 6 60 PHOENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB21 REQ RES standard DB A service and service body can be entered in this data block The service is activated with the activation bit O Structure CODE Service code PC 8 Quantity of subsequent parameters KR Communication reference Body _ Module dependent service body O KH 0000 CODE 4 L KH 0000 Po EE KH 00003 KR 3 on KH 0000 Body 4 KH OOOO 91 KH OOOO 6 KH OOOO 43 KH 00005 9 KH OOOO SE KH OOOO 10 KH O0DOO LL KH 0000 Le KH 0000 UNS T KH 4 14 KH 4 w900 T5 KH J0000 16 5003B PH NIX 6 61 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB22 Data block REQ RES header table The service headers are entered in this data block which are initiated with the activation bits 1 15 Description Activation b
197. HHM Hand Held Monitor checks the functions of individual bus modules and the correct connection of the periphery Current supply and connection to INTERBUS S is done through the local bus interface see Figure 7 5 Communication with the programmable controller is not required The HHM can be operated on all modules which allow the connection of a 15 pos female D SUB connector and which do not belong to the group of the communication modules such as the V 24 or counter module Communication modules must be operated with PCP Peripherals Communication Protocol software which is not supported by the HHM The HHM offers the following diagnostic functions which are described further in the user manual of the HHM 1 Off line startup of individual stations with test of the I O modules of the cabling to the sensors and actuators as well as of the sensors and actuators themselves 2 Off line troubleshooting in single stations to detect local bus cable errors module errors cabling faults short and open circuits as well as failure of the sensors and actuators 3 Display of the respective local bus modules with their identification number ID no The HHM can be obtained from the address given at the end of this chapter Figure 7 5 shows where the HHM is used Hand Held Monitor
198. IBS 24 DO 1 6 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview o o o o be o BK T 24 DI AO e HER ID 52 130 0 65 1D 129 ID 70 J L i oo IBS IP CDI IBS IP CDO IBS IP CDI P dE D9 0 10 BKI O T 24 DI 32 AI 3 ID 11 ID 14 ID 71 LLL 5001A109 Figure 1 2 Example for a scan time calculation 5003B PHCENIX i CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview Example for a scan time calculation on a demo bus The columns in the table show the inputs outputs and the number of bits on every module which are used to calculate the scan time Module Inputs Outputs Registerwidth IBS 24 BK T Bs244D 2 2 IBS 24 AO 8 8 882400 2 2 IBS PT 100 8 8 IBS24 IPDIO 2 1 2 IBS IP CBK IBS 24 CDI 1 2 IBS 24 CDO 1 2 IBS 24 CDI 1 2
199. IN address list Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1 KY 000 000 LB bus terminal module module M m 2 KY 000 000 Local bus module M OUT addresses m 3 KY 00Y XXX Local bus module M IN OUT addresses m 4 KY OOY XXX Local bus module M IN addresses m 5 KY 000 000 LB bus terminal module module M m 6 KY 000 000 Local bus module M OUT addresses m KY OOY XXX Local bus module M IN OUT addresses m 8 KY OOY XXX Local bus module M IN addresses m 9 KY OOY XXX Local bus module M IN addresses m k 1 KY 000 000 LB bus terminal module module M m k 000 000 Local bus module M OUT addresses In the bus configuration the 3rd module M the 4th module Ms the 7th module Meg the 8th module M and the 9th module Mg have IN addresses No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored No of the DW with which the parameter list begins Quantity of subsequent parameters in this case module quantity 0 Address in the P area 1 Address in the Q area XXX IN address of the process data word modules only even addresses and byte modules any address AB 3 8 68 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 5 4 OUT Address List The output addresses OUT are only entered for the modules that also occupy OUT addresses No entry is made for the other modules The first byte address
200. IN10 instruction Reset OUT IN10 0006 Output address ADR Input address ADR b Reset2 Out In01 Reset2 Out In10 instructions Structure of the Reset OUT INO1 instruction Reset2 OUT INO1 0007 Output address ADR Bit number output address B Input address ADR Bit number input address B otructure of the Reset OUT IN10 instruction Reset2 OUT IN10 0008 Output address ADR Bit number output address B Input address ADR Bit number input address B ADR 8 46 Bit number 0000pney 000 8 I O address Ogec 255gec The Reset2 OUT INO1 and Reset2 OUT IN10 instructions have the same functions as the Reset OUT INO1 and Reset OUT IN10 instructions Only the instruction format is 5 words long Thus 16 bit addresses are available PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS C Reset OUT INO1 Switch Reset OUT IN10 Switch instructions Structure of the Reset OUT INO1 Switch instruction Reset2 OUT IN01 0009 Address bit manipulation register ADR Bit number bit manipulation register B Output address ADR Bit number output address B Input address ADR Bit number input address B otructure of the Reset OUT IN10 Switch instruction Reset2 OUT IN10 000A ex Address bit manipulation register ADR Bit number bit manipulation register B Output address ADR Bit number output
201. INTERBUS S can be used without programming expense The PC is coupled to the controller board via the serial interface RS 232 of the two devices The program functions in detail e Transfer of INTERBUS S commands to the INTERBUS S controller board e Receipt of INTERBUS S messages from the INTERBUS S controller board e Logging of the messages received and the command transferred e Storing of the INTERBUS S commands and transfer of the stored commands to the controller board e Programming of the EEPROM and or the memory card of the controller board e Diagnostics and evaluation of bus operation Serial interface The serial interface of the controller board is used to send commands to the controller board and to receive messages from it The commands or the modules connected to the bus generate messages The messages are displayed immediately after they have been received provided that the display has not been explicitly switched off menu option Whether the controller board accepts transferred command and processes them at all depends on two conditions e Commands which are not available on the host controller board will be rejected e he controller board is preset in such a way that it receives the commands after a reset or power up via the serial interface only until the PLC sends a command to the controller board This process is described symbolically in Figure 5 5 on the next page PHCENIX CONTACT online comp
202. Interfaces 3 3 Physical Addressing DCB Mode The bus topology in the example for the PHYSICAL ADDRESSING is identical with Figure 3 2 3 3 1 Function The controller board starts automatically in the startup of the PLC To ensure that the INTERBUS S system is ready for operation when the cyclic program is started the INTERBUS S standard block INIT IB must be called in the startup organization blocks of the PLC When the PHYSICAL ADDRESSING is used the addresses of the INTERBUS S l O modules result from the physical structure of the system When the addresses are assigned for the INTERBUS S I O modules the digital inputs the digital outputs the analog inputs and the analog outputs have to be considered separately The digital inputs and outputs occupy the first window and the analog I O the second window in the PLC s address area 35 In the ID code list the parameter WINDOW specifies in which window the respective module appears In the PLC address area the module addresses are put into the window starting at the base address The size of the address area which every module occupies depends on the module If one or several stations are removed from the bus configuration when the bus N is stopped the controller board does not recognize this modification when the physical addressing is used Depending on the application this may cause dangerous situations in the process run 3 3 2 Addressing Addressing digital inputs
203. Jg e m RECONFIG SPA FB 76 ce EVENT SPB FB 68 re 68 CONTROL SPB FB 69 gt B 69 DEFINE SPB FB 70 gt 0870 SYSINFO SPB FB 74 FB 4 ERRINFO SPB FB 71 71 ON OFF SPB FB 72 S RS 72 ADDRESS SPA FB 66 Y REQ RES 5003B809 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 1 3 1 Structure of the Functions The functions are realized in function blocks FB Different parameters are assigned to the function blocks depending on their functions The INTERBUS data block IBDB is to be specified as the first parameter The IBDB is a data block which is used as main memory by the software It has a length of 200 data words The RETURN bit is always the last parameter of the activation blocks This RETURN bit has the value ZERO RET 0 when the block has been run without errors It is set to ONE RET 1 should an error occur Errors may result for example from invalid parameters or a jamming of the communication between the PLC and the controller board This is monitored by a timeout If the timeout has elapsed the TIMEOUT bit is also set when the RETURN bit is set The function blocks in the cyclic program area are activated by the activation bit BUSY bit This bit must be set once by an edge flag It is reset by the called function block As the function blocks may be active for more than one cycle termination of a function is recognized by virtue of the fact that the activation bit BUSY bit is reset 8
204. KY 000 000 IBS 24 DI KY 000 132 IBS AO 1 As KY 000 032 IBS 24 DO E KY 000 000 IBS PT 100 A 2 G KY 000 028 IBS IP DIO 1 24 Ti KY 000 000 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 9 KY 000 000 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 9 KY 000 029 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 10 KY 000 000 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 11 KY 000 046 IBS 24 BK I O T I KY 000 000 IBS 24 DI 32 T3 KY 000 146 IBS AI 3 14 KY 000 100 IBS AI 3 16 Io KY 000 000 Diagnostic bit register 16 KY 00050005 Diagnostic parameter register 17 5003B PHCENIX pote CONTACT 6 Startup DB14 KR address list online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The KR address list contains the communication allocation PCP of the stations Each PCP station is assigned a module number for PCP communication reference KR This KR valid 2 to 63 must be assigned in an continuously ascending order Every place in the list which is occupied by a communication module PCP is given a communication reference Structure of the list DB x Key DB14 0 KY KY 2 5 KY oF KY 4 KY J3 KY G KY as KY ou KN DE KY 10 KY UNA KY LZ KY 135 KY 14 KY ji KY 1 64 KY 17 6 50 DW y DW y 1 DW y 2 DW y n 2 DW y n 1 DW y n KY KY KY KY KY KY 000 PC 000 KR 000 KR 000 KR 000 000 000 000 Quantity of modules 1st module 2nd module n module Special ID code Special ID code PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n
205. KY 004 071 IBS AI 3 14 KY 000 016 Diagnostic bit register Lo KY 000 017 Diagnostic parameter register 1 61 6 18 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB11 Bus segment list The bus segment list describes the logical assignment between the physical segment structure with the help of the module position and the logical segment numbering Another parameter is used to define the remote bus structure installation depth A bus segment consists of a Bus terminal module with connected local bus b Remote bus modules with I O c IBS ST bus terminal module d Installation remote bus module The logical numbering of the segments is done by the bus terminal module The list structure parameter count is adapted to the ID code list The segment number 0 to 255 is entered in the list at every bus terminal module location Installation depth The remote bus structure is divided into the main remote bus line installation depth 0 and the installation remote bus installation depth 216 Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY IT SN 1st module BK DW y 2 KY 000 000 DW y n 2 KY IT SN nth module BK DW y n 1 KY 000 SID Special ID code DW y n kY 000 SID Special ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n SN Bus segment no 0 255 IT Installation depth 0 Main line 16 Installation remo
206. KY 000 OXX LB bus terminal module module M m 2 KY 000 000 Local bus module M OUT addresses m 3 KY 000 000 Local bus module M IN OUT addresses m 4 KY 000 000 Local bus module Ms IN addresses m 5 KY 000 OXX LB bus terminal module module M j m 6 KY 000 000 Local bus module M OUT addresses m 7 KY 000 000 Local bus module M IN OUT addresses m 8 KY 000 000 Local bus module M IN addresses m 9 KY 000 000 Local bus module Ms IN addresses m k 1 KY 000 OXX LB bus terminal module module M m k 000 000 Local bus module M OUT addresses In the bus configuration the 1st module Mg the Sth module M and the k 1 th module M is a bus terminal module n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of subsequent parameters in this case module quantity XX Address of the local bus 0 255 50038 PHCENIX 8 67 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 5 3 IN Address List The input addresses IN are only entered for the modules that also occupy IN addresses No entry is made for all other modules The first byte address of the module must be specified as its address Besides the address the address location P or Q area is entered Make sure that no address overlaps occur The parameter count module quantity is entered in the data word m 0 of the
207. LC cycles The received message is evaluated by the higher level message function or is represented as a PCP confirmation and or indication service The CON IND FB62 function block collaborates with the CIH FB63 auxiliary block The number of the auxiliary block is entered as a CIFB parameter in the INITIB FB60 function block SPA FB 62 5003A806 Figure 8 7 Structure of the CON IND function block FB62 or FB64 8 10 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Confirmations or indications expected from the PLC are indicated with bits 1 through 63 A message is indicated by resetting the bits All unexpected or activated services are written into the standard confirmation indication buffer After such a service occurred the data in the buffer must be evaluated or saved in the same PLC cycle A new service which overwrites the buffer may occur in the next cycle The data is received by the CON IND function block Table 8 3 Description of the parameters of the CON IND function block FB62 or FB64 IBDB B DB INTERBUS data block No of a data block DB 2 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW 0 DW 199 TO A BI TIMEOUT bit 1 Timeout of the function has elapsed error at the communication interface 0 The function is active SPA FB 62 NAME CON IND IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block CIDB MB 24 Standard DB for CON IND PCP T T 1 Occupied timer TO x M
208. M 3 brown Solder side 5 9 bridged 20 20 L8 3 Strip the cable sheath 20 mm and shorten the braided screen by 12 mm Bare core ends 3 mm Place the braided screen evenly around the cable sheath Male 1 Nc Solder side His CX Strip the cable sheath 20 mm and shorten the braided screen by 12 mm Bare the core ends 3 mm TN Place the braided screen evenly around the cable sheath Clamp the shield under the cable grip conductive connection with the housing Figure 7 3 Pin assignment of the 9 pos 5003A703 female D SUB remote bus connector and the male connector belonging to it for the 2 wire technology with information about shielding A Please ensure that the PE connection of the female D SUB remote bus connector is connected to the PE connection of the PLC PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation 7 3 3 Serial Interface V 24 RS 232 The serial interface is designed as a 9 pos male D SUB connector The assignment of this connector with the V 24 RS 232 signals is described in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Signal assignment of the V 24 RS 232 interface Pin signal Direction Function ne 2 TXD Driver Data sent by the controller board E m m Data received by the controller 1 00207 voc 5 V short circuit proof 50 for TTY adapter see below
209. M Programming Error 80F9 Confirmation Parameter block length 1 Error number XXXX Parameter description Error number 1 Maximum number of service requests reached 2 Memory space completely occupied 3 Controller specific hardware problem EEPROM or memory card 4 Memory card not plugged 5 The Warmstart Service was programmed on bit 0 9 68 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Chapter 10 Appendix This chapter provides information on the marking of different revisions on the controller boards the technical data of the controller board the contents of the data diskette QUE Tor eem Nee 10 1 10 1 Overview of the DCB ReVISIONS 10 1 10 2 Technical 0218 nennen EN 10 5 10 3 Contents of the Data Diskette 10 6 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 10 Appendix
210. Message flag 8 108 Message functions 8 90 Message header 8 108 MOD bit 8 91 MODE 8 71 Module Error 8 88 Module identification code 8 34 Module number 8 56 O ON OFF 8 22 8 64 Organization block 8 119 Other 8 130 OUT address list 8 77 Output addresses 8 77 Output bit 8 46 OV Error 8 130 P Parameter Timeout Constant 8 42 PCP activation flag 8 104 PCP communication system 8 96 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PCP message flag 8 106 PCP services 8 110 PCP stations 8 98 Physical Configuration Map 8 34 8 59 Physical Configuration Map 8 63 Process data 8 98 Q Quit Module Error 8 56 Quit Module Error All 8 31 R RB ERR 8 71 RC 8 122 Read Confirmation 8 114 Read Request 8 111 READ service Exmp 8 109 Reason Code 8 122 Receive Bit Manipulation 8 44 Receive block 8 2 8 98 Receive KBL 8 43 RECO bit 8 93 HECONFIG 8 24 8 93 Reject Indication 8 118 Reject Service 8 125 REQ RES 8 4 8 12 8 15 8 17 8 98 8 100 8 119 REQ RES header blocks 8 101 Request service primitive 8 96 Reset Out In01 8 49 Reset Out In01 Switch 8 50 Reset Out In10 8 49 Heset Out In10 Switch 8 50 Heset2 Out In01 8 49 Heset2 Out In10 8 49 Resource 8 128 Response service primitive 8 96 Restart automatic 8 53 Return bit 8 19 RRDB 8 101 8 103 8 107 RRMW 8 103 8 108 8 119 RRST 8 107 8 108 8 119 S Send block
211. NE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS It is possible to define groups in order to support applications in which several local buses are operated in one INTERBUS S system The following figure shows the composition of a group INTERBUS S controller board Bus terminal Bus terminal Bus terminal O bus terminal O I O I O module module module Group 1 O O O module module module I O N I O O Group 2 module module module N Group 3 5003A830 Figure 8 32 Topology of a group definition 35 Provided that you set up the group nos list and the bus segment address list before each local bus is assigned its own group corresponding to the physical arrangement of local buses from 0 up to 255 after power on Thus all local buses which belong to one group are independent of local buses that belong to another group Allocation of several local buses to one group defines that these local buses can only be operated together If several local buses are combined in a group the same group number must be entered for these local buses Each local bus may be assigned to one group only Group numbers from 0 to 255 are permitted All local bus elements modules 8 70 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS belonging to one group are switched on or off when the group
212. NENTS 6 Startup OB 20 215 22 SPA FB 210 NAME ANLAUE tB FB 210 sU M 840 ON M 8 0 S M 8 0 Activation bit INITIB M 10 0 ADDRESS L KY 0 0 CON IND REQ RES T MW 18 DB PCP header tables LOOP M 840 gt SPB FB 60 NAME INITIB IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block FEN3 KF 200 Base address of window 3 AV KF 1 Controlled start message enabled RRST DB 0 REQ RES standard DB CIST DB 0 CON IND standard DB RRMW KF 0 Activation word CIMW KF 0 Signal word CIFB FB 63 CON IND auxiliary driver T T O Timer STEP MB 9 Internal flag byte BUSY M 8 0 Activation bit EO M 8 1 Time OUT RET M 8 2 Return value SPA FB 62 NAME CON IND IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block CIDB MB 18 CON IND header DB ih T Timer TO M 8 3 Timeout SPA FB 66 NAME REQ RES IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block RRDB MB 19 REQ RES header DB il T 3 Timer TO M 8 4 Timeout U M OD ITNITIB SPB LOOP UN M Dedi BEB 37 5 50038 6 29 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup OB1 Cyclic program This program example starts the INTERBUS S system in the cyclic program The addressing block transfers the logical address lists to the controller board where they are checked Data blocks of the example ID code list DB 10 Bus segment list DB 11 IN adddress list DB 12 OUT address list DB 13 After the logical addressing the application can now access the defined module addresses The messa
213. NIX 5003BC04 CONTACT Diagnostic Information THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 For InterBus S system diagnostics the front plate makes various diagnostic information via LEDs and a 3 digit seven segment display available 5003BC04 Operating indicators Controller board ready BASP signal of PLC is active INTERBUS running At least one bus segment disabled Error type Parameter CTRL LB RB MOD Error code Local bus Remote bus Local bus segment number 013 4 p MODE ADDRESS BYTE n n 1 80 00 910 110 1020 22 13e 330 124 440 Error indicators 1350 550 14 60 6 60 17 77 9 Parameter for the error type FI LI LI LI Error in the controller board READY 0700 BAP np Error in a remote bus RUN Oe Error in a a MODE local bus X2 X3 Error message of a module REMOTE RS232 RESET p 5003B401 Figure 1 Operating and error indicators on the front plate PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 CTRL Controller Error LED description Red LED Parameterization error on the controller board or in the software parameterization Parameter Hexadecimal value Error description in the user manual RB Remote Bus Error LED description Red LED Wrong remote bus segment consisting
214. NLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 3 Commands for Error Recovery Clear Display Request 004E Function This command causes the error LEDs of the front plate to go off The diagnostic code which belongs to the error indication is also cleared from the display Since the diagnostic bit parameter and the diagnostic parameter reflect the front plate indicators all entries are reset here as well Prerequisite None Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Clear Display Confirmation 00 2 syntax Clear Display Request 004E Send Bus Error Information Request 005A Function The last bus error message is sent with the Bus Error Information Indication 80C4 message to the controller board Prerequisite This command should only be used after the Bus Data Error 0038 error message occurred It is not checked if the error status of the bus has changed or if the contents of the last Bus Error Information Map message is still up to date Messages Positive acknowledgment Bus Error Information Indication 80C4 Negative acknowledgment No Map Entry Confirmation 00 Meaning There are no entries syntax oend Bus Error Information Request 005A 9 18 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Send Local Bus Module Error Request 005b Function The local bus with the specified local bus address is searched for module
215. NTS 8 ISFP 8 2 2 3 Logical IN Address Map FKT 2 The Logical IN Address Map function communicates the list of the logical IN addresses of the modules in the INTERBUS S topology to the controller board The addresses are entered in a parameter list in such a way that the index in the parameter list corresponds to the physical position of the modules in the INTERBUS S system The values of the remaining parameters are not relevant The number of parameters in the list of the logical input addresses equals the number of parameters in the ID code list cf FKT O of this block The list does not become valid until the Implement All Logical Address Map CONTROL function FB 68 FKT 6 is activated Parameter meanings example EE DW m 0 KY 000 00K m 1 KY 000 000 Bus terminal module m 2 KY OOY XXX Local bus module IN addresses only m 3 KY 000 000 Local bus module OUT addresses only m 4 KY 000 000 Local bus module OUT addresses only m 5 KY 00Y XXX Local bus module IN and OUT addresses m 6 KY OOY XXX Local bus module IN addresses only m k 2 KY 000 000 Bus terminal module m k 1 KY 000 000 Local bus module OUT addresses only m k KY OOY XXX Local bus module IN and OUT addresses In the bus configuration the 2nd Sth 6th and kth module have IN addresses n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter l
216. O 2 boot sequence for power up 5 3 2 2 Access to Bit Controlled Command Sequences The ID code 18 overlays three register words in the I O area of the PLC The addresses are assigned by means of logical addressing The registers available are Two words as input registers One word as output register Busy bit register Activation bit register Return bit register ID list IN list OUT list KY 000 018 KY 000 032 KY 000 034 15 Output word 34 7 0 7 0 Activation bit n n 1 Inout word p 7 0 7 0 Busy bit 32 n n 1 Input word 7 0 7 0 Return bit 34 n n 1 Figure 5 6 Exemplary assignment of the input and output words for the activation busy and return bits for a Siemens PLC PHCENIX CONTACT 5 System Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Activation bit Busy bit Return bit Output bit 35 0 Input bit 33 0 Input bit 35 0 5003A507 Figure 5 7 Bit controlled function processing using the example of Figure 5 6 Explanations for Figure 5 4 1 The Siemens PLC sets the activation bit output 35 0 The rising edge starts the command sequence which is stored in the EEPROM and assigned to this output 2 The controller board reports the PLC via the busy bit 33 0 that the controller board has recognized the activation and that the command sequence is now processed 3 The PLC recognizes from the busy bit 33
217. ONENTS 2 Technical Description The input byte 0 in the PLC s I O area has a special function This byte transfers the interrupt number of the requesting controller board to the PLC Thus for controller boards with interrupt capability the input word O byte O and byte 1 is no longer available as an input address 33 If the controller board s interrupt line is activated the board is capable of interrupts and therefore occupies the periphery input word O 2 5 2 Hardware Term Definitions I O area of the PLC with IBS S5 DCB I T Byte 255 A A A Communication register E Q area SE SSS E OR dii vy Byte 000 SEEKER RW p Ro wr SS SS Module address eS s Byte 255 E WM P area _ Application register Diagnostic register Byte 000 Y Y Y ovy Y Y 5003B217 Figure 2 6 Variable locations for registers and window areas Inputs outputs The peripheral area of the PLC with the P and Q areas and the process image is called the input output I O area of the PLC PHCENIX at CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Window areas Window areas are address areas in the PLC which are occupied through the host controller board They are set with DIP switches on the
218. OR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Chapter 8 3 6 new function block PUTOUTDB FB 81 The PUTOUTDB function block FB 81 writes the data in the extended input area to the extended output area determined by the ADR and EXT parameters The start and end address of the output data are transferred with the ADR parameter they are to be specified in words even numbered The return bit indicates whether the function block has been executed without errors FB 81 is called at the end of the cycle Table 8 21 Parameters of the PUTOUTDB function block FB 81 IBDB Number of an InterBus data block DB 0 255 The data block is to be set up by you EXT BY Specifies the area to be read 1 extended area 1 2 extended area 2 ADR otart and end address of the data to be written even values only DBDW DB Number of the source DB and data word 2 bytes in one data word RET Return bit of the function 0 Function executed without errors 1 Function executed with errors SPB FB 81 NAME PUTOUTDB IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block EXT KF 1 Selection of the extended area ADR KY 0 128 Start and end address of the data to be written DBDW KY 10 000 Number of the source DB and data word RET MO 2 Return bit Structure of the data block for the selected extended area E g DWx data n data n 1 DW x 1 data n 2 data n 3 DW x 126 data n 252 data n 253 DW x 127 data n 2
219. Other Siemens or compatible PLCs upon request When coupled to the S5 backplane bus the controller board can be used with all Siemens modules The two wire INTERBUS S system is connected through the remote bus connector A bus system with the following expansion can be set up e max 256 local bus segments and or remote bus modules e max 320 modules e max 256 INTERBUS S words e max 62 PCP stations 2 2 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 3 Overview This section briefly describes the most important components of the host controller board The board s front plate is explained first followed by an explanation of its visible components printed board with system connector The designations used below are retained throughout the user manual 7 5003A202 Figure 2 2 Front plate 1 board 2 and system connector 3 of the controller board 1 Front plate The front plate is externally accessible and contains all operating and display elements of the controller board 2 Printed circuit board with system connector 3 The PCB with the system connector is the part of the host controller board that is inserted into the PLC The front plate is the termination to the front PHCENIX CONTACT 2 Technical Description online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 3 1 Fr
220. PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oervice Requester Client LE oervice Responder Server 5003A824 Figure 8 41 PCP service primitives Table 8 20 PCP service primitives Request Primitives Indication Confirmation Primitives Primitives Response Primitives Information Report Hequest Initiate Error Indication Initiate Error Confirmation Initiate Error Response 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT The individual service primitives are described in Chapter 9 Commands and Messages 8 85 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 1 1 Control During Communication Process data When using the INTERBUS S system the process data occupies part of the PLC s I O address area The size of the address area occupied by INTERBUS S depends on the INTERBUS S system s capacity This address area is treated by the PLC as if S5 modules were plugged into it For the INTERBUS S system the address area required by the process data is reserved centrally on the controller board Communication data Unlike the process data the communication data of the PCP stations is not mapped into the PLC s I O address area It is kept in the data blocks of the PLC The data is exchanged between the PLC and the controller board The communication registers serve as the hardware interface for this purpose The registers occupy 4 bytes in t
221. Q area o MeMesdde 77 77 Z SOR E vg Byte 000 eese Rm E Moduleaddress Byte 255 2020202020 02020 0202 402020202029 RO e DAB DCB Window UW P area vg Application register Diagnostic register 5003B217 Figure 2 22 Variable locations for registers and window areas 2 34 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description The location of the windows is to be selected in such a way that the windows neither overlap nor that other modules occupy the address area of the window areas and registers Double addressing is not permitted DCB controller board Window 1 Base address ON SW1 MM QP am 128 64 HM 32 HM 16 HM M 4 M Length Bytes ON SW 2 _ om 128 a 64 NM 32 BM 16 NM HM HM Window 2 Window 3 Base address Base address ON SW3 ON SW5 M ap M ap 128 n 128 n 64 n 64 M 32 M 32 _ 16 EM 16 _ 8 EM 8 M M Length Bytes ON SW4 9M 128 64 M 32 M 16 EM M EM E 2 5003B212 Figure 2 23 Setting the INTERBUS S windows PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Window 1 Base address 32 SW1 Length 18 bytes SW2 Window 2 Base
222. R function block FB73 8 81 Table 8 18 Parameters of the RECONFIG function block FB 75 8 82 Table 8 19 Parameters of the EVENT function block FB 76 8 83 T 2 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Tables Table 8 20 PCP service primitives 8 85 Table 8 21 Error messages for a connection abort 8 113 Table 8 22 Error messages for a connection abort cont d 8 114 Table 8 23 Error messages for a connection abort cont d 8 115 Table 8 24 Error messages for the reject service 8 115 Table 8 25 Additional error messages 8 116 Table 8 26 Service specific error messages error class 0 initiate 8 116 Table 8 27 Service specific error messages error class 1 VFD state 8 117 Table 8 28 Service specific error messages error class 2 application reference 8 117 Table 8 29 Service specific error messages error class 3 definition 8 117 Table 8 30 Service specific error messages error class 4 resource 8 118 Table 8 31 Service specific error messages error class 5 service 8 118 Table 8 32 Service specific error messages error class 6 access 8 119 Table 8 33 Service specific error messages error class 7 OV error 8 120 Table 8 34 Service specific error messages error class 8 other 8 120 Chapter 9 Table 9 1 Overview of the commands 9 1 Table 9 2 Overview of the messages for a CTRL error 9 2 Table 9 3 Overview of the messages 9 3 Table 9 4 Error numbers used 9 56 Table 9 5 Error n
223. READY state i e is ready for operation In the cyclic program the receive and send blocks are called unconditionally To get an optimized response with respect to time the receive block CON IND should be called at the start of the cyclic program and the send block REQ RES should be called at the end Depending on the length of the command or message quantity of data words the blocks may also be active for several cycles The function blocks for the system messages are called after the receive block The command functions are called at the end of the cyclic program before the send block The command and message functions are activated by flag bits Each function may only be called up in one position of the program A function is started by setting its parameters and activation bit BUSY bit If a function is to be used in several parts of the user program the parameters and the activation bit have to be set 8 16 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5003B OB 20 21 22 Figure 8 14 Program structuring PHCENIX CONTACT FB 60 gt INITIB SPA FB210 OB 1 SPA FB 62 FB62 FB63 gt CON IND CIH lt Application SPA FB 73 FB 73 gt SYSERROR SPA FB 75
224. ROLLED START e consists of the INTERBUS S window 1 and the INTERBUS S window 2 and e allows to access in real time the states of sensors and actuators of the connected processes Communication Interface The standard function blocks of the INTERBUS S use the communication interface e for initializing the controller board and the connected INTERBUS S system e for controling the INTERBUS S system during operation e for evaluating the error states e for addressing communication stations through a PMS connection PMS Peripherals Message Specification The associated protocol is called Peripherals Communication Protocol PCP Therefore INTERBUS S modules which can be addressed in this way are called PCP stations e as an extended communication interface When a PC is used system and PCP communication can be used through this RS 232 interface Diagnostic interface e It is always activated in the AUTOMATIC START and optionally in the CONTROLLED START mode e It allows to evaluate the controller board indicators for the operating mode and the error type by means of software PHCENIX d CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces Inputs Outputs QW254 Communication 2 interface Q area ios N Process data PW254 interface PW128 PW126 P area lo Diagnostic PWO interface 5003A301 Figure 3 1 Positions of the software interfaces in the PLC
225. S 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Too Many K Modules 0065 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause The maximum number of communication modules has been exceeded Hemegy Check the parameterization lists of the communication references KR for permitted KR 2 to 62 A continuous ascending order is to be kept 2 3 4 35 The surplus communication modules are not served Receive CR Error 0066 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause When the RECEIVE COMMUNICATION REFERENCE command is checked this error is sent when e an invalid communication reference has been used e too many parameters were sent e too few parameters were sent Hemegy Check the parameterization lists of the communication references KR for permitted KR 2 to 62 A continuous ascending order is to be kept 2 3 4 The first parameter indicates the number of definitions 4 54 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Check Configuration Error 0068 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause This error is reported if the sent and existing configurations do not agree after the CHECK PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION ID code list command has been used Remedy Check the ID list for
226. S IBS IBS 24 Di AO 1 24 DO PW 146 PW 144 IW 20 PW 142 PW 140 BS 1 i IBS IP DIO 1 24 P IW 28 PW 128 IW 126 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F BS 2 Semmes IBS IP CDI 1 24 F BS 3 aennnnnnss IBS IP CDO 1 24 F LEL BS 4 IB30 95 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F BS 5 2 TET 8 IW 40 IB 30 BS 6 IW 30 IW 28 IW 46 IW 40 IW 38 IW 20 5003B305 Figure 3 7 Logical addressing of the inputs DCB mode IW 126 Diagnostic bit register PW 128 Diagnostic parameter register PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces For one module all input and output addresses always belong together as only the start address of the address area is given which has been assigned to the module When the addresses are assigned logically modules which have only a byte address area can be assigned odd byte addresses There are no restrictions with regard to the filling up of peripheral words for modules which are addressed byte by byte However modules which have to be addressed word by word must only be assigned even byte addresses Data words Data block INTERBUS S modules structure Location no Module type DB 13 15 DW 0 KY 0 13 Module quantity DW 1 t KY200 1 IBS 24 BK T DW 2 2 KY 0 0 2 IBS 24 DI DW 3 3 KY 0 132 3 IBS AO 1 DW4 4 KY 0 32 4 IBS 24 DO IDW 5 5 KY 0 0 5 IBS PT 100 A2 DW 6 6 KY 0 28 6 IBS IP DIO 1 24 P
227. Send Group Number Request 0106 Function This command allows to read out which groups have been defined Prerequisite Use the Receive Group Numbers Request command toi define the groups before you call this command Messages Positive acknowledgment Send Group Number Confirmation 8112 Negative acknowledgment Send Group Number Confirmation 8112 9 16 PHCENIX TE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Send Group State Request 0107 Function Prerequisite This command allows to read out which groups are switched on or off Use the Receive Group Numbers Request command to define the groups before this command is called Messages Positive acknowledgment oend Group State Confirmation 8113 Negative acknowledgment Send Group State Confirmation 8113 Send Local Bus Code Request 0108 Function This command reads out the local bus addresses with information on the Prerequisite Remark Messages 5003B installation depth from the controller board Use the Receive Local Bus Code Map Request command before calling this command If the Send Local Bus Code Request command has not yet been used after power on or a Configure Bus Request 0023 the presettings of the controller are used Positive acknowledgment Send Local Bus Code Map Confirmation 8114 Negative acknowledgment Send Local Bus Code Map Confirmation 8114 PHCENIX v CONTACT THE O
228. System Documentation 4 19 4 3 Diagnostic Registers ef Say coe cecccescccssccsecseesseesenseccseesonsseessensessaessaesoesseeeenes 4 23 4 3 1 Diagnostic Bit Register 4 23 4 3 2 Diagnostic Parameter Register 4 23 4 3 3 Diagnostic Register Locations 4 24 4 4 I O Status Indicators 4 26 4 5 startup and Acknowledgment Displays 4 28 4 5 1 Host Controller Board 82 4 28 4 5 2 Acknowledgment after an Error nenne 4 29 4 6 Diagnostics on
229. THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS INTERBUS S User Manual for INTERBUS S Controller Board for Siemens SIMATIC S5 Type IBS S5 DCB UM E Revision B Order No 27 58 363 This user manual is valid for IBS S5 DCB I T Order No 27 58 156 Firmware 2 3 5 IBS S5 DCB T Hardware revision 2C IBS 35 SWD Order No 28 06 228 Software 2 2 2 IBS SYS SWT Order No 27 80 88 1 Software 2 2 3 Copyright by Phoenix Contact 04 1994 50036 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS We are constantly attempting to improve the quality of our manuals Should you have any suggestions or recommendations for improvement of the contents and layout of our manuals we would appreciate it if you would send your recommendations to Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co Abt Applikation Techn Dokumentation FlachsmarktstraBe 8 28 49 5235 550 32825 Blomberg 49 5235 55 1200 Germany 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Please Read Completely Please read completely before reading this manual In order to guarantee that your use of this manual is as straightforward as possible and that hardware is used safely in the installation operation and maintenance phases we request that you carefully read and observe the following instructions Explanation of Symbols Used damage to the hardware or software or in indirect connection with dangerous process per
230. TROL A SPA REQ RES BUSY TO a RET 0 b Explanation of Figure 5 5 A The function is activated with an edge Figure 5 5 Function call and timing 1 Enter function number FCT 1 2 The function is activated when the busy bit is set CONTROL 3 he function works in several cycles INTERBUS S is started 4 The function has been terminated BUSY 0 In the case of an error a TO 1 timeout of the function has elapsed b RET 1 the function could not be executed PHCENIX CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 5 3 1 3 Function Overview Activation blocks l CONTROL FB 68 0 Configure INTERBUS S 1 Start INTERBUS S Cycle 2 Stop INTERBUS S Cycle 3 Alarm Stop 4 Clear Display 5 Disable All Messages 6 7 Im lement All Logical Address Ma Init Communication _ii__ Reserved DEFNEFB69 _ No Funcin k 0 Physical ConfigurationMap 1 Logical Local Bus Address Map 2 Logical IN Address Map 3 Logical OUT Address Map 4 Communication Reference 5 j EvntMap 6 GrupNumbrs 7 _ Parameter Timeout Constant 8 _ ReceveKBL 9 Receive Bit Manipulation 10 Group Error Characteristics 11 Quit Module Error No Funcion 0 Physical Configuration M
231. The command determines the evaluation of the bus input bit The bus output bit is set by setting the host output bit sections 1 and 3 in the figure As long as the bus output bit is not reset upon evaluation of the bus input bit the bus output bit is only determined by the host output bit sections 1 and 3 in the figure 5003B PHCENIX is CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Host output bit Bus output bit a Jc B Bus input bit b Evaluation instruction a Reset OUT INO1 b Reset OUT IN10 Section 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 5003A814 Figure 9 2 Bit manipulation instructions RESET 01 RESET 10 Numbering of the bits of an address Bit 15 12 11 10 0 Meaning Bit number Reserved Logical address Values 0 F hex 9 30 PHCENIX TE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Structure of the Reset Out InO1 instruction oyntax 1 2 3 Reset Out In01 Output address Input address Structure of the Reset Out In10 instruction Syntax 1 2 3 Reset Out In10 Output address Input address Structure of the Reset 2 Out In0O1 instruction oyntax Key 0O A Reset2 Out In01 Output address Bit number for the output address Input address Bit nu
232. WO O g a O nai 2 D 0 9mm 6 READY CTRL O Lo 4 e O a eai e SEE C 5 BSA OMD O O x2 X3 AP Im H E REMOTE ups s O7 C B e EC Q e 9 5001B103 IBS A25 IBS S5 IBS PC CB T DCB I T DCB I T IBS PC CB COP I T Figure 1 4 Host controller boards for the various computer and control systems 5003B PHCENIX ud CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview 1 3 2 Remote Bus The remote bus covers the long distances within a system The entire remote bus may be up to 12 8 km long from the host controller board to the last remote bus module connected This is achieved by dividing the entire remote bus into individual segments A remote bus segment consists of the transmission line remote bus cable and the bus terminal module connected to it O modules may be connected to the bus terminal module A remote bus segment can bridge up to 400 m In this way the entire remote bus can be divided into a maximum of up to 256 remote bus segments when a DCB controller board is connected see Figure 1 5 consists of remote bus segments They have to be considered in an appropriate way when the sum of the remote bus segments is determined Remote bus and installation remote bus are abbreviated RB Please take this into account for the error messages of the host controller board Chapter 5 3 The installation remote bus which will be described in
233. X ae CONTACT 6 Startup DB10 Identification code list The ID code address list includes the physical bus structure online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The structure is described with the help of the ID numbers and their length codes The modules are counted starting from the controller board and through the entire bus structure The list is completed with the special ID code entries In the example ID 16 Diagnostic bit register Structure of the list DB x DW y DW y 1 DW y 2 DW y n 2 DW y n 1 DW y n ID 17 Diagnostic parameter register KY KY KY KY KY KY 000 PC LC ID LC ID LC ID 000 SID 000 SID Parameter count 1st module 2nd module nth module Special ID code Special ID code PC Quantity of the subsequent parameters n LC Length code of the module ID Identification code of the module SID Special ID code To be taken from the module description of the manufacturer Permitted codes ID 16 Diagnostic bit register 17 Diagnostic parameter register 18 Bit controlled command register 19 Bit manipulation register Key DBIO be KY 2 KY 3f KY 4 Ky os KY or KY TE Y Os RY Of KRY LO KY 11 KY tar KY jo KY lA KY 15 KY 164 6 36 pex 000 0153 000 05237 ODT T305 004 065 00141295 004 066 001 90 73 000 0125 1290103 1294 0093 l29090105 ODLOlls 00
234. Y 000 YYY ID code of the module 2 2 1 KY 000 00X No of the module in the local bus m 2 2 KY 000 YYY ID code of the module 3 No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored No of the DW with which the parameter list begins Quantity of parameters No of the module which reports a module error Quantity of modules which report a module error YYY ID code of the module that has reported a module error r x A335 50038 PHCENIX 8 79 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 3 Message Functions 35 Definition Message functions are functions that indicate the status of the controller board the bus or events This is why the functions are always called unconditionally 8 3 1 SYSERROR FB 73 The SYSERROR function block indicates errors of the INTERBUS S system to the user by means of the CON BUS and MOD bits CON Errors of the controller board are identified by setting the CON error bit BUS If the bus is no longer executable in the configuration specified by the user owing to an open circuit module failure or an excessive data transmission error rate it is stopped STOP state all outputs are reset and the error is reported by setting the BUS error bit MOD Error of the modules I O part like the failure of the module s peripheral voltage or a short circuit at the input or output are indicated by setting the MOD error bit These errors do not cause the stopping of INTERBUS
235. a of which contains an odd number of bytes are assigned an odd byte address if e the previous module is a byte oriented module with the same area and has an even base address filling up the words Table 3 8 Example for byte oriented addressing with odd byte addresses Module number Address area E g address n Input 1 word IB 30 n 1 Input 1 byte IB 32 n 2 Input 1 byte IB 33 n 4 Input 1 byte IB 34 n 5 Output 1 byte OB 32 n 6 Output 1 byte OB 33 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 O C o PW 162 Base address pw 160 Windows ca 080 PW 148 PW 146 Length PW 144 PW 142 PW 140 PW 138 PW 136 JJ IW 34 PW 134 Base addr PW 132 Window2 PW 130 BS 1 a IBS IP DIO 1 24 P BS 2 BS3 Bi ibas A IBS IP CDO 1 24 F IW 44 3534 BA S IB3S 9 B IBSIP CDI 1 24 F IW 42 BS 5 ee Length IW 40 M ELEELE IW 38 IB 38 IW 36 IW 34 Base addr wao Window IW 30 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F
236. able lists these commands All commands which are not listed will be executed as usual Start Interbus Cycle 0001 Start Bus Not Possible Con 00E3hex Switch Group On 0021 8 owitch Group On Failed Con 80C 5hex Set BK Alarm Log 0024pex BK Alarm Failed Con 005A Reset BK Alarm Log 00254 Set BK Alarm Phy 0026 8 Heset BK Alarm Phy 0027hex send Bus Error Information 005A4 No Map Entry Con 00EDhex send Bus Error Information V24 0116 send Localbus Module Error 005Bphex send All Module Error 005Bhex Quit Module Error 00644 Quit Module Error Not Possible Con Quit Module Error All 0065 80FFhex New Bit in the Diagnostic Bit Register Bit 14 in the diagnostic bit register is called bus quality bit It is set if more than 20 cycles with errors were detected within 1 million data cycles Part 2 Writing the Diagnostic Data to the Parameterization Memory Part 1 for firmware version 3 71 see Page 11 Diagnostic data which describe transmission errors are only written to the parameterization memory if there were error free data cycles before these errors occurred Additional Error Numbers for the Error Message Bus Error Information Indication 80CA DD50 Hemote bus or local bus error detected in the additional diagnostic phase DD51 Local bus error detected in the additional diagnostic phase DD52 Remote bus error detected in the additional diagnostic phase 14 PHCENIX 5003BC04
237. address 132 SW3 Length 20 bytes SW4 Window 3 Base address 160 SW5 Automatic start Diagnostic bit register Bytes 30 and 31 Diagnostic parameter register Bytes 130 and 131 Window 1 Window 2 Window 3 Base address Base address Base address ON SW1 ON SW3 ON SW5 Q P Q P Q P m 128 BH 128 BH 128 64 64 64 32 32 E 32 E 16 16 mE 16 BH _ B _ B _ Hm BH Length Bytes Length Bytes ON SW2 ON SWA uses oe 128 128 64 64 32 32 16 mE 16 8 8 4 NEM 5003B213 Figure 2 24 Example setting of the INTERBUS S windows 2 36 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Settings for the example Window 1 Base address 32 SW1 32 Length 18bytes SW2 16 2 Window 2 Base address 132 SW3 128 4 Length 20bytes SW4 16 4 Window 3 Base address 160 SW5 128 32 Automatic start Diagnostic bit register Bytes 30 and 31 Diagnostic parameter register Bytes 130 and 131 Table 2 4 Address assignment in the PLC m First Byte Last Byte Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs Window 1 32 32 49 49 Window 2 132 132 151 151 Window 3 160 160 163 163 Windows which extend from the P to the Q area 3 If a window extends from the P to the Q area a correct programm
238. address area which is occupied depends on the INTERBUS S configuration This address area can be accessed in the same way L IW T OW U I S O L PW T PW L QW T QW as system contained boards For the INTERBUS S system the address area required for the I O modules is addressed centrally on the host controller board The setting of the required addresses depends on the operating mode of the controller board SW 6 Automatic start DCB mode In this operating mode the host controller board automatically puts the addresses of the INTERBUS S modules into the specified address windows after the voltage has been switched on The set window lengths must be shorter than the address area of the modules Moreover registers for bus system diagnostics will be overlaid at fixed positions in the PLC s input area i When the automatic start is used the set window lengths for the I O address area of the modules is not checked for its correct setting Controlled start DCB mode In this mode of operation the host controller board runs through an initialization phase in order to address INTERBUS S modules after the voltage has been switched on The programmer can freely assign the addresses of the modules as well as the diagnostic registers in the PLC s address area The programming is done either during the PLC startup by means of a software package or on the host controller board by means of a programmed EEPROM Automatic and controlle
239. agnostic Interfaces Wrong Base Address Window2 0047 Error type User error Error LED Controller Error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause The user has not set the start address for window 2 correctly Remedy Check the base address of window 2 Wrong Length Window 1 0048 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause The user has not set the correct area length of window 1 Remedy Check the length setting of window 1 for e sufficient lengths for all modules and e address overlaps with window 2 or window 3 Wrong Length Window2 0049 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause Remedy 5003B The user has not set the correct area length of window 2 Check the length setting of window 2 for e sufficient length of all modules and e address overlaps with window 1 or window 3 PHCENIX deny CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces No Executable Configuration Error 004A Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause A non existent INTERBUS S configuration was sent to the host controller board Remedy Check the connection of the INTERBUS S cable at the controller board and restart the board Command Parameter Error 004b Error type User er
240. alue XX decimal value range 0 99 appears in the defined input word When the configuration is specified the special ID code 00154 is attached to the actual configuration by means of the Check Physical Configuration 0058 service It may occur only once in the configuration specification By means of logical addressing the two words can be placed on any address in the PLC memory 94xx 99xx The selector switch settings 9400 to 9912 display the ID codes of the current configuration in their physical order as hexadecimal values on the seven segment display The first position 9400 provides the number of modules of the current configuration If there are more than 255 modules greater than FFrex the point of the right digit of the seven segment display lights up for the third hex position This code selector switch setting corresponds to the result of the Send Actual Configuration 010Dhex or Send Actual Configuration V24 010E services 10 PHCENIX 5003BC04 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Statistical Diagnostics Automatic enabling of the statistical diagnostic functionality The statistical diagnostic functionality is enabled automatically with every start command Display of the diagnostic status on the controller board When InterBus S is active a disabled statistical diagnostic functionality is shown with a bracket symbol in the left field of the th
241. ameter register indicate the error number as a parameter hex The parameters will be further described in the following chapter The error can lead to the stopping of the bus The I O data does not correspond to the up to date signal states There must be no access to the bus addresses concerned 1 2 3 4 H 5 L 6 7 8 9 J a A sh CL D c E F E i Do not confuse 6 _ N B m 5003A402 Figure 4 2 The seven segment display 5003B PHCENIX Tu CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 1 3 Error Codes for Controller Errors CTRL Table 4 2 Error codes for controller errors Code Meaning Error Location Remedy 00 Firmware error Controller board send in controller board Not available l l 05 Firmware error Controller board send in controller board 06 Firmware error Controller board 07 Undefined command User program Remove undefined command 08 Missing parameter User program Add parameter 09 Communication error User program Check window setting of window 3 OA Undefined command User program Remove undefined command Ob Firmware error Controller board send in controller board OC Command acknowledgment not User program Keep timeout received in time Od Parameters are missing User program Complete
242. ameters of the REQ RES data block which are to be received In the program listing the parameter quantity of the CON IND function block which is to be sent is set to 8 for each call The parameter quantity of the REQ RES function block is set to 16 for each call SPB FB 60 A DB 9 L KB 8 8 Parameters 3 4 CON IND L KB 16 16 Parameters T DL 24 REQ RES Figure 8 13 Call of the IBDB data block 3 Error in the instruction lists oome errors in the instruction lists for bit manipulation are indicated with the IBDB The error is indicated in the data word 62 DW 62 of the IBDB The data word contains the error code in the left byte DL and the number of line with the error in the right byte DR 35 The description of the functions for bit manipulation is given in Chapter 8 2 4 2 DEFINE FB 69 50038 PHCENIX 8 15 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 1 3 INTERBUS S System Control The INTERBUS S functions consist of function blocks They are called by the user at startup and in the cyclic program by means of conditional or unconditional jumps The function blocks are written in STEP 5 The INITIB initialization block is called at startup of the PLC OB 20 22 Some basic software settings are carried out with the INITIB function block FB60 It also performs synchronization between the PLC and INTERBUS S The routine is not terminated until INTERBUS S is in the
243. annot be assigned to an error code 8 116 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Error class 1 VFD state The service could not be executed owing to the VFD state Table 8 23 Service specific error messages error class 1 VFD state Error class 2 application reference This type of error refers to the communication relationship through which the service is run Table 8 24 Service specific error messages error class 2 application reference Application Unreachable Cause The application process is not accessible Error class 3 definition Discrepancies with objects Table 8 25 Service specific error messages error class 3 definition Error code Explanation Cause The objects required do not exist 2 Object Attribute Inconsistent Cause The given object has been specified with inconsistent attributes 3 Name Already Exists Cause The name already exists 0 Other d The error cannot be assigned to an error code oer PHCENIX 8 117 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Error class 4 resource Existing capacities are exceeded Table 8 30 Service specific error messages error class 4 resource Error code Explanation 1 Memory Unavailable Cause No more memory is available to execute the service 2 Max Outstanding Services Overflow Cause More service requests without a confirmation were sent
244. another one of it is not processed in the same cycle e Message in the CIDB data block The expected message is entered in the header data block together with the message code KR and the pointer setting pointing to the DB body and the data word in the body The bit pointing to the header of the message is set in the CIMW message word 1 DWO of CIDB 2 DW 4 of CIDB 3 DW8 of CIDB 15 DW 56 of CIDB If the bit is reset the message has arrived and has been entered in the corresponding data block Initiate service The individual services are initiated by way of the RRMW activation flag The bits must be set by means of a signal edge 0 Header and body in the RRST standard data block 1 HeaderinDWO of CIDB 2 Header in DW 4 of CIDB 3 HeaderinDW8 of CIDB 15 Header in DW 56 of CIDB The service has been sent if the bit is reset 5003B PHCENIX 8 95 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 1 9 Example of a Service Figure 8 46 see below shows the composition of the parameters belonging to the READ REQUEST service primitive In this example the counter statuses of an INTERBUS S counter module will be read The service header of the Read Request service primitive is created for this purpose As its first parameter the service header contains the code for selecting the service in this case 8081 The parameter count PC is set to 3 data wor
245. ap 1 Software Revision 2 Switch Information 3 INTERBUS S Cycle Counter 4 Logical Address Error PHCENIX CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces No Function No 0 Group ON 0 255 1 Group OFF 0 255 2 JjBKAlamON 0 255 3 JjBKAlmOFF j 0 255 Bit 4 Event ON 11 16 5 Event OFF 1 16 4 JjAlEvntsON jo 5 All Events OFF o ADDRESS FB 72 Parameters Function IDDB DB n DB number ID code list IDDW KF Pointer DW ID code list LBDB DB n DB number local bus list LBDB KF Pointer DW local bus list INDB DB n DB number IN address list I NDW KF Pointer DW IN address list OUDB DB n DB number OUT address list OUDW KF Pointer DW OUT address list KRDB DB n DB number KR list KRDW KF Pointer DW KR list GRDB DB n DB number group no list GRDW KF DB number group no list 33 Function block FB 72 ADDRESS Pointer for DB 1 255 0 gt No list 0 function Pointer for DW 0 255 KR Communication reference PHCENIX CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces ERRNFO FB74 No Function 0 Controller Error Code 1 Bus Information 2 jDefetGrup S Module Error
246. arameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins 35 The timeout constant is limited to the value FFFFFFhaex This value corresponds to a time of approximately 4 7 hours The default value is 13FF ex approx 5 12 sec m PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 2 9 Receive KBL FKT 8 The Receive KBL function allows to change the entries of the communication relationship list KBL on the controller board The parameters of this function are split into 2 bytes The left bytes shows the parameter s number the right byte shows the parameter setting for the station KR Not all parameters need to be communicated when executing the function Owing to the numbering of the parameters a subset of the parameters in the KBL may only be modified However the parameter with the number zero the communication reference must always be transferred 35 The Receive KBL function must only be executed whenever communication has not yet been initialized FB 68 FKT 7 Parameter meanings DB DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1 KY 2 000 XXX Communication reference m 2 KY 001 XXX Remote address m 3 KY 002 XXX Connection type m 4 KY 003 XXX Max send conf req counter m 5 KY 004 XXX Max rec conf req counter Do m 6 KY 005 XXX Max send ack req counter not m KY 006 XXX Max rec ack req counter change m 8 KY 0
247. ard 5 155U Slot designation 5 150U Mode 5 155U Mode 115 123 131 139 147 155 163 Slot designation 5 150U Slot Software designation used Interrupt S5 4195U Processing ISFP Software Slot designation 5 130WB 51 69 79 89 97 105 113 121 129 137 145 153 163 5 115U Slot designation CR 700 0 LA12 rack CPU IM CR 700 0 LB 11 rack CR 700 1 LA 12 rack CR 700 2 LA 12 rack CR 700 3 LA12 rack Installation possible Installation possible if bridge BR7 at the back of the rack is installed see Siemens S5 155 U user manual 5003A236 Figure 7 1 Permissible slots for the DCB controller board in the Siemens racks o5 115U 155U PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation 7 2 Cable Installation There are two ways to connect the DCB controller board to the following components of the INTERBUS S system You may either select one of the preassembled cable
248. are listed in the IBDB data block from DW 69 onwards DW 68 KH MMMM Message code 69 KY 000 002 Parameter count 70 KY 000 00X Error no 71 KY 000 OYY Parameter no MMMM Message code YY The parameter no indicates the line no in which an error has been detected in the instruction list X Error No Meaning 1 Element exists twice 2 Group does not exist 5003B PHCENIX 8 51 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 2 12 Quit Module Error FKT 11 The Quit Module Error function clears the module errors of the named modules on the respective modules This applies only for modules which have a module error acknowledgment The logical local bus address and the desired module number in the local bus are to be specified as parameters The module number 0 is reserved for the bus terminal module or the installation remote bus station Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 00K m 1 KY 000 YYY Local bus address m 2 KY 000 00X Module no m k 1 KY 000 YYY Local bus address m k KY 000 00X Module no n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of parameters X Module no in the specified local bus YYY Local bus no The error in the instruction list is specified in the data block IBDB from the data word 69 DW 69 DW 68 KH MMMM Message code DW 69 KY
249. ata block Base address of window 3 EEPROM operation REQ RES standard DB CON IND standard DB Activation word Signal word CON IND auxiliary driver Timer Internal flag byte Activation bit Timeout Return value 0000 00000001 Bit O activated Activation bit Set register Read busy bit register O Busy bit not active Activation BW Reset register Read busy bit register O Busy Bit 0 active PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup Bus topology for the DCBZYK example DCBZYK IBS S5 DCB I T Diagnostic Bit 1126 0 1 127 7 register Parameter 1128 0 1129 7 Window 3 IW 200 202 OW 200 202 IBS IBS IBS BS 21 24 DI AO1 24 PALO Sj Li 20 0 21 7 O 32 0 33 7 IW 146 IW 144 IW 142 IW 140 BS 11 BS 22 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F Ds ID 10 ds IP CDO este e fe M IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 30307 unus D 7e O29 0 29 7 sess BS 23 BS 24 1310317 BS
250. ata block No of a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW 0 DW 199 Busy E BI BUSYbitt 1 The function is activated by setting the BUSY bit O After termination of the function the BUSY bit is reset automatically by the function block T T Timer occupied by the function IDDB B DB Data block number in ID code list DB 1 DB 255 IDDW D KF Pointer to 1st data word of ID code list LBDB B DB Data block number in LB address list DB 1 DB 255 LBDW D KF Pointer to tst data word of LB address list INDB B DB Datablock number in IN address list DB1 DB255 INDW D KF Pointer to 1st data word of IN address list OUDB B DB Data block number in OUT address list 81 8255 OUDW D KF Pointer to 1st data word of OUT address list KRDB B DB Data block number in KR address list 081 DB 255 KRDW D KF Pointer to 1st data word of KR address list GRDB B DB Datablock number in group list DB 1 DB 255 GRDW D KF Pointer to 1st data word of group list MODE E BI Mode selection see also explanations below EREG A BY Error register cf explanations below 1 The timeout of the function has elapsed the function could not be executed O The function is active RET A BI RETURN bit j O gt UD TIMEOUT bit O Function t
251. ata cycle of the bus has been started From this point in time the controller board operates the process data channel and the PCP channel if necessary Process data Cyclic preparation of the process input data image of the modules for the PLC Cyclic transfer process output data from the PLC to the modules connected to the bus PCP channel Operation of the Peripherals Communication Protocol for modules with integrated PCP 35 For group definitions and defective local bus or installation remote bus segments the bus is run without the defective and switched off segment The BSA LED is then illuminated 5003B PHCENIX y CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Stop Bus Confirmation 00C6 Meaning The process data and the possibly used PCP channel are not operated any longer Process data The cyclic data traffic on the bus is stopped The existing process data image of the modules connected to the bus is statically kept and is not renewed e he process output data can only be changed to the safe state by means of the Alarm Stop Request 004A command resetting of the outputs PCP channel The Peripherals Communication Protocol PCP is not used further e The established connections are not automatically aborted Possibly pending services are not processed until the data traffic is started again Quit Alarm Stop Confirmation 00d8 Meaning The Alarm Stop Request 004A
252. ation Call CON IND Beginning of cycle Unconditional REQ RES End of cycle Unconditional 5003B PHCENIX 8 3 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 35 The CON IND and REQ RES blocks must be called once in every cycle to ensure a correct processing of commands and messages 35 A detailed description of the CON IND and REQ RES function blocks is given in Chapter 8 1 2 2 CON IND Page 1 Off The third type of blocks provides the users with a tool with which they can control and monitor INTERBUS S The function blocks are subdivided into passive and active function blocks Passive blocks receive messages from the controller board or indicate errors in the INTERBUS S system The active blocks are initiated by the user program and execute specific functions 35 The variety of functions and messages is described in Chapter 8 1 3 INTERBUS S System Control Page 16ff 8 4 PHCENI X 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 1 2 Inclusion of the Interface Drivers The CON IND and REQ RES function blocks are referred to as interface drivers The receive block CON IND and the send block REQ RES are called unconditionally in the program To get an optimized response with respect to time the receive block CON IND should be called at the start of the cyclic program and the send block REQ RES should be called at the end Depending on the length of the comman
253. baustein 8 10 Host output bit 8 46 I O address area 8 98 IBDB 8 10 8 14 8 15 8 19 8 52 8 56 8 71 ID code 8 74 ID code list 8 74 ID numbers 8 34 Identification codes 8 59 Identify Confirmation 8 116 Identify Request 8 113 Implement All Logical Address Map 8 30 8 35 8 36 8 37 8 63 IN address 8 40 IN address list 8 76 Indication service primitive 8 96 Indications 8 105 Information Report Request 8 112 Init Communication 8 30 8 38 Initialization 100 8 119 Initialization block 8 2 8 98 Initiate 8 126 Initiate Confirmation 8 116 Initiate Error Confirmation 8 117 Initiate Request 8 113 Initiate Request 8 121 INITIB 8 6 8 8 8 98 8 119 Input addresses 8 76 Input bit 8 46 Installation remote bus station 8 56 INTERBUS data block 8 19 8 52 8 122 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS InterBus data block 8 10 INTERBUS S Cycle Counter 8 62 InterBus S Delay 8 31 InterBus S management functions 8 1 Interface drivers 8 119 ISFP interface 8 101 L LB ERR 8 71 Length codes 8 34 8 59 Local bus 8 78 Local Bus Module Error 8 89 Local buses 8 41 Logical Address Error 8 63 Logical IN Address Map 8 36 Logical IN addresses 8 36 Logical local bus address 8 56 Logical Local Bus Address Map 8 35 logical numbers 8 75 Logical OUT Address Map 8 37 Logical OUT addresses 8 37 Manipulation of OUT words 8 44 Mask 1 8 40 Mask 2 8 40
254. bit is determined by the host output bit only output bit output bit a Bus input bit b Evaluation instruction a Reset OUT INO1 b Reset OUT IN10 Section 1 gt K 2 gt K 3 gt 5003A814 Figure 8 24 Bit manipulation 8 44 PHCENIX POUE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP The following commands are implemented Name Value hex Input signal Code1 0005 Signal change from 0 gt 1 Code2 0006 Signal change from 1 gt 0 Code3 0007 Signal change from 0 gt 1 Code4 0008 Signal change from 1 gt 0 Code5 0009 Signal change from 0 1 switched Code6 000A Signal change from 1 0 switched Bit manipulation Numbering of the bits of an address Output address Input address Bit 15 14 13 12 2 1 0 Meaning of the bits of an address Bit Meaning Values hex 0 7 Logical address 8 Address in the P area 0 Address in the Q area 1 9 11 Reserved 15 Bit number 0 F 50038 PHCENIX 8 45 CONTACT 8 ISFP THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS a Reset OUT INO1 Reset OUT IN10 instructions Structure of the Reset OUT INO1 instruction Reset OUT INO1 0005 Output address ADR Input address ADR Structure of the Reset OUT
255. bits in the PLC In the PLC every module is accessible through the controller board The host controller board displays every input and output data item word by word as the smallest unit Here the base address of the module is decisive The host controller board allows two different types of addressing The address area which the host controller board occupies is variable 2 14 PHCENIX ix CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Configuration of the controller board Physical addressing Logical addressing Automatic Controlled start start i XxX DAB mode DCB mode Address behavior to the PLC 5003A233 Figure 2 7 How to proceed to determine the mode of operation Physical addressing e he modules are addresses in their physical order e Only modules which the host controller board has recognized in the INTERBUS S system will be addressed e he address location is predetermined by the hardware setting of the board If you remove one or several modules from the configuration when the bus stands still the host controller board cannot recognize this modification when the physical addressing is used Depending on your application this case may lead to dangerous situations during the process run Logical addressing e The user allocates an address to every module e The host controller board checks whether or not the expected modules are connected
256. but PLC stop with acknowledgment delay Jumper 4 Interrupt source Jumper 5 Interrupt destination Jumper 6 Interrupt master slave Jumper 7 Interrupt identification Jumper 8 Reset button active passive Jumper 10 5003B232 Figure 2 8 Description of the DIP switches and jumpers for the DCB and DAB modes The locations of jumpers and switches is given in Chapter 2 6 1 Mounting Positions of the Jumpers PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Software requirements There are different ways to program the startup e Automatically by means of the host controller board e Controlled programming by means of the PLC function blocks or via the EEPROM card In both cases the PLC monitors the startup in order to achieve a synchronism between the PLC and the controller board The application program is kept in its startup blocks until INTERBUS S provides I O data Program packages For the PLC ISFP Version 2 2 0 InterBus S Functions for the PLC For the EEPROM card IBS S5 SWD T Version gt 1 0 IS The different programming methods are described in Chapter 5 System Interfaces 2 18 PHCENIX m CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Host controller board startup and operational performance Figure 2 9 shows the different startup modes of the host controller board PLC voltage ON Self test of the board
257. c ISFP22ST S5D 10 6 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT Tables Chapter 1 Table 1 1 Example for testing the load capacity of an installation remote bus Chapter 2 Table 2 1 Permissible slots for the S5 155U 130 WB 135 U 150 U 155 U SIMATIC PLCs Table 2 2 Lowest base addresses for windows 1 and 2 Table 2 3 Location of the communication registers Table 2 4 Address assignment in the PLC Chapter 3 Table 3 1 Meaning of the parameters of an ID code list using the example of the data block n Table 3 2 Overview of INTERBUS S stations modules Table 3 3 Overview of INTERBUS S stations slave boards BKs etc Table 3 4 Special ID codes Table 3 5 Counting direction order for the entire bus configuration Table 3 6 Example for word oriented addressing Table 3 7 Example for byte oriented addressing with even byte addresses Table 3 8 Example for byte oriented addressing with odd byte addresses Table 3 9 Temperature allocation for a measuring range of 0 600 C Table 3 10 Measuring range and encodings Chapter 4 Table 4 1 Priorities of error types Table 4 2 Error codes for controller errors Table 4 3 Address area selection Table 4 4 The seven segment display during startup 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Tables 2 10 2 30 2 31 2 35 3 11 3 14 3 14 3 14 3 38 3 40 4 7 4 8 4 27 4 28 T 1 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
258. cal bus Send All Module Error Confirmation 80EF Meaning This message is initiated by the Send All Module Error Request 005C command The list contains all bus segments in which a module reports an error The bus segments are identified with bus segment numbers oyntax send All Module Error Confirmation 80EF Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 1st bus segment address aaaa n th bus segment address aaaa Key PC Parameter count quantity of parameters in which a module reports an error aaaa Local bus address 9 56 PHCENIX DOE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Local Bus Module Error Confirmation Meaning oyntax Key 80 This message is initiated by the Send Local Bus Module Error Request 005b command It sends a list of all modules of the requested local bus which report an error to the PLC including module number and ID code Local Bus Module Error Confirmation 80EE Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 tstmodule module number 2 ID code eo 2 n 1 nth module module number 2 n ID code PC Parameter count module quantity multiplied with 2 Send Located Error Counter Confirmation Function Hemark oyntax Key 5003B 8115 This message is sent after the Send Located Error Counter Request 0109 command has been called It returns the first ten modules to which the most transmi
259. cause of the error is an electrical change of the bus configuration e g open circuit The groups in which an error was detected are automatically switched off The other parts of the bus can still be run after this message The data cycle is stopped when this standard error recovery has not been changed Define Groups Error Characteristics Request 0060 command The data traffic can be started again with the start command Table 9 4 Error numbers used Error number Error name Meaning dd01 Unexpected BK Invalid BK ID code ddo2 Unexpected IO BK Invalid BK I O ID code dd03 Local Bus Awaited Specified local bus is missing dd04 Local Bus Too Long Local bus is longer than specified dd05 Local Bus Too Short Local bus is shorter than specitied ddo6 Unexpected Local Bus Module Wrong local bus module dd07 No Remote Bus Detected Configuration could not be read in dd08 Unexpected Local Bus Local bus at wrong position dd09 Remote Bus Awaited Remote bus is shorter than expected ddOA Multiple Data Error Identification of a multiple error ddOb Configuration Too Long Configuration longer than expected ddOC Unexpected Configuration Maximum configuration exceeded Wrong length in the ID code or the data register is interrupted on the remote bus baie Defective Local Bus Wrong length in the ID code or the data register is interrupted on the lo
260. ch can be executed with the CONTROL FB68 block The functions which are activated with this block are instructions to the controller board The commands require no parameters Table 8 5 Functions of the CONTROL FB 68 function block No Function 0 Configure INTERBUS S 1 Start INTERBUS S Cycle 2 Stop INTERBUS S Cycle 3 Alarm Stop 4 Clear Display 5 Disable All Messages 6 Implement All Logical Address Map 7 Init Communication 8 INTERBUS S Delay 9 Quit Module Error All 10 Enable all Messages 11 Reserved 8 24 PHCENI X 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS SPB FB 68 5003B81 1 Figure 8 16 Structure of the FB 68 function block CONTROL Table 8 6 Parameters of the CONTROL function block FB 68 IBDB B DB INTERBUS data block No of a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW 0 DW 199 T T Timer occupied by the function FKT E BY Code of the function to be executed O After termination of the function the BUSY bit is reset BUSY E BI 1 The function is activated by setting the BUSY bit automatically by the function block 1 Timeout of the function has elapsed to A Bl TMEOUTbi the function could not be activated O The function is active O Function terminated positively 1 Function terminated negatively R
261. character string stored in the EEPROM cannot be cleared with mode 3 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 2 Controller Board Messages Chapter 9 2 describes the messages of the controller board The descriptions follow the schematic below The code is given in a hexadecimal form The letters A through F are shown as upper or lower case letters like they are displayed on the seven segment display Name of the message Code Meaning Describes the meaning of the message The syntax describes the structure of a message oyntax Name of the message The key explains the parameters which have been used for the syntax description Key Dummy Description of the parameter variable 9 40 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 2 1 Messages of the User Interface Command Disabled Confirmation 009C Meaning The previously sent command has not been enabled A description of the following messages is given in Chapter 4 No Command Code Indication 0007 Parameter Write Error Indication 0009 Controller Parameter Timeout Indication 000C Host Parameter Timeout Indication 000d Command Parameter Error 004b 35 These messages are displayed with a CTRL error on the front plate and entered in the diagnostic registers 9 2 2 Messages for Bus Operation Start Bus Confirmation 0088 Meaning The d
262. cial ID code entries In the example ID 16 Diagnostic bit register ID 17 Diagnostic parameter register Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY LC ID 1st module DW y 2 KY LC ID 2nd module DW y n 2 KY LC ID nth module DW y n 1 KY 000 SID Special ID code DW y n KY 000 SID Special ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n LC Length code of the module ID Identification code of the module SID Special ID code To be taken from the module description of the manufacturer Permitted codes ID 16 Diagnostic bit register 17 Diagnostic parameter register 18 Bit controlled command register 19 Bit manipulation register DB10 Do KY 000 015 Parameter count KY 000 052 LBS 24 BK T 24 KY 001 230 IBS 24 DI 3 KY 004 065 IBS AO 1 As KY Q01 129 IBS 24 DO 5 KY 004 066 IBS PT 100 A 2 6 KY 001 007 IBS IP DIO 1 24 T KY 000 012 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 8 KY 129 010 IBS IP CDI 1 24 E 9 KY 129 009 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 10 KY 129 010 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 11 KY 001 011 IBS 24 BK I O T Lar KY 002 147 IBS 24 DI 32 133 KY 004 071 IBS AI 3 143 KY 001 207 TBS AI 3 16 Loy KY 000 010 Diagnostic bit register Los KY 000 017 Diagnostic parameter regist 17 6 46 PH NIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB11 Bus segment list The bus segment list
263. cified 9 64 PHCENIX TE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 2 8 Messages for Event Processing Quit Enable Event Number Confirmation 00dA Meaning The event definition was enabled with the Enable Event Number Request 002b command oyntax Enable Event Number Request 00dA Quit Disable Number Confirmation 00 Meaning The event definition was disabled with the Disable Event Number Request 002C command oyntax Disable Event Number Request 00 Quit Enable All Events Confirmation 00dC Meaning All existing event definitions are enabled with the Enable All Events Request 002d command oyntax Quit Enable All Events Confirmation 00dC Quit Disable All Events Confirmation 00dd Meaning All existing event definitions were disabled with the Disable All Events Request 002E command oyntax Quit Disable All Events Confirmation 00 Event Error Confirmation 004C Meaning Error during the event definition There are invalid event definitions old definitions have been deleted oyntax Event Error Confirmation 004C 5003B PHCENIX ius CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 2 9 Messages for Communication Read KBL Loc Confirmation 811B Meaning Negative positive acknowledgment of the Read KBL Loc Request 0112 command Remark Depending on the entry of the KR paramet
264. cified time Table 8 10 Functions of the SYSINFO function block FB 70 No Function 0 Physical Configuration mas 1 Software Revision 2 Switch information 3 NTERBUSSOydeGowter 4 iogeaAddessEmor SPB FB 70 5003B815 Figure 8 25 Structure of the SYSINFO function block FB 70 5003B PHCENIX 8 53 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Table 8 9 Parameters of the SYSINFO function block FB 70 IBDB B DB INTERBUS data block No of a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW O DW 199 T T T Timer occupied by the function FKT E BY Function no DB E BY Pointer to the data block 0 255 in which the parameters of the function are to be stored DW E BY Pointer to the data word 0 254 in which the first parameter is to 1 The function is activated by setting BUSY bit O After termination of the function the function block automatically resets the BUSY bit TO A Bl TIMEOUT bit BUSY E BI BUSY bit 1 The timeout of the function has elapsed The function could not be activated 0 The function was activated RET A Bl RETURN bit of the function O Function terminated positively 1 Function terminated negatively SPB FB 70 NAME SYSINFO IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block T T Z Occupied timer DB 3 MB 16 Pointer to the data block of the message
265. ck KBL entries 2 1 e Invalid LLI PDU in the connection establishment or abort po pase 2 2 e Connection at the remote partner still established 50038 PHCENIX 8 113 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Table 8 18 Error messages for a connection abort cont d AbortID RC Explanation 2 3 Systemeror SY 2 v Systememor O 2 1 5 e Systememr O 2 8 e System error 2 d s e y O 2 10 e imer 3 connection monitoring has elapsed Remedy Cf Timeout error during connection monitoring 2 1 seRCi0 2e d ee Ee LN Ea 15 __ 26 2 17 e Sysememor 2 18 e Systememor 2 19 2 20 e Conflict during connection establishment Two PCP stations have attempted to establish the mutual connection absolutely simultaneously In this case the controller always wins A4 Aheerrorcanonlyoccurina PCP module e a 2 22 e System error I2 daz ee 3 2 RR Remote Resources Layer 2 e Layer 2 of the remote PCP station is not active The addressed station does not respond 3 17 NA No Acknowledge Remote device exists but does not respond 3 18 DS Disconnect e Layers 2 are unsuccessfully attempting to synchronize e A multiple CRC error occurred Remedy Repeat the ser
266. ck execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 5003B OB 20 21 22 SPA FB210 EM INITIB SPA FB 60 u rat 5003B804 Figure 8 4 Call without a driver PHCENIX CONTACT 8 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Table 8 1 Parameter description of the INITIB function block FB61 or FB60 IBDB B DB INTERBUS data block No of a data block DB 2 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW 0 DW 199 Start address of window 3 Setting of switch 5 AV KF startup behavior cf Table Startup behavior below RRST B DB otandard DB for Request Response PCP CIST B DB otandard DB for Confirmation Indication PCP RRMW KF Request Response activation word PCP CIMW KF Confirmation Indication signal word PCP CIFB B FB Numberofthe CIH auxiliary block T PT Timer occupied by the function TO A BI TIMEOUT bit 1 Timeout of the function has elapsed error at the communication interface 0 No transmission error RET A BI Return value of the function 0 Function terminated positively without errors 1 Function terminated negatively AV Start mode Startup behavior e g error messages which are evaluated by the message blocks 0 Automatic start The controller board does not transfer messages to the PLC cf Figure 8 4 1 Controlled start The contro
267. control via memory card and additional PCP communication FB 210 a Short description of logical addressing during startup with EEPROM and PCP The start sequence bit 0 on the EEPROM card initiates the logical addressing of the INTERBUS S system after power up or reset The following functions retains the PLC in its startup blocks until the controller board is in the RUN state To this end an initialization block INITIB is called IS When the PLC is put into operation with STOP RUN the boot sequence must be initiated and evaluated through the PLC oee also Figure 6 7 In this example digital and analog I O modules are addressed The EEPROM card transfers the logical address lists to the bus control where they are checked The address lists are projected by means of the IBS SYS SWT program Vo Name Module Bus segment Group Input Output PD ID Level0 1 No No be Adr De ld length et et 1 BkT o s o 21 o 0 0 0 0 0 2 D 33 o o o o 20 o 0 0 3 AO 4 6 o o o o 0 o 132 0 4 2400 1 1229 o o o o 0 o 32 0 5 0710 4 6 o o o o 140 o o 0 e DO 1 7 0 H o o 28 o z o 7 k o 2 o z o o 0 0 0 0 8 D 19 1 z o o 30 o o o 9 Do 129 9 1 24 o o ol o 29 0 1 DI 129 to 1 255 o o 31 0 0 0 1 Bko 1 1 o 12 o o 4 o 46 o i
268. count 0 0 Deleting the old list C CODE instruction 1 BIT ADR Output bit BIT ADR Input bit C CODE instruction 2 BIT ADR Output bit BIT ADR Input bit BIT ADR Input bit n Parameter count C CODE for the edge 5 or 6 BIT IN or OUT bit ADR IN or OUT word address 8 48 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Handling the instructions Influences on the programmed instructions The transferred lists are canceled by all commands and errors that influence addressing of the IN or OUT addresses This can be avoided if all commands that influence logical addressing and transfer of the command lists are executed before INTERBUS S is started If commands are used to switch groups on or off the application program running on the host must take this into account Behavior in the event of disconnected groups If parts of the bus are switched off by the program by a command or by an error during operation it may occur that the IN or OUT addresses specified in the instruction lists are no longer available If this case should occur the corresponding instructions will no longer be executed No special message is sent to the PLC 35 If an error is detected in a list this is indicated from data word 68 DW 68 of the INTERBUS S data blocks IBDB Error description DW 68 KH MMMM Message code 69 KY 000 002 Parameter count 70 KY 000 00X Error no 7
269. ction RB ERR The RESET must only be performed when the PLC is in the STOP state A 5003B While the controller board is running through its self test no up to date inputs are read and no up to date outputs are set In the controlled start mode the bus cycle is not re started no RUN All parameter settings are lost log addressing event definitions PHCENIX n CONTACT 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Local bus error 0 1 3 4 n 8 0 CO 9 1 10 20 1130 12 40 13 50 14 60 15 70 5003A417 4 18 EAE L READYG amp CTRLO BASP O RB RUN LB BSA MODO MODE ADDRESS BYTE n 1 0 0 OO 14 0 2 20 3 30 4140 5 50 6 60 7 170 N THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS INTERBUS S operation was disturbed and the XX RUN bus was stopped All outputs were reset The display indicates the number or the defective local bus Possible causes e Defective module e Defective connection between the modules Help for remedy LEDs at the modules e HAND HELD MONITOR HHM e PC monitor program Acknowledgment a Via the addressing block addressing the system from the PLC b Via the EEPROM card with the start sequence for addressing c Automatic start power up reset Figure 4 11 Local bus errors A RESET must only be performed when the PLC is in the STOP state While the PLC is running through its self test
270. ctions 2 18 Segment 1 12 Selection of the address area 2 5 Self test 2 6 display after the 4 13 Send block 5 6 5 8 8 2 8 86 Serial interface RS 232 5 3 Serial interface 2 7 5 2 5 16 7 6 Server 8 84 Service 8 118 execution 8 90 message flag 8 92 primitive 8 90 l 6 request 8 112 structure 8 89 oervice specific error messages 8 116 Settings for board identification 2 37 Settings for central controller and controller expansion unit 2 20 2 21 2 24 2 25 oeven segment display 2 6 2 7 Signal changes 8 41 Signal states up to date 4 5 4 29 oignaling behavior of the host controller board 2 15 oignaling block 5 7 SIMATIC S5 8 86 Slave PLC 3 37 Slot allocation 2 9 Slots 2 9 Software interfaces 3 1 requirements 2 16 revision 8 55 runtime 1 6 Standard data block 8 94 8 95 Standard function blocks 5 3 Start automatic 3 1 4 24 4 29 behavior 4 29 confirmation 8 103 8 109 controlled 3 1 4 25 4 29 INTERBUS S Cycle 8 26 request 8 100 Startup 8 110 and operating mode selection 2 21 behavior 6 3 organization blocks 3 12 performance 2 16 2 22 with physical addressing 6 1 Status Confirmation 8 103 Status display 4 27 Status Request 8 101 Stop Confirmation 8 103 8 109 Stop INTERBUS S Cycle 8 26 Stop Request 8 100 STOP state 2 6 2 7 Supply voltage failure of the 1 18 Switch Information 8 56 Switch SW6 2 21 Synchronization 8 86 SYSEHRROR 8 22 8 74 8
271. d D Condition Indication 0051 Invalid EC State Indication 0057 Invalid EC Status Indication 0058 BK Alarm Failed 005A Too Many K Modules Indication 0065 35 These messages are indicated as a CTRL error on the front plate and entered in the diagnostic registers Quit Set BK Alarm Logical Confirmation 00Cb Meaning The Set BK Alarm Logical Request 0024 was executed Quit Reset BK Alarm Logical Confirmation 00CC Meaning The Reset BK Alarm Logical Request code 0025 command was executed 5003B PHCENIX 9 49 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Quit Reset BK Alarm Physical Confirmation OOCE Meaning The Reset BK Alarm Physical Request 0027 command was executed Quit Clear Display Confirmation 00E2 Meaning The command Clear Display Request 004E command was executed No Map Entry Confirmation OOEd Meaning This message is sent when there are no entries for command which have to send a list or table in any form Quit Module Error OK Confirmation OOFE Meaning This message is the positive acknowledgment of the commands Quit Module Error Request 0064 and Quit Module Error All Request 0065 Quit Module Error Not Possible Confirmation 80FF Meaning This message is the negative acknowledgment of the commands Quit Module Error Request 0064 and Quit Module Error All Request 0065 Syntax Quit Module Error Not Possible 80FF Confirmation Quantit
272. d ISFP and RS 232 With these interfaces you may exploit the intelligence of the controller board Besides logical addressing bus commands Stop INTERBUS S Start INTERBUS S event handling and extensive diagnostic possibilities there is also a PCP communication interface available Modules which are capable of communications counter V 24 parameterization of the frequency inverters can be operated via this interface PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 5 1 1 Interface Function Commands and messages can be exchanged between the host controller board and the PLC An application oriented programming interface ensures simple operation The INTERBUS S System Functions for the PLC abbreviated ISFP below interface represents an INTERBUS S operating system for the user The ISFP interface allows to trigger and execute complex functions e g logical addressing by means of a signal edge Besides this interface which allows a parameterization by means of the PLC the user can directly influence the controller board s functions via a serial interface This can be done with a RS 232 connection to the PC or to a programming unit A monitor software allows to send commands similar to ISFP to the controller board Messages are received and processed in a way that is suitable for the screen In addition programming sequences such as logical addressing or clearing of the diagnost
273. d Physical Configuration Request 005E Function The command reads out the bus configuration which has been stored as valid configuration on the controller board in the form of ID codes and length codes Prerequisite If the up to date bus configuration is to be read out the following commands must be executed before the Send Physical Configuration Request command is called Configure Bus Request command code 0023 Warmstart Request command code 004c If the initial bus configuration is to be read out the Check Physical Configuration Request must be executed before the Send Physical Configuration Request command is called Messages Positive acknowledgment Meaning Negative acknowledgment Meaning 9 10 oend Physical Configuration Confirmation 80F4 The acknowledgment transmits the physical bus configuration including the number of registers which are used for the process data bus register No Executable Configuration Confirmation 004A No bus system was connected during hardware Startup PHCENIX E CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Check Physical Configuration Request 0058 Function The command transmits the bus configuration which is demanded for operation in the form of ID codes and length codes The requested bus configuration is first compared with the connected bus configuration and if possible stored as initial configuration
274. d end address of the output data is transferred with the ADR parameter and must be specified in words even numbered The return bit indicates whether the function block has been executed error free FB 80 is called at the beginning of the cycle Call of the GETINDB function block FB 80 SPB FB 80 NAME GETINDB IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block EXT KF 1 Selection of the extended area ADR KY 0 128 Start and end address of the data to be read DBDW KY 10 000 Number of the destination DB and data block RET MO 2 Return bit Table 8 20 Parameters of the GETINDB function block FB 80 Number of an InterBus data block DB 0 255 The data block is to be set up by you EXT BY Specifies the area to be read 1 extended area 1 2 extended area 2 ADR Start and end address of the data to be read even values only DBDW DB Number of the destination DB and data word 2 bytes in one data word RET Return bit 0 1 Function executed without with errors Error causes Start address higher than end address Data area in the DB is insufficient for the amount of data to be read Structure of the data block for the selected extended area E g DWx data n data n 1 DW x 1 data n 2 data n 3 DW x 126 data n 252 data n 253 DW x 127 data n 254 data n 255 n first byte of the even start address of the data to be read see ADR parameter 18 PHCENIX 5003BC04 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUT
275. d or message number of words the blocks may also be active for several cycles The blocks are not accessible to the user They are addressed exclusively by the standard function blocks 35 The function blocks CON IND and REQ RES must always be called unconditionally The CON IND block has an auxiliary block CIH which must exist in the PLC OB 1 Heceive SPA FB 62 CON IND block Function block Send SPA FB 66 mE REQ RES block 5003B802 Figure 8 2 Inclusion of the interface drivers 5003B PHCENIX 8 5 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 1 2 1 INITIB FB 60 The INITIB FB 60 initialization block is called during initialization of the PLC OB 20 22 This function block realizes some basic software settings for the following blocks It also ensures a synchronization between the PLC and INTERBUS S The routine is not terminated until INTERBUS S is in the READY state or the bus has been activated The controller board allows the following three modes of operation e automatic start e controlled start e controlled start with EEPROM In the automatic start mode the INITIB function performs the synchronization between the PLC and INTERBUS S The bus system is started automatically The controller board reports READY and RUN In the controlled start mode the INITIB function monitors the controller board in the initialization phase If the board reports READY the IBDB data
276. d start DAB mode In this mode of operation the host controller board puts the addresses of the INTERBUS S modules automatically and or by means of logical addressing into the specified address windows after the voltage has been switched on In the controlled start mode the registers e g diagnostic registers must be addressed in the address windows Besides the setting of the I O addresses of the INTERBUS S system a register window 3 is put in the I O area of the PLC Via these registers INTERBUS S is controlled and synchronized with the PLC The input word 0 of the PLC is an alarm message word PHCENIX CONTACT 2 Technical Description THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 6 3 2 Address Locations for Automatic Start in the DCB Mode Inputs QW 254 QW 0 Outputs PW 254 Base address Length Window2 Base address PW 128 PW 126 Length Window1 Base address BH PW 0 Communication registers InterBus S address area for analog modules Diagnostic parameter register InterBus S address area for digital modules Diagnostic bit register Alarm messages Figure 2 18 Address locations for automatic start in the DCB mode 2 28 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 6 3 3 Address Locations for Controlled Start in the DCB Mode Inputs Outputs QW 254 QW 0 PW 254 z l
277. d the possibility for PCP communication when the bus is controlled with function blocks or the EEPROM memory card The lines include the name of the example this name also marks the page belonging to it a distinctive number which stands for the necessary set of hardware components 1 IBS S5 DCB ISFP user manual 2 IBS S5 DCB ISFP SYS SWT EEPROM programming cable user manual Table 6 2 Overview of the programming examples for different system starts and control and operating modes Automatic start with Example Page DCBPHY 6 8 Hardware setting physical addressing Hardware 1 Page 6 8 Controlled start with Control via function Control via memory Hardware settings logical addressing for blocks ISFP card EEPROM I O modules System start during Example Page Example Page Page 6 11 startup DCBADR 6 12 DCBEEP 6 22 Hardware 1 Hardware 2 oystem start in the Example Page Example Page Page 6 11 PLC cycle DCBZYK 6 26 DCBEEP 6 22 Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Additionally with PCP Example Page Example Page Page 6 11 communication DCBCP 6 40 DCBECP 6 54 Hardware 1 Hardware 2 6 8 PHGNIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
278. date signal states There must be no access to the bus addresses concerned The RB ERR LED indicates additional group error messages messages E1 E2 E4 E5 E6 The following table lists the possible error causes a 5003B PHCENIX dro CONTACT 4 Diagnostic Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 7 segment Meaning Error cause Remedy display on the front panel FW state 3 5 E 1 After the error has Cabling error Check remote and occurred no error was shielding error local bus cabling detected when the Check voltage configuration was supply acquired and compared Tool IBS SYS E2 The maximum possible The number of Check the configuration has been stations or the addressing lists and exceeded register locations is the configuration too large Observe max 320 stations and max 256 register words E4 The configuration could The station does not Check voltage hot be detected respond for failures E5 All groups have been Error in the Check application switched off application program program E6 No error has been Module error Tool IBS SYS detected when the SWT configuration was acquired and compared Please inform the technical support at but no data cycle is Phoenix Contact possible Information about IBS SYS SWT The IBS SYS SWT program package offers a comprehensive diagnostic environment For the error detection it uses
279. de list The ID code address list includes the physical bus configuration The configuration is described with the help of the ID numbers of the modules and their length codes The modules are counted beginning from the controller board and through the entire bus configuration The list is completed with the entry of the special ID codes In the example ID 16 Diagnostic bit register ID 17 Diagnostic parameter register Structure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY LC ID 1st module DW y 2 KY LC ID 2nd module DW y n 2 KY LC ID nth module DW y n 1 KY 000 SID Special ID code DW y n kY 000 SID Special ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n LC Length code of the module ID Identification code of the module SID Special ID code To be taken from the module description of the manufacturer Permitted codes ID 16 Diagnostic bit register 17 Diagnostic parameter register 18 Bit controlled command register 19 Bit manipulation register DB10 0 KY 000 015 Parameter count Rr UOUIUOZ2s IBS 24 BK T Ze KY 001 130 IBS 24 DI 23 KY e 004 065 IBS AO 1 4 Ky 001 127 IBS 24 DO Ds KY 004 066 IBS PT 100 A 2 6 KY 001 007 IBS IP DIO 1 24 T Rx DOO DIL IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 8 KY 129 010 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F oe KY 1290093 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 103 KY 129 010 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 11 KY 001 011 IBS 24 BK I O T IA KY 002 142 IBS 24 DI 32 1 94
280. detail e Transferring the INTERBUS S commands to the INTERBUS S controller board e Receiving the INTERBUS S messages from the INTERBUS S controller board e listing the received messages and the transferred commands e Storing the INTERBUS S commands and transferring the stored commands to the controller board e Programming the controller board s EEPROM 7 10 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT Chapter 8 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ISFP INTERBUS S System Functions for the PLC This chapter provides information on the software interface for INTERBUS S system control via the PLC the PCP services command and message functions the use of communications PCP services for INTERBUS S control the error messages 8 EP TT TT TO er 8 1 Interface Description 9 4 LAT 8 1 1 Program Structure a 8 1 2 Inclusion of the Interface Drivers 8 1 2 1 4 sueneesenies 8 1 2 2 Seuip A m 8 1 2 3 gO sao ee eee Woo mene 8 1 2 4 INTERBUS Data Block 8 8 1 3 INTERBUS S System 30 100 8 1 3 1 Structure of the Functions
281. ds in the service body 2 parameters plus the communication reference The number of the communication reference KR between the controller board and the INTERBUS S counter module will be 2 in this example Therefore 2 is entered as KH The service body of the Read Request primitive consists of the index and the subindex by means of which the counter s statuses can be recalled The request is sent from the PLC to the IBS counter module with the parameters described above The PLC receives 10 parameters as confirmation It consists of the code of the service primitive the parameter count PC and the communication reference The service body consists of 7 parameters The statuses of the 5 counter registers are preceded by the index the subindex and the length The length specifies the number of bytes read In this example the number is 10 because each value of a counter register is communicated in 2 bytes READ REQUEST CONFIRMATION ze CODE KH KY 000 003 KY 000 002 KH PC Code KR KY 000 007 Index KY 000 002 KY 000 000 Subindex KY 000 010 PC PLC CPU IBS DCB controller board KR Result Length Byte Reg Counter 1 Reg Counter 2 Reg Counter 3 Reg Counter 4 Reg Counter 5 Object dictionary for the counter
282. dware Not every module is capable of processing all commands The parameters belonging to the command differ The commands are sent to the controller board by means of the REQ RES function block The controller board then receives the expected message by means of the CON IND function block The structure of the commands and messages have been described in the previous chapters Refer to the module descriptions for details of the individual commands parameters 8 110 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Sequence diagram A station is addressed once and afterwards cyclically processed example e g IBS AI 3 16 Parameterization is done first followed by the reading out of the analog inputs 0 1 Connection Parameterize monitoring 2 the stations e g WRITE Ea n Cyclic processing N 1 e g READ 5003A835 3 After a communication abort the controller board needs some time 30 ms to clear the communication layers and to synchronize itself with the station When fast CPUs or short cycle times are used a wait loop should be run through The length of the wait loop depends on the PLC cycle time If the waiting time is to short the controller board always responds with an ABORT to a connection establishment only until a synchronization took place SUBE PHCENIX 8 111 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Example Addressing a communication mod
283. dware error Controller error Off RESET The IPMS protocol chip has detected an external error or the INTERBUS S cycle has been terminated by an external signal Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again IPMS FIFO Error 003C Error type Hardware error Error LED Controller error in the event of multiple errors IB data cycle On Off in the event of multiple errors IB reset Only in the event of multiple errors Further error Cause The IPMS protocol chip has detected a FIFO overflow error Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact T Perform a RESET before using the controller board again IPMS Undefined Error 003d Error type Hardware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause The IPMS protocol chip has sent an undefined error Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again 5003B PHCENIX 4 43 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces A 4 44 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Invalid DCF Condition Error 003E Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Remedy A Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again Invalid DCF State Error
284. dy been programmed restore the initial configuration write or read out character strings of up to 100 characters into the EEPROM Prerequisite The bus must be in the STOP state while this service is executed as no other processes are supported during the programming and thus no bus cycles are run Remark The command syntax varies depending on the desired function Syntax EEPROM Management Request Parameter block length Mode O Bit number _ String 9 38 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Parameter description Mode Bit number otring Hemark 5003B This parameter controls the programming Possible modes are 1 Start programming 2 End programming 3 Delete programmed service request sequences 4 Establish default state 5 Write character string 6 Read out character string This parameter is only relevant for mode 1 It indicates with which bit number the service sequence to be programmed can be activated Value range 0 15 In the service request primitive this parameter is only relevant for mode 5 It includes the character string to be written with the maximum length of 100 Characters which are not used are filled up internally with zeros In the service confirmation primitive this parameter is only relevant for mode 6 It includes the read out character string of the maximum length of 100 The
285. e The SYSERROR function block FB73 Parameter Function IBDB DB NooftelBDaaBlck CON Bl CowolerEmr BUS X B Bus Error INTERBUS S in STOP state MOD Bi Module Error INTERBUS S in RUNstat FB74 No Function 0 Controller Error Code 1 Bus Information 2 Defect Group 3 Module Error 4 Local Bus Module Error 8 22 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP The RECONFIG function block FB75 Parameter Function IBDB DB No of the IB Data Block RECO BI HEC triggered POSS BI Heconfig not possible possible GR BY Goup 2 B BY JjloclBus SS y O The EVENT function block FB76 Parameter Function IBDB DB No of the IB Data Block EV B Evet EVKN_ wW Event Identifier 50038 PHCENIX 8 23 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 Command Functions 35 Definition Command functions are control functions which allow the user to specifically influence the bus system 8 2 1 CONTROL FB 68 The user can activate this function with the BUSY bit After the CONTROL function FB 68 has been terminated without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 In the event of an error the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 Table 8 5 shows the functions whi
286. e e re configuration e switching groups off e error recovery e re addressing e clearing of the display e starting e stopping etc Besides the system services the PCP Peripherals Communication Protocol services also use the communication registers as an interface to the controller board This is the reason why the use of the PCP services is integrated into the interface 5003B PHCENIX 8 1 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 1 1 Program Structure An interface which includes extensive functions is represented by software which consists of different components To avoid longer scan times the INTERBUS S System Functions for the PLC ISFP have been tailored specifically to the respective PLC and optimized and structured from the point of view of the program Operation of the ISFP interface by setting individual bits is kept simple to reduce the programming effort on the part of the user The interface consists of three types of function blocks e Initialization block e Receive send blocks interface drivers e Function blocks These blocks are available as standard function blocks and have to be ordered in addition to the respective controller board Besides an initialization block which is only called when the PLC is started there are two function blocks which are addressed continuously These are the receive and the send block which establish the link between the PLC ISFP inter
287. e Group Error Characteristics function communicates the list of the groups to the controller board the failure of which is to lead to the automatic restart of the bus The controller board only takes over the list after a test If this function was executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 2 0 If an error occurred during function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The input bit is set TO 1 if the Group Error Characteristics function could not be activated within the specified time Sequence An error occurs The outputs are set to ZERO Auto matic Yes No restart permitted STOP state automatically by the controller board Bus is in the RUN state 5003A833 8 50 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Parameter meanings E ow n m 0 KY 000 OOK m 1 KY XXX OYY Group no 0 255 m 2 KY XXX OYY Group no 0 255 m 3 KY XXX OYY Group no 0 255 m 4 KY XXX OYY Group no 0 255 m k 1 KY XXX OYY Group no 0 255 m k KY XXX OYY Group no 0 255 n No of the data block DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the data word DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of parameters XXX 0 Stop 128 automatic restart YY Group number Errors in the instruction list
288. e o 60 6 24 PH NIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup After the system has been started and the messages from the controller board to the PLC have been disabled the startup block is exited In the cyclic program the application can then access the defined module addresses Application register With the register for bit controlled commands the program sequences stored in the EEPROM are initiated Register allocation OW Activation bit The sequence 0 15 is initiated IW BUSY bit A set busy bit indicates a tested sequence or one which has just been processed IW RETurn bit Value 0 Sequence processed without errors Value 1 Sequence processed with errors Diagnostics The function of the system can be monitored by means of the diagnostic registers diagnostic bit parameter registers The diagnostic registers have to be defined by means of logical addressing If diagnostics through function blocks is requested the messages have to be enabled In order to get the message the CON IND driver block must be linked to the OB1 and a valid data block must be entered in the IBDB parameter b Program structure of the example c Schematized program example otartup block FB 210 OB 20 21 22 UN M 8 0 8 M 8 0 SPA FB 210 FB 210 SEE SPB FB 60 FB 60 and start supplement on next page LOOP U M 8 0 SPB FB60 INITIB FEN3 5003B614 EE
289. e PLC This interface is described in Chapter 8 Besides the I O interface which is implemented by means of a Dual Port RAM and to which the user has direct access communication registers have been implemented on the controller board for the INTERBUS S command message interface The hardware of the interface comprises 4 word registers window 3 which are located in the I O area of the PLC A protocol has been defined for communication between the PLC and the PLC and the INTERBUS S controller board These are commands which the PLC sends to the host controller board and error codes or messages which are received by the PLC A command and or message consists of a 16 bit code which can be followed by several word parameters PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 5 3 1 1 Program Structure In order to avoid larger cycle times the INTERBUS S system functions for the PLC ISFP are specifically tailored to the respective PLC and the program has been optimized and structured Operation of the ISFP interface by setting single bits was kept simple to reduce the programming expense for the user The interface consists of three types of function blocks The blocks are available as standard function blocks Block types Initialization block Receive send blocks interface driver e Function blocks Apart from an initialization block which must only be called during the PLC s start
290. e error management on the controller board has been addressed with an unknown error code Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact Controller Parameter Timeout 000C Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Causes Hemedies 4 38 The error message Is triggered when e the PLC has not enabled the message communication handshake for the controller board within the preset time 5 sec e the controller board has sent one further message to the host although the last pending message has not yet been fetched Check whether the CON IND message driver is called in the cycle The application program can disable messages CONTROL function block function 5 DISABLE ALL MESSAGES command The error message is written regardless of the handshake If this error message interrupts receipt of another message the message which has already been partly received is no longer valid because it is overwritten by the error message PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Host Parameter Timeout Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Cause Hemedy Bus Error Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error Cause Remedy 5003B User error Controller error On 000d The host controller board is still expecting
291. eceive and send block are activated from the application program by means of flag bits 8 86 PHCENIX POUE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS OB 22 OB 21 FB 60 B2 UN M 10 0 S M 10 0 OB 1 SPA FB 62 SPB FB 72 SPA FB 60 fon Initialization block Receive block Block for IB addressing IB start PCP initialization Application Send block 5003A825 Figure 8 42 Structure of PCP communication 8 4 1 3 Initialization Addressing Prerequisites for using communication e he controller board is in the controlled start mode because the communication registers are activated in this mode Cf FB60 INITIB e Initialization of the standard DBs and the activation words e Inclusion of the interface drivers Cf Chapter 8 1 2 e Definition of the communication references Cf FB69 FKT4 Communication Reference 50038 PHCENIX CONTACT 8 87 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Initialization With the communication registers activated the controller board is initialized during startup of the PLC Besides defining the IBDB INTERBUS data block this initialization also defines two further blocks and two flag words Data blocks RRST Request Response The service request or response is standard data block entered in this data block CIST Confirmation Indication The service confirmation or indication
292. ecomes important when the application dynamically changes the bus system and therefore enlarges and or reduces the address area which the IBS modules represent SW6 OFF Mode of operation 3 m Automatic controlled 2 m DAB DCB mode 1 HM Reserved 5003A208 Figure 6 4 Setting of the operating modes DCB or DAB Free addressing DCB mode In this mode of operation all addresses which are occupied by INTERBUS S I O modules and registers will be acknowledged to the PLC in the cyclic part a Automatic start Starting at the base addresses of the windows 1 and 2 all modules are addressed and acknowledged The length specification depends on the space requirement of the modules The setting of the window area refers to the I O area of the PLC The diagnostic registers are located below the base addresses The set window lengths must not be shorter than the address area of the modules If the length specification of the windows is larger than the space requirement of the modules the unassigned addresses will not be acknowledged b Controlled start All module and register addresses e g diagnostic registers are defined by means of logical addressing Only the defined addresses will be acknowledged to the PLC smallest unit 1 word an even base address is permitted Addressing with fixed area DAB mode In this mode of operation all addresses are acknowledged which were defined with the window settings before a
293. ed address lies outside of the valid area 5 Object Attribute Inconsistent Cause The specified object attributes are inconsistent 6 Object Access Unsupported Cause The object has not been defined for the intended access 7 Object Non Existent Cause The object does not exist 8 Type Conflict Cause Access Is rejected owing to an invalid data type 9 Names Access Unsupported Cause Access with a name is not supported 0 Other ped The error cannot be assigned to an error code The documentation of PCP station from third party manufacturers or profile documentation contains detailed error descriptions on the returned values of the negative confirmations e g DRIVECOM profile etc 50038 PHCENIX 8 119 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Error class 7 OV error Changes to the object dictionary involve errors Table 8 28 Service specific error messages error class 7 OV error Error code Explanation 1 Name Length Overflow Cause The permissible name length is exceeded 2 OV Overflow Cause The permissible object dictionary length has been exceeded 3 OV Write Protected Cause The object dictionary is write protected 4 Extension Length Overflow Cause The permissible extension length is exceeded 5 Object Description Length Overflow Cause The permissible length of one single object description has been exceeded
294. ejection mechanism and can only be replaced when the board is not plugged in N Live insertion or removal of the controller board causes damage Slots Installation options of the DCB in SIMATIC PLCs of types S5 155U 150 U 135 U 130 WB and 115 U 2 10 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Table 2 1 Permissible slots for the S5 155U 130 WB 135 U 150 U 155 U SIMATIC PLCs S5 150U S5 155U Mode 5 155U Mode Slot designation 297889 So N 8 8 3 88 5 150U Slot Software Mao ool uoo designation used ol EIRIN S Sin Sas SS SS e 332 Interrupt G5 135U processing ISFP Software Slot designation zgegrmnus sSame Ye 5 130WB Slot designation Ru Aa u o CR 700 0 LA12 rack 5 115U CR 700 0 LB 11 rack CR 700 1 LA 12 rack CR 700 2 LA 12 rack CR 700 3 LA12 rack Installation possible Installation possible if bridge BR7 at the back of the rack is installed see Siemen
295. ences the scan time Table 3 4 Special ID codes iani ID code Length IN AR OUT AR decimal hex code bytes bytes Diagnostic bit register 16 10h 0 2 Diagnostic parameter register 17 11h 0 2 Bit controlled command register 18 12h 0 4 2 Bit manipulation register 19 13h 0 2 opecial ID code for word 21 15h 0 2 2 reservation in the MPM 3 6 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces The special ID codes are appended to the ID code list The ID codes for the bit manipulation registers can be assigned several times a With the help of the special ID codes 0015h an output and input word is reserved in the MPM The contents of the output word output on the yellow LEDs by means of the coding switch position 93xx The value xx decimal value range 0 99 is written into the input word When the configuration is input the special ID code is appended to the actual configuration by means of the Check Physical Configuration 0058h service It must occur only once in the configuration You may use the logical addressing to place the two words at any address in the MPM a INTERBUS S devices from third party manufacturers Apart from this module overview the INTERBUS S User Groups DRIVECOM ENCOM and other manufacturers of INTERBUS S compatible devices offer a wide range of remote and local bus stations A descri
296. ent Send Software Revision V24 Confirmation 8089 syntax send Software Revision V24 Request 0009 Send Switch Information Request 0050 Function The command reads the values of the switches which are needed for the address setting Messages Positive acknowledgment Switch Information Confirmation 80E5 Meaning The result is given with this message see Chapter 9 2 9 24 PHCENIX E CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 5 Commands for Addressing Receive Local Bus Code Map Request 0069 Function This command transmits the bus segment addresses BS address with the associated installation depth to the controller board Enter the local bus addresses in the parameter list by keeping the physical order of the modules on the bus One parameter always corresponds to one module Parameters are only entered where there are modules with bus terminal functionality Thus the quantity of the parameters to be transmitted equals the quantity of modules on the bus Prerequisite None Messages Positive acknowledgment Receive Local Bus Code Map Confirmation 0105 35 The information is not valid until its has been checked with the Implement All Logical Address Maps Request 0040 command oyntax Receive Local Bus Code Map Request 0069 Quantity of subsequent words In 1 Local bus code xOxx _ _ n Local bus code XOxx Key xOxx Bit 15 12 1
297. ent definitions old definitions have been deleted syntax Enable Event Number Request 002b Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Event identifier Disable Event Number Request 002C Function The command disables a certain event definition Prerequisite The corresponding event definition must exist and be valid Receive Events Request 002A command Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Disable Event Number Confirmation 00 Meaning The event definition is disabled Negative acknowledgment Event Error Confirmation 004C Meaning Error during the event definition Remark There are invalid event definitions old definitions have been deleted syntax Disable Event Number Request 002c Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Event identifier 9 36 PHCENIX E CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Enable All Event Request 002d Function This command enables all previously defined event definitions Prerequisite The corresponding event definitions must exist and be valid Receive Events Request 002A command Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Enable All Events Confirmation 0010 Meaning All existing event definitions are enabled Negative acknowledgment Event Error Confirmation 004C Meaning Error during the event definition Remark There are invalid event definitions old definitions have been deleted syntax Enable All Even
298. ent delay Enable left disable right IRQ1 disable left enable right SRQ disable left enable right IRQ3 disable left enable right J404 OO IRA jg 8 IRB oo C IRC SW6 ON IRD 3 gt J10 m RESET enable installed 1 Heset disable removed Revision A The default state must be kept 5003BA02 There must be no modifications Figure 10 2 Revision A of the DCB controller board 10 2 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 10 Appendix J1 IC025 Jo JS J7 SS SESS J8 J4 J6 N OE paar sp ES e 2 1 2 OO C D OO O O The default state must be kept There must be no modifications No setting possible AS 215 to be installed only when AS215 is used Interrupt disable left enable right Master horizontal slave vertical setting No setting possible IRQ1 disable left enable right SRQ2 disable left enable right IRQ3 disable left enable right IRA IRB Rb RESET enable installed disable removed Revision B 5003BA03 Figure 10 3 Revision B of the DCB controller board 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT 10 3 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
299. ent interface circuit host interface between the PLC and the MPM allows several modes of operation and a fast transfer between the components Registers indicate and control the host controller board s user functions The user can use function blocks or a programmable EEPROM card in order to dynamically influence the INTERBUS S system performance The INTERBUS S protocol chip IPMS simplifies the data transfer from INTERBUS S to the MPM The computer M 68xxx CPU is offloaded so that data can be preprocessed The user can respond to signal changes of the outputs and address INTERBUS S by means of logical addressing without prolonging the INTERBUS S cycle considerably PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 2 Application Area of the Host Controller Board The INTERBUS S5 host controller board ensures asynchronous communication between the programmable controllers and the INTERBUS S I O system The host controller board includes operating and diagnostic indicators which provide information about the board s status and the connected INTERBUS S system A software package and a memory block constitute the interface between the control program and the controller board Diagnostic command and special user functions can be called through this interface The host controller board may be used in the following SIMATIC 85 PLCs S5 115 U S5 135 U S5 130 WB S5 150 S S5 150 U S5 155 U
300. equent parameters n B Address area Key DB13 On KY E KY 2 KY er KY 4 KY 2 KY 6 KY T4 KY o KY Js KY LO KY Ts KY 12 KY L KY LA RY Jr KY 16 5003B 77 015 9007000 000 000 0004 52 000 0327 000 0005 000 028 000 000 000 000 000 029 000 000 000 046 000 000 000 1496 000 000 000 000 0 P area of the PLC 1 Q area of the PLC ADR Base address of the module 0 255 Base address word oriented module even address byte oriented module odd even address Parameter count IBS IBS IBS LBS IBS IBS IBS ILES IBS IBS IBS LBS IBS AI BK T DI ii DO 100 A 2 DIO 1 24 CBK 1 24 F CDI 1 24 F CDO 1 24 F CDI 1 24 F BK 1I O T DI 32 3 Diagnostic bit register Diagnostic parameter register PHCENIX oo CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup The DCBEEP example is given on the next page in order to avoid having to turn over between the pages Bus topology and Software setting 6 22 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
301. er frequent bus Reset of the outputs malfunctions Error analysis Determination of temporary errors after a bus stop continuous monitoring of the bus system in order to detect temporary malfunctions Depending on the size of the bus the error location s and error frequency the 33 additional diagnostic phase may last from 10 seconds to several minutes It may be stopped with the following commands without the error message Bus Error Information being sent Configure Bus 0023hex Alarm Stop 004A45 Warmstart 004Chex Group Off 00214544 Check Physical Configuration 0058 Depending on the PLC s status when the bus is stopped the BASP LED may light up during the additional diagnostic phase If groups were disabled before the bus was stopped the BSA LED is also on After the diagnostic phase has been completed there is either an LED error indication RB LB or MOD or if the error cannot be located EOx x 1 2 4 5 6 is output on the diagnostic display The errors indicated are ordered as with firmware revision 3 71 33 For the indication by means of LEDs it is generally true that local bus errors are only indicated if no bus errors were found 5003BC04 PHCENIX 13 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 During the additional diagnostic phase some commands are only confirmed negative and will therefore not be executed The following t
302. er KR 0 or lt gt 0 in the Read KBL Loc Request command the positive acknowledgment may have one of the two following structures Positive messages For KR 0 oyntax Read KBL Loc Confirmation 8118 Quantity of subsequent words 3 1 Resut OOxx 2 Com_ref 0 Size 00xx For KR lt gt 0 and symbol length 12 Syntax Read KBL Loc Confirmation 811B Quantity of subsequent words 3 1 Resut j00x Com_ref lt gt 0 Remote Address XXXX Type 78 800 xe max RCC _ maxSAC XXXX maxRAC maxad xxx connection attr xXXxx reglenh reglen po indlenh indlen poo serv sup serv sup xxxx serv sup serv sup3 poo serv sup serv supb poo out serv client OUt serv server XXXX commtype Jxe x symbolo symboli po symbol2 symbol3 po symbol4 symbo5 xxxx symbol6 symbol7 po 2 symbol8 symbol9 ox 3 symbol10 symbol1 1 XXXX Negative message oyntax Read KBL Loc Confirmation 8118 Quantity of subsequent words 3 1 Result Err_Class 2 Er Code Add Code 3 AddCode 9 66 PHCENIX TE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 2 10 Messages for the EEPROM Management Quit EEPROM Management Confirmation OOF8 Meaning Positive acknowledgment of the EEPROM Management Request 0061 command Remark Depending on the en
303. er service orders or acknowledgments can already be stored in data blocks in the form of a table Up to 15 service headers can be entered in the RRDB data block In this table a pointer pointing to the body of the service follows as the 4th parameter Example Dw3 DW 4 Code Header 2 DW5 PC Dwe KR DW7 DB DW pws The services can be activated by means of bits 1 to 15 of the RRMW flag word They are activated by means of an edge flag The bit is reset automatically once sending has been concluded By modifying the pointers various service bodies can be sent with the same service header For a Write Request for example this means that different data is sent successively to the same station By modifying the KR in this table identical bodies data can be sent to different stations etc 8 90 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP HHQVvdiH AQqO8 Bs Blo lor a S Q vx D g 1 tc 5 MERE B 2 BE 3 Es y 9 zg NL E g b LU NOC 55 fe T or E Qaja jaj A a 6 HG n c lt Figure 8 44 PCP activation flag Request Response 5003B PH NIX 8 91 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 1 7 Service Message Flag Confirmations or indications are reported by way of the bits belonging to the CIMW flag
304. erminated positively 1 Function terminated negatively suene PHCENIX 8 63 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP The MODE parameter The MODE parameter allows to toggle the display between controller board errors CON ERR and bus errors RB ERR and LB ERR MODE 0 This is the setting that should be chosen during normal operation of the PLC For example if the stored list with the ID codes of the expected bus configuration is not identical with the configuration detected by the controller board a corresponding local bus error LB ERR or remote bus error RB ERR will be indicated MODE 1 A discrepancy between the bus connected to the controller board and the lists stored in the data blocks may occur during initialization of the INTERBUS S system An error in the ID code list for example would be indicated as a local bus error RB ERR or local bus error LB ERR if the MODE 0 were set If MODE 1 is set however such a discrepancy is reported as CON ERR in this case with the display 68 hex The EREG parameter If an error occurred when the function block was executed the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The error cause is described with the error register EREG n 8 nen n 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 gt Error in the ID list gt Error in the LB address list gt Error in the IN address list gt Error in the OUT address list
305. ermined in the hardware setting either automatic or controlled start 2 The start characteristics of the bus system in the PLC a difference is made between the start of the INTERBUS S system during PLC startup and in the cyclic program part The initial start during startup is coordinated and monitored with the startup OBs 20 21 and 22 3 The necessity to do switching operations through the application program This includes the enabling and disabling of bus segments in the cyclic program the demand of diagnostic data and the parameterization of modules which are capable of PCP communications PCP Peripherals Communication Protocol 4 The request to program the bus system This is either possible with the help of the PLC and function blocks or the EEPROM card and the controller board The following pages show example bus structures topology ID code and I O address assignment and the program sequences belonging to them They are based on an overview table which lists on the next page the possible combinations of the above mentioned requirements and the hardware settings which you have already done 5003B PHCENIX xd CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup The two part Table 6 2 helps to find out quickly on which page you will find the example that matches your application The first part only relates to automatic start with physical addressing The second part relates to the startup behavior an
306. es is made available in the MPM of the controller board Data is linked with the familiar commands O S O etc Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used enter an even base address n for every module Address the digital modules so that their addresses are located in the process image PB 0 to PB 127 The following figure shows schematically the module terminals and the address location of the associated bits in the PLC n n 6 n 5 n 4 n 3n 2 n 1n O m m 6 m 5 m 4m 3m 2 m 1m 0 lt Byte n gt lt Byte m gt 4 Wordn gt 5003A307 Figure 3 14 Address assignment for digital modules with 16 outputs Even output address n PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 5 LC Modules with 16 Digital Outputs Modules IBS 24 DO LC Access The up to date data of the modules is made available in the MPM of the controller board Data is linked with the familiar commands O S O etc Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used enter an even base address n for every module Address the digital modules so that their addresses are located in the process image PB 0 to PB 127 The following figure shows schematically the module terminals and the address location of the associated bits in the PLC Figure 3 15 Address assignment for digital LC modules with 16 outputs n Even output address
307. et of the controller board After successful termination of the function the counter is available Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 002 Parameter count in this case 2 parameters m 1 KH XXXX Most significant word m 2 KH XXXX Least significant word n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins XXXX Counted cycles 8 56 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 3 5 Logical Address Error FKT 4 The Logical Address Error function sends the errors which are included in the list after the functions Implement All Logical Address Map FB 68 FKT 6 or Physical Configuration Map FB 68 FKT 0 have been implemented Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 003 Parameter count in this case 3 parameters m 1 KY 000 00X List code m 2 KY 000 00Y Parameter no m 3 KY 000 00Z Error no n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins X List Code Meaning 1 Logical bus segment list 2 Logical IN address list 93 j LogealOUTaddesslit 4 Logical bus segment list Y The parameter no specifies the line no in which an error has been detected in the instruction list Z Error no Meaning 0 Notdfined E 3 Log local bus address outside the permissible range 5 Log address no
308. f a data block DB 0 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW 0 DW 199 T T Timer occupied by the function FKT E BY Code of the function to be executed DB E BY Pointertothe data block DW E BY Pointertothedataword O After termination of the function the BUSY bit is reset automatically by the function block TO A BI TIMEOUT bit BUSY E BI 1 The function is activated when the BUSY bit is set 1 Timeout of the function has elapsed the function could not be activated O The function is active RET A BI Return value of the function O Function terminated positively 1 Function terminated negatively SPB FB 62 IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS data block T di 2 Occupied timer DB 3 MB 16 Pointer to the data block DW MB 1 7 Pointer to the data word BUSY M 12 2 Activation bit TO 4j M 13 2 Timeout bit RET 3 M 14 2 Return bit FKT 3 MB 15 Function Figure 8 19 Call of the DEFINE function block FB 69 50038 PHCENIX 8 29 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 2 1 Physical Configuration Map FKT 0 When this function is used the INTERBUS S system must be in the STOP state The Physical Configuration Map function communicates a configuration in the form of ID numbers and length codes of the modules to the controller board This configuration is compared with the connected bus configuration
309. f entries Up to e 392 instructions with the instruction code 5 or 6 e 199 instructions with the instruction code 7 or 8 are possible Commands with invalid addresses are not executed There will be no special message for this case Addresses and therefore instructions become invalid with e logical addressing if previously used addresses do no longer exist or e switched off groups if the address is in the area of the disconnected group 5003B PHCENIX eh CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages PLC Host Controller board Module Output data Bus output Process Host output output data Input data lt Bus input lt Process Host input input data Figure 9 1 Function groups of bit manipulation Bit manipulation prolongs the cycle time of the data traffic on the bus up to 40 us for each instruction The instructions are stored in an instruction list on the controller board This list is extended by the instructions given in this command when the first parameter is unequal to 0 A possibly existing command list is deleted by setting the first parameter to O opecify the addresses in a special format for the instruction parameters The LOGICAL ADDRESS is the address of the process data on the bus which is currently effective e g the address of a byte for byte oriented modules or a word for word oriented modules The bit number used there identifie
310. f the Word Copy instruction This command copies the input word specified with the input address to the output word specified by the output address after the word has been AND together with the bit mask before 5003B PHCENIX ves CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 7 Commands for Event Processing Receive Events Request 002A Function The parameters of the command allow to program up to 16 events Each event definition occupies 5 words Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Receive Event Confirmation OObF Meaning The event definitions were accepted Remark Event definitions which have possibly been defined with this command are overwritten Negative acknowledgment Event Error Confirmation 004C Meaning Error during the event definition Remark There are no valid event definitions old definitions have been deleted syntax Receive Events Request 002A Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 2 3 1st event definition 4 a 5 n 4 5 N 3 5 n 2 nth event definition 5 n 1 O n Key PC Parameter count n 1 lt n lt 16 dec number of the event definitions for up to 16 possible events 9 34 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Structure of the event definitions oyntax o n 4 nth event identifier aaaa 5 n 3 Event code data preprocessing code 0004 5 n 2 Add
311. f the command is shorter than the set quantity of parameters Therefore the sending of a command which is longer than the set parameter quantity takes at least two PLC cycles The REQ RES block is activated by the higher level INTERBUS S command functions in order to send commands This block is also needed to send PCP services Request Response SPA FB 66 5003A807 Figure 8 9 Structure of the REQ RES function block FB66 or FB67 If a Request or Response service is to be executed the service parameters have to be entered into the Request Response standard buffer RRST When bit 0 of the RRMW flag word is set the request or the response is sent The Request or Response services can also be stored in the form of a table in the data block Up to 63 service headers may be entered in the RRDB data block The 4th 8 12 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS parameter in this table is a pointer which points to the service body The services may be activated with bits 1 through 63 or an edge flag After the service has been sent the bit is automatically reset A change of the pointers allows to send different service bodies with the same service header A change of the communication references in the table allows to send the same bodies data to different stations You select the HRMW flag word and the RRST buffer by parameterizing the initialization block Table 8 4 Description of the pa
312. face and the controller board The blocks interface drivers only ever become active when commands are sent or messages are received The third type of blocks is related to the application and must be integrated by the user That is to say Only those function blocks are called that are currently needed e g for addressing system information event handling 8 2 PHCENI X 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Principle call structure OB 20 21 22 Initialization SPA FB210 INIIIB OB 1 Heceive SPA FB 62 NE CON IND block Function block Send SPAFB66 REQ RES block 5003B801 Figure 8 1 Locations of the various blocks and their calls in the program Description of the structure An initialization block is called during startup of the PLC This block synchronizes the controller board with the PLC and makes presettings for the command message structure These settings specify and set up the interface for the PCP stations communication modules counters V 24 All further settings are carried out in the cyclic program The receive and send blocks are not accessible from the application They are used exclusively by the function blocks of the ISFP interface and serve the communication interface communication registers By means of these blocks commands are sent and messages are received Their locations in the program and how to call them are important Block Loc
313. fferent parameters depending on their function The first parameter to be given is IBDB IBDB is a data block with a length of 200 data words and which is used by the software as main memory The BUSY bit activates the function blocks in the cyclic program This bit must be set once by means of an edge trigger flag The called function block resets the bit A reset BUSY bit indicates that the function has been terminated The function blocks may be active during several cycles oome functions receive parameters from the controller board These may be additional error information but also configuration data or PCP data The parameter information DB and DW causes the function blocks to write the data sets received in defined data blocks The RETURN bit is always the last parameter of the activation blocks When the block has been processed and no errors occurred the value of the RETURN bit is zero If an error occurs this bit is set to one Errors can occur due to invalid parameters or when the communication between the PLC and the controller board gets stuck A timeout monitors the communication between the PLC and the controller board Should the timeout respond the TIMEOUT bit is also set when the RETURN bit is set PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces SPA CON IND o OB 1 U BUSY SPB L CON
314. firmation 9 61 80F 7 Groups Error Characteristics Failed Confirmation 9 45 80F8 Quit EEPROM Management Confirmation 9 66 80F9 EEPROM Management Error Confirmation 9 67 BOFB EEPROM Programming Error Confirmation 9 68 BOFF Quit Module Error Not Possible Confirmation 9 50 8106 Reconfiguration Indication 9 46 8112 send Group Number Confirmation 9 46 8113 Send Group Status Confirmation 9 47 8114 Send Local Bus Code Map Confirmation 9 47 8115 Send Located Error Counter Confirmation 9 57 8116 send Located Error Counter V24 Confirmation 9 58 8117 send Last Module Status Error Confirmation 9 58 8118 send Last Module Status Error V24 Confirmation 9 59 8119 send Actual Configuration Confirmation 9 59 811A Send Actual Configuration V24 Contfirmation 9 60 81183 Read KBL Loc Confirmation 9 66 9 4 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 Controller Board Commands Chapter 9 1 describes the commands for the controller board The descriptions follow the schematic below The command code is given in a hexadecimal form The letters A through F are shown as upper or lower case letters like they are displayed on the seven segment display Name of the command Code Function Describes the task of the command Requirement All requiremen
315. g of the outputs DCB mode PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 Access to INTERBUS S Modules The controller board cyclically reads the states of the INTERBUS S module inputs and stores them in the MULTI PORT MEMORY MPM At the same time it transfers the data which is determined for the module outputs from the MPM to the modules The INTERBUS o cycle runs continuously and independent of the PLC cycle The controller board puts the addresses of the INTERBUS S modules and registers in the PLC s I O address area so that the PLC handles these addresses like system internal I O boards If an address is located in the address area PB 0 to PB 127 the PLC includes this portion in its process image For modules which are addressed in this area the familiar bit commands Al Ol O etc byte command L IB T OB etc and also word and double word commands L IW T OW etc can be used Addresses which are located outside of this area will not be included in the process image In this area the module data is accessed with commands like L PW L QW T PW T QW etc PLC 255 Input area of the pete Process image C PII Inputs Figure 3 10 PLC I O area Q area P area 5003A322 The following pages provide a description of the INTERBUS S modules in various groups A schematic diagram shows the relevant module terminals and the addres
316. ges A short description is available in the IBS SYS SWT monitor program PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Chapter 6 Startup This chapter provides information on the possibilities of automatic and controlled start how to do the logical and physical addressing the address area assignment and the address orientation 6 SOE AND 6 1 6 1 gidele cc ce eee eee 6 1 6 1 1 General Information About Physical Addressing 6 1 6 1 2 General Information About Logical Addressing 6 2 6 1 3 Modes of Operation nnns nnns 6 2 6 1 4 Startup 6 2 0 49 nennen 6 3 6 1 5 Acknowledgment Behavior nennen nnns 6 4 6 2 Hardware Setting 498 nennen nnne 6 5 6 3 Software Setting 2 2 QUE Nec eee ccsceececsessecescsereesseseseneeserenceseesseesarenseeees 6 6 5003B PHCENIX
317. ges are not disabled AV 1 because the message driver CON IND is processed cyclically Diagnostics The function of the system can be monitored with the diagnostic registers diagnostic bit parameter registers Conditions for activating the application ADDRESS BUSY 0 Activation bit RET 2 0 Return value is positive Diagnostic bit register RUN 1 INTERBUS S in the cycle b Program structure of the example c Schematized program example OB 20 21 22 Startup Block FB 210 M 8 0 O M 8 0 S M 80 SPA FB 210 FB 210 P M 10 0 SPB FB 60 FB 60 LOOP U M 8 0 SPB FB60 INITIB SPA FB 62 FB 62 FEN3 AV 1 SPA FB 66 FB 66 SPA FB62 CON IND 5003A616 i OB 1 SPA FB 62 FB 62 FB63 i gt UN M 10 0 i REQ RES SPB FB 72 FB 72 SPA FB66 S Applicati PB pplication U M 80 SPA FB 66 FB 66 SPB LOOP 5003A618 5003B617 l 6 30 PHOENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup c Schematized program example Cyclic Program OB1 SPA FB62 CON IND M 10 0 SPB FB72 ADDRESS i ID code list Bus segment list UN M 10 2 IN address list UN M 10 0 OUT address list SPB
318. gives the logical local bus address of the module concerned oyntax Module Request Indication 80A3 Quantity of subsequent words 1 Logical local bus address 9 52 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Bus Error Information Indication 80C4 The general structure of the command is given first The structure depends on the ERROR TYPE parameter which is described in detail below Meaning The message comes after the Bus System Error Indication error message It provides detailed information on the error status of the bus system Parameter 1 specifies the error type Depending on the error type other parameters classify the error as follow up information Effect The bus is stopped and the outputs are set to O oyntax Bus Error Information Indication 8004 Quantity of subsequent words 1 ERROR TYPE EEOx jn Optional follow up information XXXX Key PC Parameter count EEOx Error type x 1 to 6 1 Multiple ID cycle error 2 Maximum possible configuration exceeded 3 During the error analysis a bus error was analyzed the exact cause and location of which are given in the error number and structure see below 4 The configuration could not be detected 5 The last group which was still switched on was switched off 6 Multiple data cycle error Error type EEO1 Meaning When the bus is checked no error was detected in the currently pe
319. gment delay is to occur in the PLC in the event of an error 3 Other diagnostic functions e SFP software program Function blocks which are included in the delivery allow to get additional error information e g which module in the case of a MOD error e V 24 RS 232 interface In the case of servicing a PC program can be used to call diagnostic functions 2 20 PHCENIX ix CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 6 Hardware Settings 2 6 1 Mounting Positions of the Jumpers oW1 SW3 Al SW5 SW6 O OO oo0o0o0o0 0 O O O O O O O O O O J009 ONZ POW ROOD NO ONc NN WO BROOD NO ONC 3 N C92 ON Q nN WO ROO NOO SW2 SW4 ONC nn Co O10 NO ON c 3 m Co O10 NO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Oi JO O O O O O OOOO
320. guration Map FKT 0 8 2 2 2 Logical Local Bus Address Map FKT 1 8 2 2 3 Logical IN Address Map FKT 2 8 2 2 4 Logical OUT Address Map FKT 3 8 2 2 5 Communication Reference FKT 4 8 2 2 6 Event Map FKT 5 isses tte netter pra berti etn ees 8 2 2 7 Group Numbers FKT 6 atio 8 2 2 8 Parameter Timeout Constant FKT 7 8 2 2 9 Receive E eti Reis 8 2 2 10 Receive Bit Manipulation FKT 9 8 2 2 11 Group Error Characteristics FKT 10 8 2 2 12 Quit Module Error FKT 11 50038 CONTACT PHCENIX online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 3 oy Sh 0 m 8 53 8 2 3 1 Physical Configuration Map FKT 0 8 55 8
321. he PLC Setting by means of switches physical addressing Setting by means of address lists logical addressing The controller board stores the addresses which have been set in a decoder EEPROM The address area which the controller board occupies can be addressed by the PLC in the usual way L IW L PW L QW T OW T PW T QW U I S O When the PLC starts operation after the voltage has been switched on or the STOP RUN switch has been actuated the following startup results Supply voltage ON Hardware test owitch STOP RUN Response of periphery Startup blocks OB20 21 22 Cyclic program OB 1 vi Figure 2 16 PLC startup STOP gt RUN 5003B235 2 24 PHCENIX m CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Under the menu item Addressing the Periphery the correctly connected I O modules indicate their readiness and the PLC recognizes the addresses stored in the decoder EEPROM They are entered in the PLC as existing I O modules 33 Please observe that there are two special cases when the addresses are changed in the bus system for example by removing or adding bus stations and the application program thus calls address which it did not recognize during startup opecial case a When the PLC starts again it recognizes first the old addresses
322. he PLC s I O address area The addresses are located above the process data s window 2 In the PLC handling of communication between the PLC and the controller board is realized by function blocks which are integrated into the user program 8 4 1 2 Call Structure of the Function Blocks The interface between the application and PCP consists of function blocks These function blocks serve the communication registers The user calls them during startup and in the cyclic program by means of conditional jumps The function blocks were written for the SIMATIC S5 in STEP 5 The INITIB initialization block FB 60 is called during startup of the PLC OB 20 22 This function block carries out some basic software settings It also controls the synchronization between the PLC and INTERBUS S The routine is not terminated until INTERBUS S is in the READY state or the bus was activated A receive block FB66 and a send block FB62 or FB 64 are called in the cyclic program To arrive at an optimized response with respect to time the receive block CON IND should be called at the start of the cyclic program and the send block REQ RES at the end The ADDRESS addressing block must be processed before the application is started in the cyclic program This block addresses the INTERBUS S stations performs PCP initialization and starts the bus afterwards The application can be started once the addressing block has ended For PCP communication the r
323. he PLC s address area and analog I O the second window 35 In the ID code list the WINDOW parameter specifies in which window the respective module appears see Tables 3 2 and 3 3 otarting with the base address the module addresses are stored in the respective window in the PLC s address area The size of the address area which every module occupies depends on the module 5003B PHCENIX ei CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup 6 1 2 General Information About Logical Addressing When logical addressing is used the addresses of the individual I O modules can be freely assigned The address area in the PLC which has been allocated to the modules must not be used by other devices The physical and logical address configuration are combined with address lists The address lists are stored as data blocks in the PLC or as address lists in the EEPROM memory card When the PLC and or the controller board is started the address lists address the I O modules in the I O area of the PLC With the help of the programming unit the constants for the address lists can be entered in the data blocks or the EEPROM memory card When logical addressing is used the link of the digital modules to window 1 and the analog modules to window 2 is not applicable anymore The structure of an INTERBUS S address list is described in Chapter 3 4 2 6 1 3 Modes of Operation Automatic start In this mode of operation an aut
324. he RUN state Diagnostic bit register RUN 1 Diagnostics With the diagnostic register the application can recognize the current bus status and respond to it Diagnostic registers of the example Diagnostic bit register IW 126 Diagnostic parameter register PW 128 Further functions When a bus error occurs RB LB error STOP of the system INTERBUS S can be started with an input edge Example SIMATIC 4 0 which activates the addressing block 14 0 gt BUSY ADDRESS a No bus error has occurred The front plate and the diagnostic registers are cleared The INTERBUS S system is active b A bus error has occurred The front plate and the diagnostic registers are updated The INTERBUS S system is in the STOP state The outputs are reset OUT 0 5003B PHCENIX ii CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup Supplement to FB11 When a module error occurs peripheral voltage failure or a short circuit in a module only for modules with bus acknowledgment the display can be updated via an input edge Example SIMATIC I 4 1 14 1 gt BUSY ADDRESS a No module error message is active The front plate and the diagnostic registers are cleared b A module error message is active The front plate and the diagnostic registers are updated The list of the reported local bus segments is entered in a data block Parameter Example Data block DB 89 First da
325. he examples DCBADHR DCBEEP DCBZYK DCBCP DCBECP J001 Board in the CC O O O O J009 J003 f e e J007 e e J008 e e9 Q9 Q 9 Q 9 J004 Hardware error disabled io o o enabled disabled O 9 9 enabled O O 0j OJO OO Bus error SW6 c J005 otart G 9 O autom ams 3 controlled 006 2 DCB O 1 O oO ON lt Oo SW1 SW3 Moae J010 ese Window 1 Window 2 SW5 ONG A Om 8 Aa Om Es installed on a4 8R7 amp 4 E 64 eo not installed off 3022 MN 5 32 M5 32 B5 16 B4 16 4 16 Ma 8 Bs 8 W3 8 3 4 BH 4 E2 4 Ec 2 B oM 1 2 M SW2 SWA Communi _ _ ONE cation 128 128 E 28 register 5003A607 UW 5 Co R amp O1 NOO C2 NO BOO NOO Figure 6 7 Hardware setting for different system start and bus control methods examples DCBADR DCBEEP DCBZYK DCBCP DCBECP The jumpers marked with do not exist on the board with revision C Chapter 2 3 2 shows how to find out the revision of your board These jumpers settings must not be changed 6 12 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF
326. he operating mode and the startup of the host controller board Mode of operation 3 NH Automatic controlled 2 HH DAB DCB mode 1 HM Reserved 5003A208 Figure 2 13 Default setting of SW6 Automatic start In this mode of operation an automatic start sequence is processed e After the voltage of the PLC has been switched on the host controller board runs its self test and answers with READY e he modules are addressed with regard to their physical order e The addresses are automatically stored in the decoder s EEPROM e Bus operation is started When the automatic start is used the set window lengths for the I O address area of the modules is not checked for its correct setting a Mode of operation 3 BM Automatic controlled 2 mW DAB DCB mode 1 Hm Reserved 5003A207 Figure 2 14 Position of DIP switch SW6 which selects the automatic start mode Controlled start This mode of operation depends on which type of EEPROM is fitted memory card inserted The EEPROM determines the startup behavior of the host controller board A controlled start sequence is processed e After the voltage of the PLC has been switched on the host controller board runs its self test and answers with READY e he start sequence which follows is either specified by an EEPROM or by the PLC with functions blocks e he modules are addressed in accordance with the starting sequence in their physical
327. he up to date signal states There must be no access to the bus addresses concerned 4 4 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 1 2 Error Indication Four red LEDs indicate INTERBUS S and PLC malfunctions The LEDs are designated CTRL LB ERROR RB ERROR and MOD ERROR Further information is indicated on the display LB ERR A defective local bus Local Bus Error has been diagnosed The display and the diagnostic parameter register indicate the number of the defective local bus segment Remedies Error in the indicated local bus check I O stations too many or not enough stations on the local bus check the cabling This error leads to the stopping of the bus The I O data does not correspond to the up to date status of the signal states There must be no access to the bus addresses concerned RB ERR A defective remote bus Remote Bus Error or a defective installation remote bus module has been diagnosed The seven segment display and or the diagnostic parameter register indicate the number of the defective remote bus segment or installation remote bus module Remedies Error in the indicated remote bus segment check bus terminal module check the voltage supply check the remote bus cable coming from the controller board too many stations in the remote bus 2 The error leads to the stopping of the bus The I O data does not correspond to the up to
328. host controller board and can occupy inputs or outputs depending on the board s mode of operation Module addresses Module addresses are the I O addresses in the PLC which are used by an input or output module The application program accesses these addresses in order to link inputs and to set outputs Depending on the mode of operation these addresses can be within or outside the window areas Diagnostic registers The host controller board automatically monitors the entire bus system and diagnoses errors if they occur The diagnostic result is displayed on the front plate This data can also be called by the application program via the diagnostic registers diagnostic bit register diagnostic parameter register Application registers Different I O words are used to perform functions on the controller board and the bus system bit controlled command register bit manipulation register Communication registers These registers are always active in the PLC They are addressed by means of the included function driver blocks FBs Using these blocks control commands and or messages can be exchanged between the PLC and the controller board 2 5 3 Configuring the Default Setting In order to configure the available addresses jumpers and DIP switches on the controller board the following information will be of importance Definition of I O addresses Depending on the number of inputs or outputs every module occupies 8 16 32 or more
329. host controller board and first remote bus module two remote bus module host controller board and last remote bus module Installation remote bus Max total current consumption Max bus cable length between BK and first I O module two I O modules BK and last I O module THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 400 m 400 m 13 km 4 5 A 50m 50m 50m The number of the I O modules in the installation remote bus is limited by the N current consumption of the modules and the connected initiators The overall current consumption of these components must not exceed 4 5 A The current consumption of the actuators is not added to the calculation because actuators are always supplied with a separate voltage Local bus Max number of modules in the local bus Max bus cable length between BK and first I O module BK and last I O module 1 10 PHCENIX CONTACT Max 8 depending on the current consumption of every module and the load carrying capacity of the bus terminal module see data sheets for more information 1 5m 10m 5003B online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview 1 3 System Components 1 3 1 Host Controller Board The INTERBUS S system is a sensor actuator bus that is independent of the control system The link to the respective control system is achieved with a special host controller board for every control system The host contr
330. i Base address E registers InterBus S CT address area PW 128 ss 10 150 _ InterBus S ma address area Registers oe Diagnostic Bit controlled commands Bit manipulation PW 0 Alarm message 5003A228 Figure 2 19 Address locations for controlled start in the DCB mode 5003B PHCENIX 2 29 CONTACT 2 Technical Description 2 6 3 4 Address Locations for Automatic Start in the DAB Mode Inputs Outputs QW 254 Communication QW 0 di register PW 254 Base address InterBus S L address area for analog modules Length window 2 Base address Bal EI I PW 128 Diagnostic parameter PW 126 register Length InterBus S window 1 address area for digital modules Base address Diagnostic bit register Alarm messages PWO 5003A230 Figure 2 20 Address locations for automatic start in the DAB mode 2 30 PHCENIX ix CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 6 3 5 Address Locations for Controlled Start in the DAB Mode QW 254 QW 0 Inputs PW 254 Base address Length window 2 Base address PW 128 PW 126 Length window1 Base address PW 0 Communication register InterBus S address area Diagnostic parameter register InterBus S address area A Registers Bi
331. ible slots and the correct connection of the controller board to the various Siemens PLCs the correct connection of the host controller board to the remote bus cable the V 24 RS 232 connection of the controller board to a Siemens programming unit by means of an adapter cable 7 ES LeU AION E 7 1 7 1 Slots for the Controller Board 7 1 7 2 Cable Instalator NT utm 7 2 7 3 Pin Assignment of the Hardware 0608118069 7 3 7 3 1 System Connector see Nye nn nn nnnm 7 4 7 3 2 Remote BUS 016811806 oca kr eei da rete ime 7 5 7 3 3 Serial Interface V 24 RS 232 7 6 7 3 4 Ordering Information 48 9I 7 8 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PHCENIX in CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation 7 installation 7 1 Slots for the Controller Bo
332. ibly to be expected are processed further after the data traffic has started again The following definitions are deleted Logical address lists Group definition Bit manipulation Event definition Quit Alarm Stop Confirmation 00d8 Meaning The data traffic on the bus is stopped Remark The parameter list is deleted syntax Alarm Stop Request 004A 9 8 PHCENIX E CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 2 Commands for Configuration Configure Bus Request 0023 Function Effects Prerequisite This command causes the controller board to reject all previously defined definitions and to read in the up to date bus configuration This configuration is valid from now on and is declared as initial configuration The following definitions are deleted Logical address lists Group definition Bit manipulation Event definition When this command is used the INTERBUS S cycle must have been stopped Further operation Further bus operation is initiated with logical addressing Messages Error oyntax 5003B Positive acknowledgment Quit Configure Bus Confirmation 00CA Defective bus parts are reported as errors LEDs messages in the order of the physical bus structure or are indicated on the diagnostics display Configure Bus Request 0028 PHCENIX d CONTACT 9 Commands and Messages THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Sen
333. ic display can be created with the PC and stored on the controller board in a non volatile way in the EEPROM card The individual sequences can be started by means of an output bit in the PLC bit controlled command register Thus the INTERBUS S system can be configured and controlled in different ways This chapter describes the programming interfaces and explains how they are used together The previous general description of the interrelations will be clarified with the help of an example Example Logical addressing For the logical addressing it is useful to program the start sequence allocation of address lists and start of INTERBUS S via the EEPROM The programming can be done so that the program executes the bus system start once during start up start sequence no 0 and initialization block of the PLC and additionally also in the PLC s cycle with bit controlled command execution During operation messages e g error messages are received in the cycle with ISFP to evaluate them with the application program PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 5 1 2 Interface Classification The term system interface stands for hardware such as the communication registers the registers for the bit controlled command execution and the RS 232 interface link to the PC This hardware helps to control the INTERBUS S system in the start phase and during operation 1 Communication
334. ical addressing during system start in the PLC s program or startup control via function blocks with additional PCP communication a Short description of logical addressing during startup with PCP communication This function block initiates the logical addressing of the INTERBUS S system It includes the initialization block INITIB two driver blocks REQ RES CON IND an auxiliary driver CIH and the addressing block ADDRESS See also Figure 6 7 In this example digital and analog I O modules are addressed The address block transfers the logical address lists to the controller board where they are checked Data block of the example ID code list DB 10 Bus segment list DB 11 IN address list DB 12 OUT address list DB 13 KR address list DB 14 After the system has been started and the messages from the controller board to the PLC AV 1 have been disabled the startup block is exited In the cyclic program the application can now access the defined module addresses The PCP interface in the driver blocks is also activated Diagnostics The function of the system can be monitored with the diagnostic registers diagnostic bit parameter registers The diagnostic registers have to be defined by means of logical addressing 6 42 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup b Program structure of the example
335. ication the INTERBUS S system features extensive protection mechanisms The following precautionary measures ensure a safe data transmission Differential signal transfer in accordance with RS 485 The transfer in accordance with RS 485 uses a twisted wire pair User data is sent over both lines of a pair as differential signals This transfer method can be strongly affected by influences from the outside and is used on the remote bus line and the installation remote bus Remote bus check The individual remote bus segments are checked by exchanging special status information An interrupt of the line or a connector which is not fitted properly causes a remote bus error HB ERR and the RC LED on the remote bus module goes out Loopback word The controller board clocks this word ahead of the data through the ring bus Thus the loopback word is transferred directly between the input and output data through all INTERBUS S system modules and after the input data back to the controller board The time required for the loopback word to make a complete cycle is known to and monitored by the controller board The special bit sequence of the loopback word detects errors on the transmission path or in the modules CRC Every transmission path between two modules in the INTERBUS S system is checked by means of a CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check For this purpose a CRC word is calculated both in the output direction as well as in the input direction i
336. ication partner who requests an order ID Order confirmation which the service provider sends to the service requester client Detected Here BY Indication of the error location Layer 7 local station 00 remote station FF Error Class BY Classification number of an error Error Code BY Error number of the service m B LLL wes PHEN ss CONTACT 8 ISFP Index BY Initiate IS Invoke ID BY KBL D communication relationship list Communication D object KR 8 communication reference connection Length BY Locally Generated BY OV object ID dictionary Original Invoke ID BY Password BY PDU Process D Data Unit PDU Type ID Process Data Unit Pl State BY Primitive ID Protection BY Reason Code BY Receive High BY Receive Low BY Response Reject 8 98 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Name under which a communication object is addressed pointer to a variable field This list contains definitions regarding the communication channels Contents permitted services read and write memory size Name or module number of a station This number is allocated a communication connection Link between two application processes via which the data is accessed Indication of the error location local station 00 remote station i FF L
337. ics 11 Quit Module Error 8 20 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP The SYSINFO function block FB70 No Function 0 Physical Configuration Map 1 ooftware Revision 2 Switch Information 3 INTERBUS S Cycle Counter 4 Logical Address Error The ON OFF function block FB71 No Function 0 Group ON 0 0 255 1 Group OFF 0 255 2 BK Alarm ON 0 255 3 BK Alarm OFF 0 255 4 EventON Bt 1246 5 Event OFF 1 16 4 All Events ON 0 5 jAlEvnsOFF 0 suene PHCENIX 8 21 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The ADDRESS function block FB72 Parameter Function IDDB DBn DBNumber ID code list IDDW KF Pointer DW ID code list LBDB DBn DBNumber Local bus list LBDB KF Pointer DW Local bus list INDB DBn DBNumber IN address list INDW KF Pointer DW IN address list OUDB DBn DBNumber OUT address list OUDW KF Pointer DW OUT address list KRDB DBn DBNumber KR list KRDW KF PointerDW KR list GRDB DBn DBNumber Group no list GRDW KF Pointer DW Group no list 35 ADDRESS function block FB 72 Pointer for DB 1 255 0 no list O Function Pointer for DW 0 255 KR Communication referenc
338. in the DCB Mode 2 26 2 6 3 3 Address Locations for Controlled Start in the DOB Mode 2 27 2 6 3 4 Address Locations for Automatic Start in the DAB Mode 2 28 2 6 3 5 Address Locations for Controlled Start in the DAB Mode 2 29 2 6 4 Address 2 30 2 6 5 ICTR FOGSS SIC EET E 2 36 2 6 5 1 Settings for Interrupt Processing 2 36 2 6 5 2 Different Interrupt Sources 2 38 2 6 6 Acknowledgment Delay Message 2 38 2 6 7 Disconnecting the RESET Button 2 39 2 7 Data 9691 at 2 40 3 User INterla CES autre TTE EET 3 1 3 1 ID C
339. ing has to be ensured Example In this example the base address of the second window is set to address 200 and the length is specified with 106 bytes Area P Q Address TERRE 255 Window setting 200 lt gt 49 Programming PW200 PW254 QWO QW48 Load Transfer Figure 2 25 Example for a window setting which extends over two areas 33 When the PLC accommodates SIMATIC I O modules in the central controller the addresses used by these modules are located in the P and Q area respectively see the user manuals for SIMATIC PLCs PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 6 5 Interrupt Processing The INTERBUS S host controller board is an intelligent bus controller which receives commands from the PLC and sends messages to the PLC This type of communication is performed with fixed addresses in the I O area of the PLC communication register window 3 and is supported by function blocks Interrupt processing is not supported 2 6 5 1 Settings for Interrupt Processing The jumpers marked with J3 J5 J6 J7 J8 are not available in the hardware with revision C In all higher revisions the default state is to be kept The interrupt line to the PLC can be enabled or disabled with jumper J3 Access to the peripheral word 0 is possible when the interrupt is enabled Jumper J3 J x a b 5003A215 Figure 2 26 Interru
340. ing startup The logical addressing of the INTERBUS S system after power up or reset is initiated by means of the start sequence Bit 0 of the EEPROM card The following function retains the PLC in its startup block until the controller board in the RUN operation To this end an initialization block INITIB is called oee also Figure 6 7 In this example digital and analog I O modules are addressed The logical address lists are transferred via the EEPROM card to the bus control where they are checked The address list can be projected by means of the IBS SYS SWT configuration software The input scheme corresponds according to the structure to the following lists address lists of the example Vo Name Module Bus segment Group Input _ Output NIMM PD ID Level0 1 No mes mind n 3 BKT o 52 o 21 o o o o o 2 D 33 o 0 o o 20 o o 3 aor 4 65 o 0 0 o o 0 o 132 a 24D 1 129 o 0 o o 0 o 22 5 07100 4 6 o 0 o o 14 o o el 00 1 7 0 H o o 28 o 28 7 k o 132 0 22 o o 0 o o 8 D 129 10 1 23 0 o 3 o o 9 0 129 9 1 24 o o o o 29 fio wm 129 to 1 25 0 o 3 o o 11 Bko 1 u o 12 0 o 46 o 46 12 24D 32 2 i42 o 0 o o 33 o o 1 3 a3 4 7 o 0 o o 1 o 164 14 Diag Bt o 16 o 0 o o 126 o o 15 Diag Para o 17 0 0 o o 128 o o 16 BitcComm 0 18 0 0 0 0
341. interface board Figure 3 29 Communication path from the slave PLC with communication interface board to the master PLC with DAB or DCB board k Output address of the slave PLC is set with DIP switches on the interface board m INTERBUS S input address must be specified for LOGICAL ADDRESSING PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 12 Modules for Thermocouples Modules IBS PT100A 2 IBS PT100A 4 Access The modules occupy four word addresses in the input area Address the analog modules so that the addresses are outside the process image Data from these modules can be accessed with the familiar commands L PW T PW L QW T QW etc Every channel has a 16 bit IN register out of which the pending analog value can be read Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used enter an input address n for every module The following figure shows the address assignment of the analog channels at the terminal strip n n 2 n 4 n 6 Analog values Channel O Channeli Channel 2 Channel 3 Figure 3 30 Address assignment for digital modules with 16 inputs n Even input address Code table The IBS PT100A module converts the measured temperatures into a 12 bit binary code The following table shows the allocation of some temperatures to the corresponding data words This table is for modules with a measuring range of 0 600 C With other measuring ranges there wi
342. ion 13 The request of analysis bit must be adapted in PLC programs that have previously 33 used firmware 3 72 and this bit 16 PHCENIX 5003BC04 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Chapter 2 3 1 1 I O Status Indicators 5003BC04 00 M wsmm Inputs extended areas 2 Outputs extended area 2 Must not be set L9 Outputs extended area 1 The use of the extended address areas 1 and 2 does not increase the maxi mum number of process data words connectable in the InterBus system 256 The extended address areas are only used for relocating InterBus process data if the P and or Q area would be excessively filled by other input output units The extended areas are organized by the new function blocks GETINDB FB 80 PUTOUTDB FB 81 in a data block oriented way DB or GETINMW FB 82 PUTOUTMW FB 83 in a flag word oriented way MW The function blocks will be described on the following pages PHCENIX f CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Chapter 8 3 5 new function block GETINDB FB 80 The GETINDB function block FB 80 reads the data in the extended input area and copies it to the specified data block from the specified data word onwards The start and end addresses are provided with the ADR parameter and are to be specified in words even numbered The start an
343. ipherals e g unprotected shafts or motors with actuator functions to light to severe personal injury The symbol is always located to the left of the tagged text The attention symbol refers to erroneous handling which could lead to 3 The pointer hand gives you tips and advice on the efficient use of hardware and on software optimization to save you from performing extra work for example In addition text marked in this way informs you of system related conditions that must absolutely be observed to achieve error free operation The hand is also found in front of clarifications of terms Statement of Legal Authority This manual including all illustrations contained herein is copyright protected Use of this manual by any third party in departure from the copyright provision is forbidden Reproduction translation or electronic or photographic archiving or alteration requires the express written consent of Phoenix Contact Violations are liable for damages Phoenix Contact reserves the right to make any technical changes that serve for the purpose of technical progress Phoenix Contact reserves all rights in the case of a patent award or listing of a registered design External products are always named without reference to patent rights The existence of such rights shall not be excluded however The use of products described in this manual is oriented exclusively to qualified electricians or persons trained in the electrical
344. irst window and the analog I O modules in the second window The allocation of the window starts at the set base address of the window The related program file is called DCBPHYST S5D It is stored on the floppy disk Diagnostics The function of the system can be monitored with the diagnostic registers diagnostic bit register below window 1 diagnostic parameter register below window 2 In this mode of operation the positions of the registers depend on the base addresses of windows 1 and 2 C Program example seti OB 20 21 22 F1 Base address Yes Yes SPA FB 210 Length Yes Yes NAME ANLAUF F2 Base address Yes Yes S Length Yes Yes FB 210 F3 Base address Yes Yes NETWORK 1 See also Figure 6 5 NAME ANLAUF SPA FB 60 NAME INITIB b Program structure of the IBDB DB 0 InterBus data block example FEN3 KF 200 Base address of window 3 AV KF 0 Automatic start RRST DB 0 REQ RES standard DB DEUS CIST DB 0 CON IND standard DB RRMW KF 0 Activation word CIMW KF 0 Signal word SPA FB 210 gt SPA FB 60 CIFB FB 0 Auxiliary driver Ep T T 0 Timer AV 0 STEP MB O Internal flag byte BUSY M 10 0 Activation bit 50032606 TO M 10 1 Timeout RET M 10 2 Return value UN M 10 2 BEB STP BE 5003B PHCENIX 6 11 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup Hardware setting for t
345. is message The parameter data is encoded in ASCII oyntax ooftware Revision Confirmation 8087 Quantity of subsequent words 77 1 8 Company name 9 24 Host type 25 40 Controller board type 41 56 Controller board option 57 63 Firmware version number 64 77 Date of the firmware version Send Software Revision V24 Confirmation 8089 Meaning This function corresponds to the Software Revision Confirmation message The only difference is that the data is transmitted exclusively via the V 24 RS 232 interface syntax same as Software Revision Confirmation 8089 9 60 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 2 6 Messages for Addressing Logical Address Error Confirmation 002b oee Chapter 4 35 The messages are indicated with a CTRL error on the front plate and entered in the diagnostic registers Quit Receive LLA Confirmation 00d0 Meaning The Receive Logical Local Bus Address Map Request 0039 command was executed Quit Implement Confirmation 00d3 Meaning The Implement All Logical Address Maps Request 0040 command was executed The previously defined address list is now valid Quit Receive Logical Addresses Confirmation 0084 Meaning The Receive Logical Addresses Request 004F command was executed Send Log Address Error Confirmation 80F5 Meaning The positive acknowledgment of the Send Log Address Error Request 0
346. is standard data block entered in this data block Flag words RRMW Request Response The services are activated by way of this flag word flag word Confirmation Indication This flag word indicates execution of the flag word order Interface drivers The two function blocks CON IND FB62 and REQ RES FB66 are referred to as interface drivers Commands are sent to the controller board and messages are fetched from it by means of these function blocks To achieve an optimized behavior with respect to time their locations in the cyclic program are important Placing the blocks e The CON IND function block is called conditionally at the start of the cycle e he REQ RES function block is called conditionally at the end of the cycle The communication services are also operated by way of these driver blocks The ISFP interface INTERBUS S Functions for the PLC was developed to provide the user with the possibility of using the services easily for open communication Part of this interface consists of two data blocks which must be specified by way of parameters of the interface drivers RRDB REQ RES header blocks CIDB CON IND header blocks Addressing Communication reference The communication references KR are transferred by the ADDRESS function block FB 72 Each module which is capable of communication is assigned one KR All communication stations are unambiguously identified with this communication reference The c
347. is read in the accumulator of the PLC using the command L PW 132 Depending on the module type the 12 bit analog value is encoded in binary code or two s complement 1 11111111111 Positiveendvalue 111111111110 Last but one positive end value 0 11111111111 Positiveendvalue O11111111110 Last but one positive end value 00000000000 1 First positive value loooooooooo00 Null 11111111111 1 First negative value Last but one negative end value l100000000000 Negativeendvalue Figure 3 22 The 12 bit analog value as two s complement PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 9 Four Channel Analog Output Modules Modules Access Addressing IBS AO1 IBS AO2 IBS AO3 The modules occupy four word addresses in the output area Data is accessed with the familiar commands L PW T PW L QW T QW etc The four channel analog output modules occupy only output addresses Address the analog modules so that their addresses are located outside the process image Every analog channel has a 16 bit OUT register in which the analog value is written The following figure shows schematically the address location of the analog channels at the terminal strip Figure 3 23 Address assignment of the analog channels 15 11 0 Bit 12 bit analog value 5003B315 Figure 3 24 Structu
348. is used enter an input address n and the output address for every module Address the digital modules so that their addresses are located in the process image PB 0 to PB 127 The following figure shows schematically the module terminals and the address location of the associated bits in the PLC Word n lt Word E Byte n gt lt Byte m gt n 6 n5 n 4 n 3 n 2 n 1n O m m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3m 2 m 1 m 0 6 L5 14 L3 L2 L1 L0 k7 k6 k5 k4 k3k2 k1 k0 Byte gt lt Byte k gt 5003B310 Figure 3 17 Address assignment for digital modules with 16 inputs and 16 outputs 35 II Even input address n 1 Even output address 1 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 8 Four Channel Analog Input Modules with Programmable Gain Modules IBS Al IBS AI 3 Access The modules occupy four word addresses in the input area and four word addresses in the output area If this is the case data is accessed with the familiar commands L PW T PW L QW T QW etc Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSINGi is used enter the input address n and the output address m for every module Address the analog modules so that their addresses are located outside the process image Every analog channel has a 16 bit OUT register which is used to program the gain and a 16 bit IN regi
349. ist begins K Quantity of the subsequent parameters in this case quantity of modules Y If you use bus stations which exceed a data width of 16 bits or the data of which is accessed in the MPM in steps of 8 bits you should set the Y value in accordance with the following table in order to keep the data consistency when the PLC accesses the MPM Y value Data width Paea Qarea fo 0 1 Standard setting 16 bit consistency 2 byte access 64 65 32 bit consistency 4 byte access 128 129 8 bit or 16 bit consistency single access 192 193 48 bit consistency 6 byte access XXX IN address for the process data Word modules even addresses only byte modules any address 8 32 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 2 4 Logical OUT Address Map FKT 3 The Logical OUT Address Map function communicates the list of logical OUT addresses of the modules in the INTERBUS S system to the controller board The addresses are entered into the parameter list in such a way that the index in the parameter list corresponds to the physical position of the modules in the INTERBUS S system The values of the remaining parameters are not relevant The number of parameters in the list of logical OUT parameters equals the number of parameters in the ID code list cf FKT 0 of this block This list does not become valid until the Implement All Logical Address Map CONTROL func
350. ist which contains descriptions of all communication objects data programs or variables Process data unit protocol data unit Request Response Confirmation Indication Indication of program states on the module STOP RUN START RUNNING Basic operations of a service Context Management Variable Access Sending of the order confirmation by the server after the order has been executed Service designation of the service type which indicates a non allowable access to a station PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Result BY Acknowledgment result of a service value 00 positive 01 to FF i negative Request D Service request by the client Service Service Read Write Initiate Start Stop Server D Service provider it executes the incoming service Subindex BY Pointer to a location in a variable field Index 0 complete field 1 one element of the field String of IS Manufacturer s name data string which a length as specified with the Vendor length parameter String of IS Module type designation data string with a length as specified with the Module length parameter String of IS Module revision data string with a length as specified under the Revision length parameter Supported te of the supported services 6 words XX XX XX XX XX XX
351. it no 1 CODE Service code PC Quantity of subsequent parameters KR Communication reference DB DW Pointer to the body with data block and data word 0 KH 00007 lst CODE ls KH 0000 PL 3 2 KA 00007 KR 57 3 KY 000 000 DB abe 4 KH OOOO ME Ne ODE 545 XH 0000 DJ 6 KH 0000 AR 7 KY 000 000 DB DW 8 KH 0000 ord CODE 9 KH 0000 PCO j 10 KH 0000 KR 56 KH 0AA LSCHCODE 57 KH 0000 PC 58 KH 0000 KR 59 KWF 000 000 DB DW 60 484 0000 61 6 62 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB23 CON IND standard DB Unexpected services and service bodies are entered in this data block A service which has been entered is indicated with the message bit O Structure CODE Service code PC 8 Quantity of subsequent parameters KR Communication reference Body Module dependent service body 0 KH OOOO CODE 4 M KH OOOO eG ys KH 000035 KR 3 on KH 0000 Body 4 KH 0000 91 KH 0000 6 KH 0000 43 KH 00005 9 KH OOOO SE KH 0000 10 KH O0DOO 11 KH 0000 12 KH 0000 UNS T KH 4 14 KH 4 w900 T5 KH J0000 16 5003B PH NIX 6 63 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Chapter 7 Installation This chapter provides information on the poss
352. ix Contact 0026 Hardware error Controller error Off RESET A division by zero took place The processor is outside of the address area which was defined by the CHK command Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again 0027 Hardware error Controller error Off RESET Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Not IMP Error 0028 Error type Hardware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause The CPU of the controller board has triggered an interrupt which has not been used Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact T Perform a RESET before using the controller board again ILL Error 0029 Error type Hardware firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause The CPU received a machine instruction which has not yet been implemented Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact T Perform a RESET before using the controller board again 5003B PHCENIX di CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Logical Address Error 002b Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset Further error Cause During checking
353. known Bus Module Confirmation 0065 Too Many K Modules Indication 0066 Receive CR Error Confirmation 0068 Check Configuration Error Confirmation 0069 Communication Not Ready Indication 006A Wrong Base Address Window Indication 006b Defective Address Decoder Indication 9 2 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Code Message Page 002B Logical Address Error Confirmation 9 61 004C Event Error Confirmation 9 65 0088 Start Bus Confirmation 9 41 009C Command Disabled Confirmation 9 41 00Ab Physical Configuration Map Valid Confirmation 9 44 000 Quit Receive Group Numbers Confirmation 9 44 00C6 Stop Bus Confirmation 9 42 00CA Quit Configure Bus Confirmation 9 44 00Cb Quit Set BK Alarm Logical Confirmation 9 49 0000 Quit Reset BK Alarm Logical Confirmation 9 49 00CE Quit Reset BK Alarm Physical Confirmation 9 50 00dO Quit Receive LLA Confirmation 9 61 00d3 Quit Implement Confirmation 9 61 00d8 Quit Alarm Stop Confirmation 9 42 00dA Quit Enable Event Number Confirmation 9 65 O0db Quit Disable Number Confirmation 9 65 0010 Quit Enable All Events Confirmation 9 65 O0dd Quit Disable All Events Confirmation 9 65 00E2 Quit Clear Display Confi
354. l bus concerned Remark This message applies only to some older types of bus terminal modules The types concerned can be taken from the table which follows the next message description Syntax Power Fail Indication 80A1 Quantity of subsequent words sd 1 Logical local bus address 5003B PHCENIX v CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Battery Indication 80A2 Meaning On some special modules the 24 V supply voltage is battery buffered If this supply voltage fails this message indicates the change to battery operation The parameter gives the logical or physical local bus address of the bus terminal module concerned Remark This message only applies to some older types of bus terminal modules The types concerned are listed in the following table Syntax Battery Indication _ 80A2 Quantity of subsequent words 1 Logical local bus address Older types of bus terminal modules which are recognized by the Power Fail Indication 80A1 and Battery Indication 80A2 messages Bus terminal module Identification code of the bus terminal IBS 220 BK 20 IBS 220 BK Version A 24 IBS 24 BK 28 IBS 24 BK I O 23 IBS 24 BK I O Version A 27 IBS 24 BK VersionA 2C Module Request Indication 80A3 Meaning A module request was reported by an I O module with module request function Parameter 1
355. le number with the 10 most errors XXXX Error counter high byte XXXX 3 n 4 1 Error counter low byte XXXX n Quantity of modules to which an error could be assigned maximum 10 Send Last Module Status Error Confirmation Function Hemark oyntax Key 9 58 8117 This message is sent after the Send Last Module Status Error Request 010B commands has been called It communicates a list with the numbers of the local buses in which one of the last 10 module status errors has been detected The order of the up to 10 entries in the list corresponds to the occurrence of the module status error oend Last Module Status Error 8117 Confirmation Quantity of subsequent words PC Result 0000 Local bus number with the last module XXXX status error ocal bus number with the first of the last XXXX 10 module status errors Quantity of module status errors up to 10 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Send Last Module Status Error V24 Confirmation 8118 Function The function corresponds to the Send Last Module Error Confirmation message The only difference is that the data is transmitted exclusively via the V 24 RS 232 interface Remark See remark on Send Last Module Error Confirmation syntax Send Last Module Status Error V24 8118 Confirmation Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 Resu
356. le with the Alarm Stop Request 004A command PCP channel e The Peripherals Communication Protocol PCP is not used further e The established connections are not automatically aborted Services which are possibly to be expected are processed further after the data traffic has started again Messages Positive acknowledgment Stop Bus Confirmation 00C6 Meaning The process data channel and the possibly used PCP channel are no longer used Remark e The IB RUN LED goes off e The parameter list is not deleted syntax Stop Bus Cycle Request 0002 5003B PHCENIX vn CONTACT 9 Commands and Messages Alarm Stop Request THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 004A Function The command causes a RESET on the bus The data traffic on the bus is stopped Modules with process data set their output values to 0 The command is executed immediately after the running data cycle has been completed Effects Process data channel PCP channel Further operation Messages Positive acknowledgment e The cyclic data traffic on the bus is stopped The existing process data image of the modules connected to the bus is kept statically and is not renewed e he command switches the process output data to a safe state reset of the outputs e he Peripherals Communication Protocol PCP is not used further e he established connections are not automatically aborted Services which are poss
357. ll be a different allocation between the codes which are output by the module and the measures temperatures Table 3 9 Temperature allocation for a measuring range of 0 600 C Binary code Hex code Temperature Scale MSB LSB_ MSB_LSB 599 8535 C FS 1LSB 1111 1111 1111b FFFh 450 0000 C 4 FS 1100 0000 0000b COOh 300 0000 C 2 FS 1000 0000 0000b 800h 150 0000 C 4 FS 0100 0000 0000b 400h 1 0 1465 C 4 1LSB 0000 0000 0001b 001 0 0000 C ZERO 0000 0000 00000 0000 3 38 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces Moreover the IN data words provide the controller board with coded information on the measuring range of the respective module Only the decoding of this measuring range information allows to select an appropriate algorithm for converting the 12 bit data words into temperature values The measuring range information is transferred in bits 12 14 of the IN data words It is the same for all channels of an IBS PT100A module The open circuit detection sets bit 15 MSB when the connection to the measuring resistor shunt is interrupted or no sensor is connected to the measuring channel In this case the measured and transmitted temperature value is to be ignored Bits 0 11 contain the digitized temperature value of the respective measuring channel 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 54 3
358. ller board transfers messages to the PLC cf Figure 8 3 2 Controlled start The controller board transfers messages to the PLC cf Figure 8 3 with EEPROM The controller board does not transfer messages to the PLC when the card Disable All Messages command is sent via the EEPROM card cf Figure 8 4 3 Controlled start The controller board does not transfer messages to the PLC This state is canceled after the PLC has sent a command cf Figure 8 3 8 8 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS NAME IBDB FEN3 D V RRST Q CIMW CIFB H STEP BUSY H O ET 50038 IST RRMW V24 The parameters marked PCP are needed only if PCP stations Counter are to be addressed Cf Chapter 8 4 Use of Communication These parameters are assigned a 0 DB 0 KF 0 if there are only I O modules in the INTERBUS S system Enter the number of the activation and message words 1 4 to be used into the memory location DL 18 of the IBDB OB 20 21 22 SPA FB210 E INITIB AV 0 5003B804 Figure 8 5 The INITIB initialization block FB60 or FB61 U M 12 7 SPB FB 60 INITIB DB 9 KF 160 KF 1 DB 0 DB 0 KF 0 KE EO FB 63 T 0 MB 12 BD e M 3 M 14 7 INTERBUS data block Base address of window 3 Controlled start Standard DB for REQ RES Standard DB for CON IND REQ RES ac
359. llowing pages 3 If an address list is not to be transferred the value ZERO must be entered for the pointer to the data block DB 0 Using the lists The following table shows when definition lists have to be sent to the controller board depending on the communication register setting the addressing mode and the use of PCP communication Operating mode Addressing Lists o B iN ourj GR GRK KR Automatic Physical o O0 O O O O 0 Contoled Physical X X 0 oO X X X Controlled Logical X xX 1 1 X X X Key 0 Nolist IN IN address list 1 List OUT OUT address list X List only when required GR Group definition list ID Identification code list GRK Group definition error characteristics LB Local bus bus segment list KR Communication reference list 5003B PHCENIX 8 65 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 5 1 ID CodeList The physical bus structure is entered in this list with reference to its ID codes Local bus 0 80 is the local bus the bus terminal module of which is linked to the PLC through the remote bus Local bus 1 LB is coupled through the remote bus to the bus terminal module of local bus 0 Local bus 2 LB is coupled through the remote bus to the terminal bus module of local bus 1 etc The first module Mj of a local bus is a bus terminal module All further modules M M area input output mod
360. lt 0000 2 Local bus number with the last module XXXX status error n Local bus number with the first of the last xxxx 10 module status errors Key n Quantity of module status errors up to 10 Send Actual Configuration Confirmation 8119 Function This message is send after the Send Actual Configuration Request 010D has been called It communicates the ID code list of the currently connected configuration Remark When the bus is in the STOP mode changes in the configuration will not be detected or communicated syntax osend Actual Configuration Confirmation 8119 Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 0000 n ID o XXxx Key n Quantity of the connected bus stations 5003B PHCENIX 9 59 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Send Actual Configuration V24 Confirmation 811A Function This function corresponds to the Send Actual Configuration Confirmation message The only difference is that the data is transmitted exclusively via the V 24 RS 232 interface Remark See remark on Send Actual Configuration Confirmation message syntax Send Actual Configuration V24 811A Confirmation Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 0000 n ID o XXXX Key n Quantity of the connected bus stations 9 2 5 Messages for System Control Send Software Revision Confirmation 8087 Meaning The description of the host controller board version is given with th
361. m n 4 1 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 6 Digital Modules with 32 Outputs Modules IBS 24 DO 32 Access The up to date data of the modules is made available in the MPM of the controller board Data is linked with the familiar commands O S O etc Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used enter an even base address n for every module Address the digital modules so that their addresses are located in the process image PB 0 to PB 127 The following figure shows schematically the module terminals and the address location of the associated bits in the PLC Word n gt 4 Byte n gt lt Byte m gt n n 6 n 5 n 4 n3n 2n 1n 0 m 7m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3m 2m 1 m O 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 LO k7 k 6 k5 k4 k3k2 k1 k0 4 Byte gt lt Byte k gt lt Word 5003A309 Figure 3 16 Address assignment for digital modules with 32 outputs Even output address n n e2 n 3 35 Il PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 7 Digital Modules with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs Modules Access Addressing IBS 24 BK I O T The up to date data of the modules is made available in the MPM of the controller board Data is linked with the familiar commands Al S O etc When LOGICAL ADDRESSING
362. m has an ID register IDentification register which includes information such as module type number of I O registers as well as statuses and error states The I O modules also have I O registers for the process data transmission There are two types of cycles in an INTERBUS S system The ID cycle which is run upon request or to initialize the INTERBUS S system When the host controller board is in the ID cycle it reads out the ID registers of all modules and uses this information to generate the process image The data cycle is the actual operating cycle which controls the data transfer In the data cycle input data of all modules is read out of the registers and output data is shifted from the host controller board to the modules opecial test methods ensure a correct data transmission after every cycle f no errors occurred during the data transmission the host controller board accepts the data and or outputs the data on the modules f an error occurred the data of the erroneous cycle is rejected because a new cycle is completed faster than the correction of corrupted data 5003B PHCENIX ys CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview 1 2 2 Error Protection Mechanisms As a sensor actuator bus the INTERBUS S system has been designed for the use in industrial environments In order to ensure a secure data transmission under the most various conditions of an industrial field of appl
363. mber for the input address Bit number 0000 hex to OOOF hex Structure of the Reset2 Out In10 instruction oyntax Key oF cnm Reset2 Out In10 Output address Bit number for the output address Input address Bit number for the input address Bit number 0000 hex to OOOF hex Function of the Reset 2 Out In10 and Reset 2 Out In 01 instructions The instructions Reset 2 Out In01 and Reset 2 Out InfO have the same functions as the instructions Reset Out In01 and Reset Out In10 The instruction format is 5 words long so that 16 bit addresses are available 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT 9 31 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Structure of the Reset Out In01 Switch 0009 instruction Syntax 1 Reset Out In01 Switch 0009 2 Address of the bit manipulation register 3 Bit number of the bit manipulation register B 4 Output address 5 Bit number for the output address B 6 Input address 7 Bit number for the input address B Key B Bit number 0000 hex to OOOF hex structure of the Reset Out In10 Switch 000A instruction syntax 1 Reset Out In10 Switch 000A 2 Address of the bit manipulation register 3 Bit number of the bit manipulation register B 4 Output address 5 Bit number for the output address B 6 Input address 7 Bit number for the input address B Key B Bit number 0000 hex to OOOF hex Function of the Rese
364. medy Check the definition lists of the group definitions Invalid EC State 0057 Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again 4 50 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 5003B PHCENIX d CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Invalid EC State 0058 Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset HESET Further error Remedy A Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again Unexpected Group Number 0059 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Causes Remedy 4 52 e When a group is enabled or disabled a group number was specified that had not been defined beforehand e he transferred group number is outside of the permissible area e It is attempted to disable a module with process data and remote bus connection which cannot be disabled This error is only reported and does not influence the further response of the controller board Check the application program for non existent group numbers and incorrect numbers of parameters PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT BK Alarm Failed
365. meter count Quantity of subsequent words corresponds to the quantity of modules op Current number of the module s process data il ID code is printed on the modules 5003B PHCENIX 2H CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Receive Group Numbers Request 0049 Function Prerequisite Messages oyntax Key 9 12 The segmentation of the bus structure in groups allows to switch on or off the bus segments local bus installation remote bus which branch off from the main bus line commands Switch Group Off Request or Switch Group On Request A group may consist of one or several bus segments Assign all bus segments except for the segments in installation remote buses to one group In the initial state after the voltage has been switched on after the RESET button has been used or Configure INTERBUS Request has been called all bus segments are combined in group O When this command is used the INTERBUS S cycle must have been stopped Positive acknowledgment Quit Receive Group Numbers Confirmation 000 Meaning The group definition was accepted and is valid Negative acknowledgment Receive Group Numbers Failed Confirmation 0055 Meaning An error was detected when the list was checked Remote bus stations which cannot be disconnected e g bus terminal modules with I O functions must be assigned their own group number Depending on the selected t
366. module error n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins XX Local bus number with defective module Diagnostic register and front plate Did a module error occur Yes No Update display write data block Bit RET 1 Bit RET 0 5003A834 8 78 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 6 5 Local Bus Module Error FKT 4 With the Local Bus Module Error function the modules that have reported a module error can be recalled for each local bus The number of the local bus is entered in the flag byte number of the block Two parameters are returned for each module The first parameter contains the number of the module in the local bus 0 7 The bus terminal module has always the number 0 The second parameter contains the identification code ID code of the defective module If an error occurred in the system the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If the system runs without bus errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 i e the query of the error source results in a negative acknowledgment of the Module Error function m L 2 1 KY 000 00X No ofthe module in the local bus m L 2 KY 000 YYY Dcode of the module DB n DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1 2 1 KY 000 00X No ofthe module in the local bus m 1 2 K
367. n every module and in the controller board itself At the end of every transmission cycle it is checked at the beginning and at the end of a transmission path if the values of the check words match If the values do not match this will be reported to the controller board through all following modules and a new cycle is started with current data A Hamming distance of 4 is reached with this check Test routines In order to detect hardware faults on the INTERBUS S host controller board various test routines are executed after a RESET or a voltage recovery These special routines check the CPU of the INTERBUS S protocol chip the EPROM and RAM the logic circuitries and functions of the various components 1 4 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview After error free execution of the test routines the green LED READY lights up Furthermore the connected INTERBUS S system is initialized and its functions are checked To this end the controller board activates one bus segment after another and tests the functioning of each First the connection between the host controller board and the first bus terminal module or the first remote bus module is enabled When no errors occur a local bus or installation remote bus which is connected to the bus terminal is initialized Afterwards the connection to the next remote bus station is enabled In this way all segments of an INTERBUS S
368. n segment display shows the numbers of the ten modules with the most transmission errors The position 9180 shows the module that has most errors the position 9181h the module with the second most errors etc If there are less than 10 modules with errors the seven segment display shows less than 10 module numbers Ad is displayed on the free locations Transmission errors which occur between the last module and the controller board are displayed with the module number FF In addition all data LEDs light up The hundred position of the module numbers is also indicated with the I O data LEDs The LED 0 lights up for the module numbers 0 through 99 the LED 1 for the module numbers 100 trough 199 the LED 2 for the module numbers 200 through 299 and so on LED 5 lights up for the module numbers 500 51 1 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Displays on the seven segment display with the coding switch position 919x When the coding switches are in position 9190 the seven segment display shows the number of the local bus station in which the last module status error occurred The position 9191 indicates the number of the local bus station of the last but one module status error and so on Displays on the seven segment display with the coding switch position 94xx to 99xx When the coding switches are in position 9400 the seven segment display shows the number of modules in the cur
369. nds This error message is generated if the resources are exhausted This may be the case for instance if the PLC sends a large number of commands in a short time but the controller board is not capable of processing them fast enough Check the application program Invalid D State 0050 Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact Perform a RESET before using the controller board again 5003B PHCENIX 4 49 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces Invalid D Condition 0051 Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact T Perform a RESET before using the controller board again Receive Group Number Failed 0055 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Causes The list which was transferred with the RECEIVE GROUP NUMBERS REQUEST code 0049 command contains erroneous entries Error causes may be e Invalid local bus numbers e Multiple assignment of local bus numbers e Invalid group number e Combining several modules with bus terminal functionality to one group by using modules with bus terminal functionality without outgoing interfaces local bus remote bus etc e Incorrect number of parameters Re
370. ng The system could be started The controller board starts the cyclic reading and setting of inputs and outputs Negative acknowledgment Start Bus Not Possible Confirmation 00E3 Remark The IB RUN LED is not illuminated Meaning e all groups are switched off e the maximum possible bus configuration has been exceeded e hardware error of the controller board Negative acknowledgment Bus System Error Indication 0038 Meaning An error has occurred which does not permit further bus operation Remark The general message Bus Error Information Indication 80C4 provides a detailed error description Further details The data traffic is not stopped in the event of the Module Error Indication 80A0 error message which may occur after a positive or negative acknowledgment The BSA LED is illuminated when the bus is started after a local bus or installation remote bus error A prerequisite for this is the group definition 9 6 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Stop Bus Cycle Request 0002 Function The command stops the cyclic data traffic on the bus Prerequisite None Effects Process data e The cyclic data traffic is stopped The existing channel process data image of the modules connected to the bus is statically kept and not renewed e The command does not switch the process output data in the safe state reset of the outputs This is only possib
371. ng the address lists 7 Switch on the voltage and change switch from STOP to RUN mode cold restart PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description The acknowledgment behavior of the host controller board is determined by the mode DCB DAB and the start automatic controlled This connection becomes important when the application dynamically changes the bus system and therefore enlarges and or reduces the address area which the IBS modules represent PS F Mode of operation 3 m Automatic controlled 2 E DAB DCB mode ir Heserved 5003A208 Figure 2 17 Setting the operating modes DCB or DAB DCB mode In this operating mode all addresses which are occupied by INTERBUS S I O modules and registers will be acknowledged to the PLC in the cyclic part a Automatic start otarting at the base addresses of windows 1 and 2 all modules are addressed and acknowledged The address area of the l Os depends on the space requirement of the modules The setting of the window area refers to the input and output area of the PLC The set window lengths must be shorter than the address area of the modules The diagnostic registers are located below the base addresses When the automatic start is used the set window lengths for the I O address area of the modules is not checked for its correct setting b Controlled start All module and register addresses e g diagnostic regis
372. nly byte modules any address 5003B PHCENIX 8 33 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 2 5 Communication Reference FKT 4 The Communication Reference function communicates the list of communication references KRs to the controller board A communication reference is the logical address of the communication stations in the INTERBUS S system The communication references are entered in the parameter list in such a way that the index in the parameters list corresponds to the physical position of the modules in the INTERBUS o system The values of the remaining parameters are not relevant The number of parameters in the list of the communication references equals the number of parameters in the ID code list cf FKT 0 of this block Only values between 2 and 63 may be entered The values have to be allocated N in an ascending order starting with 2 The list does not become valid until the Init Communication CONTROL function FB 68 FKT 7 is activated Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 OOK m 1 KY 000 000 Module without KR m 2 KY 000 000 Module without KR m 3 KY 000 OXX Module with KR m k KY 000 OXX Module with KR In the bus configuration the 3rd and kth modules are communication stations n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of subsequent parameters in this case module q
373. nostics notes on 4 10 displays 4 35 free data transmission 1 3 indication 2 7 4 5 in local bus 4 18 in remote bus 4 17 in the module 4 19 LED 4 35 list of 4 36 messages 8 113 protection mechanisms 1 4 type 4 35 Errors display of 4 6 Event code 8 36 handling 5 1 identifier 8 36 8 61 map 8 35 Event OFF 8 61 5003B Event ON 8 61 Event signaling blocks 5 12 EVENT 8 23 8 83 Extended address area 2 11 Front plate components 2 4 Front plate 2 3 Function block 2 1 8 2 8 86 G Gain register 3 31 General method of operation 1 3 Group definition 8 70 Group Error Characteristics 8 50 8 72 Group Nos List 8 70 Group Numbers 8 37 Group OFF 8 60 Group ON 8 60 Guidelines of VDE 0100 7 2 H Hand Held Monitor 7 9 using the 4 33 Hardware interfaces pin assignments of the 7 3 Hardware settings 2 15 2 19 Host controller board 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 11 2 2 diagnostics 2 18 functions 1 11 installation 2 9 operation 2 1 startup 2 17 Host output bit 8 43 Humidity 2 41 I O address area 2 11 8 86 I O area of the PLC with IBS S5 DCB l 2 12 I O data of disabled local buses 4 4 I O DATA 2 5 I O status Indicator 2 5 4 26 IB data cycle 4 35 IB reset 4 35 PHCENIX o CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS IBDB 8 10 8 14 8 18 8 49 8 52 IBS 24 RELS 3 36 IBS BA SL 3 37 IBS PT 100 3 38 measuring range of the 3 38
374. not up to date inputs are read and no up to date outputs are set In the controlled start mode the bus cycle is not re started no RUN All parameter settings are lost log addressing event definitions PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 0 1 3 4 n 8 0 5 9 1 O 10 205 11 30 12 405 13 5 O 14 60 15 7 MODE ADDRESS BYTE n 1 0 0 1 10 2 20 3 30 4140 5 50 6 605 7 170 5003A418 READY CTRLO BASP O RB RUN B BSA MOD decimal The module error MOD indicates an error at XX RUN the peripheral side of an I O module Possible causes e Failure of peripheral voltage of the module indicated with a green LED e Short circuit of an output E LED The error cause influences the performance at the outputs of a module with an error A short circuit at an actuator can depending on its power consumption the other outputs of the group concerned Note e The bus which is not affected by the module error continues to operate e he error is indicated on the controller board he error message is generated with an edge and lasts even after the error has been removed Clear the message with the CLEAR DISPLAY REQUEST SEND MODULE ERROR REQUEST commands see Chapter 9 Figure 4 12 Module error
375. nt plate C Remote bus interface D Serial V 24 RS 232 interface E Printed circuit board PHCENIX ds CONTACT Installation online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 7 3 1 System Connector The system connector connects the PLC and the controller board It is plugged into the backplane bus of the PLC Table 7 1 shows the system connector assignment Table 7 1 Signal assignment of the system connector Pin Jz l2 ov 14 88 J e 0800 8 MEMR _ ADB 1 10 MEMW__ ADB 2 12 RDY ADB 3 14 DBO ADB 4 JIRA 16 DB 1 ADB 5 IRB 18 DB 2 ADB 6 IRC 20 DB3 ADB 7 HIRD 22 DB4 ADB8 24 DB5 ADB9 26 DB6 ADB10 28 DB 7 ADB 11 30_ _ 282 32 ov 7 4 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation 7 3 2 Remote Bus Interface The following may be connected to the remote bus connector female up to 256 local bus segments up to 320 modules including BKs up to 256 INTERBUS S words Figure 7 3 shows the pin assignment for the remote bus connector female and the male connector belonging to it as well as important information for the shielding D SUB 9 pos male O DO 6 green ie 6 DO 1 yellow DI 7 pink 5 9 DI 2 gray O CO
376. nt with the command with the error 3 Logical local bus address not in the permissible range 4 Logical local bus address exists more than once 5 Logical address is outside the permissible address range 7 Two address areas overlap 8 Illegal odd address 9 Illegal bus register length 10 ID codes differ 11 Byte addresses of IN and OUT modules are in the same word 12 The specified address is illegal 13 The IN word is located before the OUT word in a module location address 14 Remote bus level outside the value range 0 1 15 Remote bus level 1 is not possible at this point no installation remote bus 16 Implementation not possible as the bus is in the RUN state In this case list code and parameter number are 0 17 Incorrect consistency declaration in the logical address list 9 62 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Switch Information Confirmation 80E5 Meaning The set base node address and the number of the following nodes is sent to the host upon request of the Send Switch Information Request 0050 command oyntax oWitch Information Confirmation 80E5 Quantity of subsequent words 1 Base address of window 1 BE ADR 2 Length of window 1 00 LE 3 Base address of window 2 BE ADR 4 Length of window 2 00 LE 5 Base address of window 3 BE ADR Key BE Area
377. o arises rE Aan S EEEE 8 106 8 4 3 5 Information Report Indication 8 107 8 4 3 6 FOO 9006 8 107 8 4 3 7 Write Indication 4 nnn nnne 8 107 8 4 3 8 Initiate Indication 49 8 108 8 4 3 9 Read Response 4 8 108 8 4 3 10 Write Response 8 108 8 4 3 11 Start 68 0076 6 8 109 8 4 3 12 OP RG DO E E E 8 109 8 4 4 Application GLBOMMUNICATION eeeeseeeeeeeee eene ne nene nnne nnn nnns 8 110 8 4 5 Communication Error 8 2068 8 113 8 4 5 1 Error Messages for a Connection 0 0 1 8 113 8 4 5 2 Error Messages for the Reject Service nnee 8 115 8 4 5 3 Additional Error Messages
378. oad short circuit group by group single DI DO e Status LED for each I O channel Indicators on the bus terminal modules e Supply voltage e Remote bus monitoring e Local bus monitoring e Operating indication for INTERBUS S On some bus terminal modules there is an additional pushbutton Reconfiguration that triggers a message to the controller board re initialization of the bus system This is possible when operation continues e g after the repair of a local bus 4 30 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 6 1 Diagnostic Functions on I O Modules U Logic voltage O le 111 B G9 ni O ooo0oO00o000000 0 Diagnostic LEDs eOooo0o0O0O0O0 Oo000000 o Yellow I O status Green USwitching voltage e Hed E Short circuit 5003A419 Figure 4 21 Example for LED diagnostics on an I O module 5003B PHCENIX us CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 6 2 Diagnostic Functions on Bus Terminal Modules Diagnostic LEDs UL Logic voltage RC Incoming remote bus ready BA Bus active Supply voltage E Error in the local bus branch LD
379. ode of the 69 nennen nnns 3 3 3 2 Process Data Interface 3 8 3 2 1 Example Configuration amp 99 eese nene 3 9 3 2 2 Order of the Modules on the Bus 3 11 3 3 Physical Addressing DCB MOde ccccsscccseeeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeesseees 3 12 3 3 1 FUNC TOG e a E 3 12 3 3 2 3 12 3 3 3 Address Orient amp tiog cccccccsececseccccececseecsceeeceeeesseeeceeeeseeesceseeceeeseeesees 3 14 3 4 Logical Addressing DCB Mode 3 17 3 4 1 3 17 3 4 2 Structure of an INTERBUS S Address 1 3 18 3 4 3 ATA 3 19 3 5 Access to INTERBUS S 0 68 3 23 3 5 1 Digital Modules with 16 Inputs
380. of the module must be specified as its address Besides the address the address location P or Q area is also entered The parameter count module quantity is entered in data word m 0 Parameter meanings EE DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1 KY 000 000 LB bus terminal module module M m 2 KY 00Y XXX Local bus module M OUT addresses m 3 KY OOY XXX Local bus module M IN OUT addresses m 4 KY 000 000 Local bus module Ms IN addresses m 5 KY 000 000 LB bus terminal module module M m 6 KY OOY XXX Local bus module M OUT addresses m KY OOY XXX Local bus module M IN OUT addresses m 8 KY 000 000 Local bus module M IN addresses m 9 KY 000 000 Local bus module Mg IN addresses m k 1 KY 000 000 LB bus terminal module module M m k KY OOY XXX Local bus module M OUT addresses In the bus configuration the 2nd module M the 3rd module Ms the 6th module Mj the 7th module Mg and kth module M _ have OUT addresses No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored No of the DW with which the parameter list begins Quantity of subsequent parameters in this case module quantity 0 Address in the P area 1 Address in the Q area XXX Logical OUT address of the process data word modules only even addresses and byte modules any address lt A3 5 5003B PHCENIX 8 69 CONTACT 8 ISFP 8 2 5 5 Group Nos List THE ONLI
381. off and the remaining system is started Groups which have not been specified are switched off in the event of an error the INTERBUS S system After the defective bus segment has been identified the Groups Error Characteristics determines whether the remaining bus configuration is to be activated or not If an error occurs in the bus system the output data of the stations is reset in 5003B PHCENIX voe CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 35 The error in the bus system is reported with the Bus System Error Indication 0038 and Bus Error Information Indication 80C4 messages further information is given where the messages are described Depending on the selected mode the defective group is switched off and the process data traffic is started or the bus remains in the STOP state The process output data which has been used for bit manipulation might be reset when a group is switched on Ensure by means of the application program that this data is set to the correct state oyntax Define Groups Error Characteristics 0060 Request Quantity of subsequent words PC n Mode Group number n M Gr 15 14 0 Bit Key PC Parameter count maximum value 255 M Bit 15 only Handling the groups in the event of an error Bit 15 Value 0 switch off Value 1 continue operation Bits 14 to 0 Gr 00 x Gr lt FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal
382. ol system IBS S5 DCB I T SIMATIC 85 PLCs Types 5115 U o5 130 WB S5 135 U S5 150 U 150 S S5 155 U Others upon request Bus system Sensor actuator INTERBUS S Bus INTERBUS S compatible modules Types Different I O modules Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Third party Inquiries to INTERBUS S Club Expansion Max 256 local busses incl bus terminal modules with I O function and installation remote bus modules Max 320 modules incl BKs and PCP stations Max 256 INTERBUS S words Max 62 PCP stations Diagnostics Overall system diagnostics by means of front plate diagnostics diagnostic registers software diagnostics via the PLC RS 232 and PC monitor Interfaces Two wire remote bus connection 9 pos D SUB female connector RS 232 connection 9 pos D SUB male connector Hardware oize The controller board occupies two narrow slots 115 U with adaptation casing 130 U 155 U directly pluggable 2 42 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Address area P area Q area Multiprocessor operation Yes Interrupt operation No Current consumption 1 3 A typ at 5 volts max 2 5 A Temperature Operation 0 C to 60 C Storage 25 C to 80 C Humidity Operation 70 Storage 95 EEPROM 16 64 kbytes memory card format PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 44 PHCENIX
383. oller board is inserted into the mounting rack of the control system The controller boards for the programmable logic controllers PLCs always couple passively to the I O bus of the respective control system like system contained I O units In the control system the host controller board operates like a system contained I O board so that all control functions and programming commands can be handled in the usual way In addition it ensures the cyclic data traffic with the exception of the PC interface boards and the error display in the INTERBUS S system There are two types of controller boards which are called DCB Diagnostic Controller Board and DAB Diagnose Anschaltbaugruppe Host controller board functions Control of the cyclic INTERBUS S protocol with the exception of the PC interface boards Transfer of output and or input data to the IBS S modules and or the control system Monitoring of the INTERBUS S system Fault detection Determining the type and location of the fault Reporting errors to the control system Optical diagnostic functions Operating indicators Error indicators V O status p m LI hea Pa Ea oO fj L3 z mnm EE O 2 qic CO 1072 2 2 COO e 11 3 3 3 12 4 4 44 O E EE 157 O
384. omatic start sequence is processed e After the voltage of the PLC has been switched on the controller board runs its self test and answers with READY e he modules are addressed with regard to their physical order in the bus e The addresses are automatically stored in the decoder s EEPROM e Bus operation is started The READY and RUN LEDs are on pis 9 Mode of operation 3 ml Automatic controlled 2 Nm DAB DCB mode 1 EE W Reserved 5003A207 Figure 6 1 Setting of DIP switch SW6 which is used to select the automatic start mode Controlled start The startup in this mode of operation depends on the type of EEPROM which is fitted The EEPROM determines the controller board s startup behavior A controlled start sequence is processed e After the voltage of the PLC has been switched on the host controller board runs through its self test and answers with READY e The start sequence which follows is either determined by an EEPROM or by the PLC with function blocks 6 2 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup e he modules are addressed in accordance with the start sequence in their physical or logical order e After the modules have been addressed the addresses are automatically stored in the decoder s EEPROM e Bus operation is started Mode of operation 3 Nm Automatic controlled 2 m DAB DCB mode i HM Reserved 5003A208
385. ommunication references of the modules are entered in a communication reference list 8 88 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1 KY 000 000 Module without KR m 2 KY 000 000 Module without KR m 3 KY 000 002 Module with KR m k KY 000 OXX Module with KR In this bus configuration the 3rd and the kth module are communication stations n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of the subsequent parameters in this case module quantity XX Communication references 2 63 The number of the communication relationships between the controller board and the third module is KR 2 and between the controller board and the kth module KR XX 8 4 1 4 Service Structure In the PLC a service is stored in the form of data words in data blocks The service is subdivided into a service header and a service body The service header consists of three words and the length of the body depends on the specific service CODE B PC Service header KR 7 PC Service l a E Service body J CODE Selection of the service primitive PC Parameter count Number of words of the body 1 KR Communication reference Number of the communication reference 5003A826 Figure 8 43 PCP service structure in the PLC 50
386. on 809d Remark The yellow BSA LED on the front plate is illuminated Negative acknowledgment Unexpected Group Number Confirmation 0059 Meaning e Unknown or invalid group numbers Switch Group Off Request 0021 Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Group number of the group to be switched 00xx on XX 00 xx lt FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal PHCENIX TE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Define Groups Error Characteristics Request 0060 Function This command defines the operating state of the bus system after an error has occurred Groups which are not directly affected by an error which leads to the switching off of groups may be operated further on request Prerequisite Use the Receive Group Numbers Request command for the group definitions before calling this command Messages Positive Quit Groups Error Characteristics Confirmation acknowledgment OOF6 Negative Groups Error Characteristics Failed Confirmation acknowledgment 8077 Hemark In the event of a negative acknowledgment the definitions which have been made and positively acknowledged by this command are still valid Parameter MODE 0 If an error occurs in the group which has been assigned to the GROUP NUMBER parameter the data traffic on the bus is stopped MODE 1 If an error occurs in the group which has been assigned to the GROUP NUMBER parameter this group is switched
387. on bit INITIB ADDRESS CON IND REQ RES DB PCP header tables InterBus data block Base address of window 3 Controlled start disable message REQ RES standard DB CON IND standard DB Activation word Signal word CON IND auxiliary driver Timer Internal flag byte Activation bit Timeout Return value PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup ADR SPA FB 62 NAME CON IND IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block CIDB MB 18 CON IND data block T T 1 Timer TO M 8 3 Timeout UN M 8 0 U M 10 0 SPB FB 72 NAME ADDRESS IBDB A DB 9 InterBus data block BUSY M 10 0 Activation bit 3r T z Timer IDDB DB 10 DB ID code list IDDW KF 0 DW LBDB DB 11 DB Bus segment list LBDW KF 0 DW INDB DB 12 DB IN address list INDW KF 0 DW OUDB DB 13 DB OUT address list OUDW KF 0 DW KRDB DB O DB KR address list KRDW KF 0 DW GRDB DB DB Group definitions GRDW KF 0 DW MODE M 10 5 Mode of display EREG A MW 12 Error register TO M 10 1 Timeout RET M 10 2 Return value SPA FB 66 NAME REQ RES IBDB D Be 9 InterBus data block RRDB MB 19 Header DB for REQ RES L T 3 Timer TO M 8 4 Timeout U M 8 0 INITIB M 10 0 ADDRESS SPB LOOP UN M 10 2 BEB DOE daz 5003B PHCENIX 6 17 CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB10 Identification co
388. onents com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces Control system e g PLC V 24 RS 232 Interface Process dara Commands Commands Messages Messages INTERBus S controller board i 0 i E Ts x E ge lt Y Y E E EEPROM ES V 24 source only 5 a o i ow Command sequences triggered by activation bits 0 4 15 Y Y e Y Control unit Processing of commands and messages w Bus System 5003B508 Figure 5 8 Function diagram for the processing of commands and messages PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 0 After power up the switch returns to the initial position A and provides the connection between the control unit and the V 24 RS 232 interface 1a The first command which the PLC sends sets the switch permanently to position B process 1b 2a The Disable All Messages command resets the switch to position A process 2b 3a The Enable All Messages command activated by the EEPROM card via a corresponding activation bit sets the switch in position B process 3b this is necessary if no commands are to be sent with ISFP but messages are to be received 5 3 3 2 Commands The commands are described in Chapter 9 Commands and Messa
389. onfiguration Indication 8106 Quantity of subsequent words 1 Group number 2 Local bus address GROUP NUMBER parameter This parameter contains the group number of the connected local bus Value range 0 to 255 LOCAL BUS ADDRESS parameter This parameter contains the local bus address of the connected local bus Value range 0 to 255 Send Group Number Confirmation 8112 Meaning Depending on the result this message returns the local bus address es and the associated group number s in a word oriented form or an error code when the command could not be executed Positive message syntax Send Group Number Confirmation 8112 Quantity of subsequent words 2n 1 1 Result 00xx 2 Local bus address 1 XXXX 3 Group number 1 XxxX _XXXX 2n Local bus address n XXXX 2n41 Group number n XXXX LOCAL BUS ADDRESS parameter This parameter contains the local bus address of the connected local bus value range 0 to 255 GROUP NUMBER parameter This parameter contains the group number of the connected local bus value range 0 255 Negative message syntax Send Group Number Confirmation 8112 Quantity of subsequent words 3 1 Result Error code FFxx 2 Error code Additional code XXXX 3 Additional code XXXX 9 46 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Send Group Status Confirmation 811
390. ongs the INTERBUS S scan time by maximally 40 us quantity of instructions The instructions are stored in an instruction list on the controller board The instructions given in this command are added to the list when the first parameter is not zero A possibly existing instruction list is deleted by setting the first parameter O In the case of the command parameters the addresses have to be given in a special format The logical address is the address which is used with INTERBUS S to address the process data such as the address of a byte for byte oriented modules or a word for word oriented modules The bit number used designates the bit within process data item which has been specified by the logical address The bits are counted like addresses see figure above Bit manipulation is only possible in the address area of the binary I Os The meaning of the addresses and their structures are given in the description of the individual commands n n 1 Byte Word oriented module 15 8 7 0 Bit n Byte Byte oriented module 7 0 Bit 5003A832 Figure 8 23 Word orientation byte orientation One input bit and one output bit are defined for each bit manipulation The base address and the bit number of the input output are used for the definition Two designations are used for the output bit manipulation 1 Bus outpu
391. ont Plate Components MODE ADDRESS BYTE n n 1 800 000 910 1140 102 O 220 1 30 3 30 12 4 O 4 4 13 5 O 550 14 6 OO 6 60 15 70 770 OL LILIL READY CTRL CO BASP RB RUN OLB BSA MOD O X2 X3 CAL Do mes REMOTE RS 232 RESET Figure 2 3 Front plate of the DCB controller board 5003A203 2 4 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 3 1 1 I O Status Indicators The I O data of the INTERBUS S modules can be indicated on the front plate The module address is entered by means of coding switches MODE Selection of the address area 0 Inputs P area 1 Outputs P area 2 Inputs Q area 3 Outputs Q area ADDRESS The required byte address is set by means of three coding switches Only a word address even address is accepted as a valid address The address which is set must be used by an INTERBUS S module Ad is displayed on the front plate whenever a set address is invalid I O DATA yellow LEDs The data item of the set address is output as a 16 bit word The word is shown with the bytes n set even address and n 1 Displays on the seven segment display with coding switch position 918x With the coding switch position 918x the seve
392. ont plate sr srT sr BK vo vo 5096A127 Figure 2 Error location dashed area with respect to the displayed bus segment gray When logical addressing is used physical addressing is shown here the order of 3 the bus segment numbers may differ from the one shown here see System Description 5003BC04 PHCENIX 7 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 eAl oejep SNG 9 9 DBuroD1no y ur 1eduun 10 9 9 eDejoA 3dnue1jur sng Ayesodwe eseud onsouDeip jeuonippe eui u Inq goaa er eseud onsouDeip jeuonippe y u Inq voaa exr1 eseud onsouDeip jeuollippe aui ui 9 9 eDejoA JO uondnaeijui sng G0 80 0 dq 01 Jejiuims 1011 e npouu 40 pue e qeo e Aq pesneo uoneJjedo Guunp ABojouyos 8Jiw g Duisn g7 uri 10418 Aesodwa 90 Z0 LOdQ 01 wis G7 peuroeds ui jnpow 10 yg peroeds ui uonejedo Guunp 9003 q ue jo eBueuo AyesOdwa snq e20 8An9jep SI 93 90 snqg ke Jo 1J81s109J ejep 10 uj6uos erep sseooJud BuoJM Snq e1ouJ8J BAIIO9JEp si 93 90 snq e Jo 19491691 e1ep 10 ui6ue eiep sseooJud BuoJA uBiu 001 SI suonisod 191S1691 y JO 10 s jnpow sng JO Jequunu y pepeeoxe uoneanDijuoo unuiixeJw uonean ijuoo jenu eui uw peJjeduioo pepuoelxe sem snq 9 9 eu esneooeq pojoedxe ue 1e6uo uonean6ijuo So oKo elep 9941 4049 OM UBOMIEG pejedujoo pue poeuinboe sem uornean6ijuoo UBYM 10119 OU
393. or logical order e After the modules have been addressed the addresses are automatically stored in the decoders EEPROM e Bus operation is started Mode of operation 3 _ Automatic controlled 2 DAB DCB mode 1 Reserved 5003A208 Figure 2 15 Position of DIP switch SW6 which selects the controlled start mode PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Operation with and without EEPROM card The EEPROM card stores the startup behavior in a non volatile way and addresses and controls the bus system The programmed sequences can be started by means of output bits If no card is used the startup behavior must be specified by the PLC This is done with the ISFP function block package Without card The host controller board waits for the start sequence from the PLC addressing with FBs during startup cycle With card The start sequence which is stored in the EEPROM memory card is processed The start sequence is programmed using bit O The programming takes place through the V 24 RS 232 interface The IBS SYS SWT program is to be used as parameterization software If an EEPROM card is fitted on the controller board the operating mode CONTROLLED START is to be selected DCB and DAB modes In principle the controller board is for the PLC an I O module with a variable address area There are two types of addressing between the controller board and t
394. oup function DB n DW m0 m 1 m 2 m 3 n m 5003B KY 000 OOK Parameter count KY 000 XXX Group number KY 000 XXX Group number KY 000 XXX Group number No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored No of the DW with which the parameter list begins PHCENIX CONTACT 8 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 6 4 Module Error FKT 3 After the SYSERROR function block has signaled a module error by means of the MOD bit the Module Error function can be used to recall the local bus numbers in which one or several module errors have occurred The pointers DB and DW point to the memory area in which the local bus numbers are stored Each time this function is called all current module errors on INTERBUS S are reported If an error occurred in the system the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 and the message is entered in the data block If the system runs without module errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 i e the query of the error cause results in a negative acknowledgment of the Module Error function 35 The old values of the data blocks are kept in the case of a negative acknowledgment DB n DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1 KY 000 OXX 1st local bus with module error m 2 KY 000 OXX 2nd local bus with module error m 3 KY 000 OXX 3rd local bus with module error m k KY 000 OXX kth local bus with
395. pt Sources There are three interrupt sources on the host controller board The interrupt source can be selected with the jumper field J 5 Jumper J5 J 5 1 OO QO 1 Reserved J 5 2 0 D 2 Reserved J5 3 O _ 3 Reserved 5003A220 a b Figure 2 30 Selection of the interrupt sources with the jumper field J5 default state 2 6 6 Acknowledgment Delay Message In some applications it is desirable to put the PLC directly into the STOP state when certain events occur This state can be reached by preventing the access acknowledgment which the PLC is expecting The PLC is stopped with an acknowledgment delay The events can be selected with jumper field J 4 Jumper J 4 4 1 Ome 1 Controller board failure J42 2 Bus error CTRL RB LB 5003A221 d e Figure 2 31 Preventing the access acknowledgment with the jumper field J4 Controller board failure An acknowledgment delay is caused when a hardware error mounting locations 1 3 occurs on the host controller board Jumper J4 1 1 Failure message disabled 2 Failure message enabled OO 0 OO 5003A222 Figure 2 32 Jumper J4 1 allows to disable and enable the message in the case of a failure 2 40 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Bus error An acknowledgment delay is caused when a fault
396. pt is disabled when jumper J3 is in position a b The default state is to be kept PW 0 is not used by the host controller board Jumper 7 sets the interrupt functionality to master or slave Jumper J7 OO O O 5003A216 Figure 2 27 Default state of jumper J7 The default state is to be kept 2 38 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Settings for board identification Jumper J8 selects the data bit in the peripheral byte 0 for the board identification When only one interrupt providing controller board is operated in every PLC the setting of the default state is to be kept Jumper J8 0 1 10 O 2 3 C O 4 OO C O 6 0 0 7 5003A218 Figure 2 28 Board identification by means of jumper J8 for selecting the data bit in the peripheral byte 0 The default state is to be kept Interrupt line selection The interrupt line depends on the type of the PLC A selection is made with jumper J 6 The letters A through D represent the hardware interrupt lines of the S5 system connector owitch J6 O gt b XX X O OO O 5003A219 Figure 2 29 Selection of the interrupt lines depending on the PLC type The default state is to be kept PHCENIX Ed CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 6 5 2 Different Interru
397. ption of these bus stations can be obtained from the respective manufacturer Please have the following information at hand ID code Length code PCP byte quantity PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 2 Process Data Interface The INTERBUS S system occupies a certain portion of the PLC s I O address area The size of this address area depends on the bus topology This INTERBUS S address area can be accessed with the same commands L IW T OW U S O L PW T PW L QW T QW etc as for system internal boards The address area which is required for the I O modules of the INTERBUS S system is set on the controller board The setting of the required addresses depends on the mode of operation of the controller board switch SW 6 Two types of addressing are possible PHYSICAL ADDRESSING In this mode of operation the host controller board puts the addresses of the INTERBUS S modules in accordance with the physical order of the modules in the bus topology automatically into the set address windows after the voltage has been switched on Additionally registers for bus system diagnostics are overlaid at fixed locations in the PLC s input area LOGICAL ADDRESSING For this mode of operation the programmer can freely assign the addresses of the modules and of the diagnostic registers in the address area of the PLC After power on the controller board add
398. puts 4 bytes outputs Base address The base address is the start address of the window The base address must be an even byte address Setting the windows 1 and 2 The beginning of the process data s address area can be determined with the base address of the respective window The end address of the process data area results from the window size length and or from the start mode setting The windows occupy the PLC s I O area Besides the addresses for the I O data the host controller board also occupies two input words as a diagnostic register and two I O words as a communication register The two diagnostic registers occupy one word each Please refer to Table 2 2 for the lowest base address Table 2 2 Lowest base addresses for windows 1 and 2 Window Registers Area Address dec Window 1 Automatic start P 2 Window 1 Controlled start P 0 Window 2 Automatic start P 128 Window 2 Controlled start P 0 2 32 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Communication registers window 3 The base address of the communication registers window 3 is to be selected so that they are located outside of the PLC s I O image and do not extend from the P to the Q area Thus the base address of the communication register can be set from address 128 to address 252 in the P area and from address 0 to address 252 in the Q a
399. r User error Check RECEIVE COMMUNI invalid parameter quantity CATION REFERENCE command 67 Not available l l 68 _ Differences between ID list and ID list or bus Compare ID list and existing bus existing bus configuration configuration 69 Communication was not initialized User program Initialize communication 6A Base address for window 3 is not Controller board DIP Check base address for window 3 set correctly Switch 6b Hardware error Controller board Perform a RESET 6c Checksum error EEPROM card Check re program EEPROM card L JEEPROMcad 0 d LLL 5003B PHCENIX 4 9 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 3 All errors described here are only valid when the CTRL LED is active The error codes are described in further detail at the end of this chapter The error codes E01 and E02 were previously described in the RB ERR section 4 10 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 2 Notes on Error Diagnostics This chapter deals with typical error causes and sequences which simplify the error detection Chapter 4 2 2 includes forms for system documentation which you can use for a diagnostic description of your system An error occurs Y Error is reported Front plate of controller board Software function Decentral diagnostic LEDs Y Front plate diagno
400. r of the destination flag word RET M 02 Return bit Flag word assignment for the selected extended area E g MWx data n data n 1 MW x 2 data n 2 data n3 MW x 126 data n 252 data n 253 MW x 127 data n 254 data n 255 n first byte of the even start address of the data to be read see ADR parameter 20 PHOENIX 5003BC04 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Chapter 8 3 7 new function block PUTOUTMW FB 83 The PUTOUTMW function block FB 83 writes the data in the specified flag word to the exten ded output area determined by the ADR and EXT parameters The start and end addresses of the output data are transferred with the ADR parameter and are to be specified in words even numbered The return bit indicates whether the function block has been executed without errors FB 83 is called at the end of the cycle Table 8 23 Parameters of the PUTOUTMW function block FB 83 pese IBDB InterBus data block Number of a data block DB 0 255 The data block is to be set up by you opecifies the area to be read 1 extended area 1 2 extended area 2 otart and end address of the data to be written even numbered values only LN Number of the source flag word 2 bytes in one flag word Return bit 0 1 Function executed without errors Error cause Start address higher than end address Call of the PUTOUTMW function block F
401. raid or the signal lines Use a metal clamp that fits the diameter of your remote bus cable which ensures a secure connection while not squeezing the cable InterBus devices with the degree of protection IP20 and lower must be installed in electrical equipment rooms or in closed cabinets e g metal switch cabinets When installing controller boards and slave boards please observe also the PLC and computer manufacturers installation instructions 5003BC04 PHCENIX 1 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 Chapter 6 Startup 35 The communication register base address settings documented in the manual do not match the program examples on the ISFP diskette The following sections of the text with page numbers are affected c Program example d Detailed program example with organization function and data blocks Replace the values as follows in the above text sections FEN3 KF 200 gt FEN3 KF 252 In accordance with this change change the communication register addresses in the figures listed in the table below 200 gt 252 202 gt 254 Figure 6 12 Chapter 3 1 ID Code of the Modules Page 3 4 Table 3 2 All register width details are given as number of bytes The numbers given for the IB ST 24 DO 8 3 2A module were mixed up by mistake for the columns OUT AR and Register width both numbers are given in bytes Correct is OUT AR 1 and regi
402. rameter count m 1 KY 000 000 Module without KR m 2 KY 000 000 Module without KR m 3 KY 000 OXX Module with KR m 4 KY 000 000 Module without KR m k KY 000 OXX Module with KR In the bus configuration the 3rd and kth modules are communication stations n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which parameter list begins K Quantity of subsequent parameters in this case module quantity XX Communication reference 2 63 50038 PHCENIX 8 73 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 6 ERRINFO FB 74 The functions of the ERRINFO block FB74 request a list of parameters from the controller board This list specifies an error reported by the SYSERROR function block FB73 in further detail By means of the DB and DW pointers the user points to the memory area in which the information is to be stored The function of the ERRINFO function block to be executed is activated after the BUSY bit is set to the value ONE BUSY 1 If the function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred during function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 Table 8 125 Functions of the ERRINFO function block FB74 No Function 0 Controller Error Code 1 Bus Information 2 Defective Group 3 ModleEmr 4 Local Bus Module Error SPB FB
403. rameters of the REQ RES function block FB66 or FB67 No of a data block DB 2 255 The data block must be created by the user Length DW 0 DW 199 BDB B DB INTERBUS data block RRDB E BY DBforRequest Response header table PCP T T Timeroccupied bythe function TO A BI TIMEOUT bit 1 Timeout of the function has elapsed error at the communication interface O The function is active SPA FB 66 NAME REQ RES IBDB DB 9 INTERBUS dat amp block CIDB MB 25 Standard DB for REQ RES PCP T T 3 Occupied timer TO 2 M 4 6 Timeout bit Figure 8 10 Call of the REQ RES function block FB66 or FB67 The parameters marked PCP are needed only if PCP stations Counter 32 V24 are to be addressed Cf Chapter 8 4 Use of Communication These parameters are assigned a 0 DB 0 KF 0 if there are only I O modules in the INTERBUS S system By means of an entry into the memory location DL 18 of the IBDB you may use up to 64 PCP message bits Enter 4 into DL 18 24 PCP words 50038 PHCENIX 8 13 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 1 2 4 INTERBUS Data Block IBDB The controlled start mode of INTERBUS S requires a data block which includes presettings or is used as a working block This data block must have a block length of 200 data words The block is to be created before the software is called It is written to and loaded while the
404. re 5 2 1 Structure of Commands and Messages The structure of the commands and messages is reflected in a frame structure Figure 5 2 This parameter frame includes the command or message code CODE the number of parameters parameter count and the dedicated user data parameters no O to n Element No O No 1 No 2 No n 2 No n 3 Frame Structure CODE Parameter Count Parameter No 0 Parameter No n 1 Parameter No n 5003A502 Figure 5 2 Frame structure of the commands and messages The are still two types of commands commands or messages with parameters and commands or messages without parameters Figure 5 3 No 0 No 1 No 2 No n 2 No n 3 A B CODE CODE Parameter Count Parameter No 0 Parameter No n 1 Parameter No n 5003A503 Figure 5 3 Two command types A with and B without parameters PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces 5 3 Interface Description Two different interfaces connect the application and the controller board Both interfaces feature the command message structure Interfaces ISFP on the PLC IBS SYS SWT on the PC 5 3 1 ISFP Interface description The INTERBUS S System Functions for the PLC ISFP are a software interface which is available to the users to help them managing the INTERBUS S management services on th
405. re of a 16 bit OUT register If the analog register for example has the address 132 the value is written from the accumulator of the PLC to the module using the command T PW 132 PHCENIX CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces Depending on the type of module the 12 bit analog value is encoded in binary code or two s complement iL Se eee 0 Bit 0 11111111111 Positive end value lo 11 11111210 nA gt 1 l 00000000001 l100000000000 Negative end value lo0000000000 0 Null Figure 3 26 The 12 bit analog value as two s complement PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 10 Relay Modules Modules IBS 24 RELS Access The up to date data of the modules is made available in the MPM of the controller board Data is linked with the familiar commands O S O etc Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used enter an even base address n for every module Address the digital modules so that their addresses are located in the process image PB 0 to PB 127 The following figure shows schematically the module terminals and the address location of the associated bits in the PLC There are eight relays on the module up to eight further relays can be connected with an expansion unit The module always occupies two bytes regardless of whether the expansion unit is connected or not
406. rea The base address must be divisible by 4 If the communication registers are located in the Q area the driver blocks have to be called with the letter Q This distinction is necessary because the load and transfer commands in the driver blocks differ Table 2 3 Location of the communication registers Location of the communication registers Area Base address FB ending P P 128 to P 252 None Q Q 0 to Q252 Q 35 The following is required for automatic and controlled start Window 3 must always be set The application must neither write nor read window 3 Write read access is only permitted through the driver blocks The base address must be divisible by four PHCENIX CONTACT 2 Technical Description THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Setting the windows Window 1 I O area Settings Window 2 I O area Settings Window 3 Digital I O modules Base address oW 1 Length SW 2 Analog I O modules Base address oW 3 Length SW 4 I O area for the communication between the host controller board and the driver blocks of the PLC Settings Base address SW 5 divisible by 4 Length 4 bytes Byte 255 A A Communication register 4
407. reasons 5003B PHCENIX 8 115 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 5 3 Additional Error Messages Optional and additional error messages Table 8 21 Additional error messages Abort detail additional Explanation detail 8 4 5 4 Description of the Service Specific Error Messages The service specific error messages are indicated in error classes and error codes Error class This parameter specifies the error type Error code This parameter gives further specific information within the scope of the error type Error class 0 Initiate This error type is reported in the event of connection establishment errors Table 8 22 Service specific error messages error class O Initiate Error code Explanation Cause The specified maximum PDU size does not suffice for communication Remedy Adapt the communication relationship list with the Receive KBL command parameters m 11 and m 13 in accordance with the indication in the negative Initiate Error Confirmation 1 Max PDU Size Insufficient Cause The requested service is not supported by the server Remedy Adapt the entries in the Receive KBL in accordance with the Initiate Error Confirmation 2 Services Not Supported 3 Version OV Incompatible Cause The version of the OV object dictionary is not the correct one 4 User Initiate Denied Cause The PMS user rejects the Initiate service 0 Other Cause The error c
408. red in the parameter list in such a way that the index in the parameter list corresponds to the physical location of the respective module in the INTERBUS S system The number of parameters in the bus segment number list equals the number of parameters in the ID code list cf FKT O of this block The list does not become valid until the Implement All Logical Address Map CONTROL function FB 68 FKT 6 is activated Parameter meanings example EE DW m 0 KY 000 00K m 1 KY OOY OXX Bus terminal module m 2 KY OOY 000 Local bus module IN addresses only m 3 KY 00Y 000 Local bus module OUT addresses only m 4 KY 00Y 000 Local bus module OUT addresses only m 5 KY 00Y 000 Local bus module IN and OUT addresses m 6 KY OOY 000 Local bus module IN addresses only m k 2 KY 00Y OXX Bus terminal module m k 1 KY 00 000 Local bus module OUT addresses only m k KY OOY 000 Local bus module IN and OUT addresses In the bus configuration the 1st and k 2 th module is a bus terminal module n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of the subsequent bytes in this case quantity of modules XX Bus segment number 0 255 YY Installation depth O for modules in the remote bus line 16 for modules in the installation remote bus line 5003B PHCENIX 8 31 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONE
409. ree position seven segment display on the controller board The exact representation can be taken from the following figure 7 segment l display Diagnostic status Run status of the Statistical diagnostics inactive Invalid address setting on the controller board Run status of the 5044AC01 a Li Bus active Statistical diagnostics active Part 1 Writing the Diagnostic Data to the Parameterization Memory e g EEPROM or S RAM Part 2 for firmware version 3 72 see Page 14 The diagnostic data is always transferred into the EEPROM when transmission errors cause the stop of the bus The data remains stored in the EEPROM until it is overwritten by further transmission errors The EEPROM data can be read out with the Send Test Parameter command when bit 8 is set for the selection If there is no EEPROM a negative confirmation is returned in which the parameter error type is 02 8 If an error occurs when the data is written the EEPROM Write Error is reported If there is no EEPROM available when the data is written there will be no error message 5003BC04 PHCENIX 11 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 New Firmware Revision V3 72 for the IBS S5 DCB I T Controller Board for SIMATIC S5 PLCs Owing to functional extensions technical improvements and corrections in the firmware there are some innovations for the IBS S5 DCB l T controller board for SIMATIC
410. register IW 34 35 Enter ID codes for the diagnostic registers at the end of the ID code list 5003B PHCENIX ve CONTACT 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 4 V O Status Indicators Mode 0 Inputs of P area 1 Outputs of P area 2 Inputs of Q area 3 Outputs of Q area Address 0 254 I O data Status of the selected data peripheral word Byten Byte n 1 Or word MODE ADDRESS J 8 0 0 0 CO 910 140 10 2 O 220 11 30 3 30 12 4 O 4 40 13 5 OO 550 14 6 OO 6 60 15 70 770 ILLI LILILI 5003A408 READY O CTRLCO BASP RB RUN OLB BSA MOD X2 X3 o su REMOTE RS 232 RESET Figure 4 20 INTERBUS S status indicators I O status indicators online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The I O data of the INTERBUS S modules can be displayed on the front plate The module s address is entered by means of code switches 4 26 PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces MODE Table 4 3 Address area selection MODE Input Output Area 0 Inputs P area 1 Outputs P area 2 Inputs Q area 3 Outputs Q area 4 9 Forbidden MODE 4 through MODE
411. registers A module with two words has also two registers oyntax 80F4 hex 0003 hex 1 01 dec 01 hex 129 dec 81 hex 2 04 hex 04 hex 67 dec 43 hex 3 01 hex 01 hex 207 dec CF hex 1 IBS 24 DO 1 data word 2 IBS Al 4 data words 3 IBSAI 3 16 1 data word 4 IBS IP CDO 1 data byte The bus register number of communication modules only includes the number of the process data words 5003B PHCENIX 29 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Quit Configure Bus Confirmation 00CA Meaning The Configure Bus Request 0023 command was executed Physical Configuration Map Valid Confirmation 00Ab Meaning The bus configuration which has been communicated to the controller board by means of the Receive Physical Configuration Map Request command are not identical with the connected configuration Quit Receive Group Numbers Confirmation 0001 Meaning The Receive Group Numbers Request 0049 command was successfully executed Switch Group On Confirmation 809E Meaning A group of bus segments was switched on The number of group which was switched on is given as a parameter oyntax oWitch Group On Confirmation 809E Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Group number of the switched on group Switch Group On Failed Confirmation 80C5 Meaning The attempt to switch on a group was not successful The group number is given as a parameter
412. rent configuration When the coding switches are in position 9401 through 9912 the seven segment display shows the ID codes hexadecimal of the current physical configuration 9401 shows the ID codes of the first bus station 9402 shows the ID codes of the second bus station etc The register length of the modules is given in the first digit of the three digit display Display of the firmware revision The coding switch position 9200 shows the implemented firmware revision on the seven segment display DIAGNOSTICS seven segment display The three position seven segment display shows parameters during operation an when errors occur Controller board stop Run status of the controller board Ad Invalid address set with the coding switch A parameter is output in case of an error an error LED is active 2 3 1 2 Operating Indicators Various LEDs indicate the operating state of INTERBUS S and the PLC The seven segment display provides more detailed information READY The controller board has completed the self test without discovering any errors and is ready for operation BASP The PLC has activated the BASP Befehls Ausgabe SPerren disable command output signal and is in the STOP state In this operating state INTERBUS S resets all outputs RUN The RUN LED is active when a data cycle runs on INTERBUS S BSA The BSA signal Bus Segment Abgeschaltet bus segment disabled indicates that one or several bus segment
413. resettings for the command and message structure These settings also establish the interface for PCP stations communication modules e g counter PHCENIX d CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces The receive and send blocks are not accessible from the application They are exclusively used by the function blocks of the ISFP interface and control the communication interface communication registers With the help of these blocks commands are sent and messages are received Their positions in the program and how to call them are important Block Position Call CON IND Beginning of cycle Unconditional REQ RES Endofcycle Unconditional 33 Call the CON IND and REQ RES blocks once in every cycle to ensure that commands and messages are correctly processed The third group of blocks provides a tool with which INTERBUS S can be controlled and monitored The function blocks can be divided into passive and active blocks Passive blocks receive messages from the controller board or show errors in the INTERBUS S system The active blocks are called by the application program and perform certain functions Chapter 8 ISFP describes the variety of functions and messages 5 3 1 2 INTERBUS S System Control Structure of the functions The functions are implemented in function blocks The function blocks are written in the STEP 5 language They are supplied with di
414. ress Obbb 5 n 1 Mask 1 positive edge 000 5 n Mask 2 negative edge dddd Key aaaa Event identifier It identifies the individual events Assign the event identifier unambigiously because it is returned with the event message and thus allows to distinguish different events 0004 Event code data preprocessing code It determines the setting up of the event Firmware 3 3 only allows to detect bit state changes on digital modules event code 0004 hex Obbb Logical or physical address depending on the type of addressing of the digital input module CCCC Mask 1 specifies the bits of the data word which has been determined by the address These bits should report an event when a positive edge occurs dddd Mask 2 specifies the bits of the data word which has been determined by the address These bits should report an event when a negative edge occurs 5003B PHCENIX eo CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Enable Event Number Request 002b Function The command enables a certain event definition Prerequisite The corresponding event definition must exist and be valid Receive Events Request 002A command Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Enable Event Number Confirmation 00dA Meaning The event definition is enabled Negative acknowledgment Event Error Confirmation 004C Meaning Error during the event definition Remark There are invalid ev
415. resses the INTERBUS S modules in the way that was programmed in the software package or EEPROM before PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 2 1 Example Configuration The examples given on the following pages describe the different types of addressing The INTERBUS S topology shown there is the same in all examples and comprises the following BUS CONFIGURATION Host controller board I O modules ADDRESS SETTING Window 1 Window 2 Window 3 IBS S5 DCB I T IBS 24 BK T IBS 24 DI IBS AO 1 IBS 24 DO IBS PT 100 A 2 IBS DIO 1 24 P IBS IP CBK 1 24 F IBS IP CDI 1 24 F IBS IP CDO 1 24 F IBS IP CDI 1 24 F IBS 24 BK IOT IBS 24 DI 32 IBS AI 3 Base address 32 Length 14 bytes Base address 132 Length 16 bytes Base address 160 Length 4 bytes PHCENIX CONTACT 3 User Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS BS 0 BS 1 BS 2 BS 3 BS 4 BS 5 BS 6 IBS IBS IBS 24 DI AO 1 24 DO PT 100 A2 IBS IP DIO 1 24 P IBS IP CBK 1 24 F IBS IP CDI 1 24 F IBS IP CDO 1 24 F
416. rmation 9 50 0083 Start Bus Not Possible Confirmation 9 42 0084 Quit Receive Logical Addresses Confirmation 9 61 00Ed No Map Entry Confirmation 9 50 0002 Quit Receive Instructions Confirmation 9 63 OOF6 Quit Groups Error Characteristics Confirmation 9 45 0058 Quit EEPROM Management Confirmation 9 67 00FA Quit EEPROM Programming Confirmation 9 67 OOFE Quit Module Error OK Confirmation 9 50 0105 Quit Receive Local Bus Code Map Confirmation 9 63 8087 send Software Revision Confirmation 9 60 8089 send Software Revision V24 Confirmation 9 60 809d Switch Group Off Confirmation 9 45 809E Switch Group On Confirmation 9 44 80A0 Module Error Indication 9 51 B0A1 Power Fail Indication 9 51 80A2 Battery Indication 9 52 80A3 Module Request Indication 9 52 8034 Bus Error Information Indication 9 53 80C5 oWitch Group On Failed Confirmation 9 44 80E5 Switch Information Confirmation 9 63 80EE Local Bus Module Error Confirmation 9 57 BOEF _ Send All Module Error Confirmation 9 56 80F3 Processing Instructions Error Confirmation 9 63 80F4 Send Physical Configuration Confirmation 9 43 5003B PHCENIX dis CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 80F5 send Log Address Error Con
417. rmissible configuration However there is an error in the bus installation Cause A short interference of data transmission Remedy Check the system for missing or incorrectly applied shielding of the bus cable connectors missing or incorrect PE connection voltage dips in the logic supply of remote bus stations Bus Error Information 80C4 Quantity of subsequent words 1 Emortype EEO1 5003B PHCNIX I CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Error Type EE02 Meaning The maximum possible configuration has been exceeded because there are too many stations in the INTERBUS S system Syntax Bus Erorlnformation Quantity of subsequent words 2 1 Erortype EEO2 2 Error number Key Error number see table below The individual system errors are encoded as an error number in parameter 2 The table below lists all possible error numbers and gives a brief description of the error 9 54 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Error type EE03 oyntax Bus Error Information Indication 80C4 Quantity of subsequent words Defective bus 803 GROUPS parameter block FFO1 Group quantity lt nnnn gt 1st group number lt aaaa gt th group number lt bbbb gt REMOTE BUS block FFO2 Remote bus quantity lt mmmm gt 1st remote bus number lt
418. roller parameter timeout error 8 38 Correct data transfer 1 3 Counter 8 56 Counting local buses and INTERBUS modules 6 1 CRC 1 4 CTRL Error 4 7 CTRL 2 7 Current consumption 2 41 Cycle erroneous 1 3 D D SUB remote bus connector PE connection of the 7 5 DAB mode 2 24 6 4 Data block header 8 94 8 95 standard 8 94 8 95 Data cycle 1 3 2 6 Data preprocessing 2 1 Data sheet 2 40 Data traffic cyclic 1 11 DCB controller board 7 8 DCB mode 2 24 6 4 Defective Group 8 77 Defective local bus Local Bus Error 2 7 Defective remote bus Remote Bus Error 2 7 PHCENIX icu CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Index DEFINE 8 20 8 28 8 50 Definition of I O addresses 2 13 Definition 8 117 Detection of an operating or error status 2 18 Diagnostic functions on bus terminal modules 4 32 functions on I O modules 4 31 interface 3 1 possibilities 5 1 registers locations 4 24 registers 2 13 2 18 2 30 4 23 Diagnostics on third party devices 4 32 DIAGNOSTICS 2 6 Different interrupt sources 2 38 Differential signal transfer RS 485 1 4 DIP switches 2 30 Disable All Messages 8 27 Disconnecting the RESET button 2 39 Display of diagnostic data 2 18 Double addressing 2 33 Driver blocks 8 88 Dual Port RAM 5 5 E EEPROM memory card 2 1 2 22 6 2 EEPROM 2 41 5 2 5 13 EREG 8 64 ERRINFO 8 22 8 74 Error classes 8 116 code 4 35 8 116 detection 1 11 diag
419. rom the PLC or the EEPROM card Check the software and or the EEPROM card b The logical addressing detected an error in an address list he list number is specified in detail in the EREG byte of the addressing block Figure 4 6 Display after the self test PHCENIX we CONTACT 4 Diagnostic Interfaces THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Display with an active bus 0134 A MODE ADDRESS BYTE n n 1 8 000 0 00 910 110 10 20 2 20 11 380 3 30 12 40 4 40 13 550 5 50 14 600 6 60 159 70 TITO READY CTRLO BASP O RB RUN 9 B BSA MODO 5003A413 4 14 Ad The INTERBUS S system is in operation XX RUN e Input data can be processed e Outputs can be set INTERBUS S is active INTERBUS S is active The setting of the code switches is incorrect e Invalid address area mode e Odd address setting e The set address is not occupied by an IBS module or the associated module is ina bus segment which has been switched off Check the setting of the ADDRESS and or MODE decade switches Modes 0 to 3 are permitted Attention Modes 4 to 9 must not be set Figure 4 7 Active bus PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT 0134 MODE ADDRESS BYTE n n 1 8 000 0 00 910 110 10 120 2 20 11 30 3 0 12 4
420. ror Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause The quantity of parameters lies outside the quantity range defined for the command Execution of commands is aborted Remedy Check the parameterization list which was sent last for an incorrect number of parameters Event Error 004C Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause An error has been detected when the parameter for programming the events was checked Hemegy Check the event parameterization list which was sent last for an incorrect number of parameters and non existent event definitions 4 48 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces IPMS No Error Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset Further error 004D Hardware INTERBUS S error Controller error in the event of multiple errors On Off in the event of multiple errors Only for multiple errors Remedy Please contact Phoenix Contact Cause The IPMS protocol chip has detected a BUS error however no bit was set in the IPMS error register i Perform a RESET before using the controller board again Communication Invalid 004E Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause Remedy The controller board uses a limited memory space for processing comma
421. rror Code function can be used to recall the error s code The error code is stored in the data word defined by the DB and DW parameters DB n DW m 0 KY 000 001 Parameter count m 1KY XXXX Controller error code n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins 8 2 6 2 Bus Information FKT 1 After the SYSERROR function block has signaled a bus error by means of the BUS bit the Bus Information function can be used to recall the bus errors The Bus Information function reports 5 parameters The errors are stored in the data words defined by the DB and DW parameters 35 Exception More than one defective local bus has been detected in the event of a bus malfunction In this case the number of returned parameters is increased by the additionally detected local bus errors If an error occurred in the system the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If the system runs without bus errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 i e the query of an error cause results in a negative acknowledgment of the Bus Information function DB n DW m 0 KY 000 00K Parameter count m 1 KY 00A 00B IBOK fatal error m 2 KY OCC ODD Error quantity remote bus local bus m 3 KY OYY 000 Cause of the fatal error m 4 KY OYY ORR Error cause no of remote bus m 5 KY OYY OLL Error cause no of local bus n No of the DB in which
422. ry Notes February 1996 Table 3 Mode 9 settings nee rite eae anaemia 9180 918x Displays the module numbers of the ten modules with the greatest num ber of errors on the seven segment display 9180 the module with the greatest number of errors 9181 the module with the second greatest number of errors etc If there are less than 10 modules to which errors can be assigned Ad appears on the free positions The module number FF shows special CRC errors In addition all I O data LEDs light up The hundred s place of the module numbers is also mapped onto the I O data LEDs LED 0 lights up for the module numbers 0 99 LED1 for 100 199 LED2 for 200 299 and so on This setting of the code selector switch corresponds to the result of the send Located Error Counter 0109hex or Send Located Error Counter V24 010Aphex services 9190 9199 Displays the local bus numbers of the last 10 module status errors on the seven segment display This setting of the code selector switch corresponds to the result of the Send Last Module Status Error 010Bhex or Send Last Module Status Error 010Chex services 9200 Firmware revision 371 for version 3 71 9210 oupplementary error message DDxx 9300 93xx An input and an output word are reserved in the PLC s memory with the help of the special ID code 00154 The content of the output word appears on the yellow I O LEDs when the selector switches are set to 93XX Also the v
423. s However it provides the option to carry along a voltage supply for the sensors in the bus cable hybrid cable design At the beginning of the installation remote bus there is always a CBK module The installation remote bus may be set up with CDI CDO DIO and all remote bus modules The installation remote bus has been designed to install distributed sub stations with a direct connection of sensors and actuators This results in an optimally short and low cost sensor actuator connection The local bus has been designed for the cost effective and flexible installation of decentralized cabinets and terminal boxes It interconnects the various local bus modules and also establishes the connection to the bus terminal module BK The bus terminal module BK connects the local bus to the remote bus 1 2 1 General Method of Operation The INTERBUS S system is a data ring with a central master slave access method It has the structure of a spatially distributed shift register Every module forms with its registers a part of this shift register through which the master i e the host controller board clocks the data serially With the ring structure it is possible to send and receive data synchronously full duplex To simplify system installation the ring system is implemented in one cable line Because of this the system appears like a bus system with branching spur lines simplified tree structure Every station in the INTERBUS S syste
424. s with a module error Prerequisite The module error message with the specification of the local bus Send All Module Error Request was received Messages Positive acknowledgment Local Bus Module Error Confirmation 80EE Meaning A list with the module numbers and the ID codes of all modules in which a module error occurred is sent to the controller board Negative acknowledgment No Map Entry Confirmation 00 Meaning No module errors were detected syntax oend Local Bus Module Error Request 005b Quantity of subsequent words 1 1 Logical local bus address 00xx Send All Module Error Request 0050 Function his command first clears the diagnostic display on the front plate Afterwards while the bus system is active it checks all modules for error messages and updates the module error indications Prerequisite Module error Messages Positive acknowledgment Send All Module Error Confirmation 80EF Meaning This acknowledgment transmits a list of all local buses with module errors Negative acknowledgment No Map Entry Confirmation 00 Meaning There are no module errors The error indications on the front plate and at the diagnostic interface are reset syntax send All Module Error Request 005C 5003B PHCENIX voe CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Send Located Error Counter Request 0109 Function This command determines the
425. s Error FB 70 FKT 4 function 8 2 1 8 Init Communication FKT 7 The Init Communication function initializes the communication layers and enables communication 35 The bus must be started before this command cf Chapter 8 2 1 1 Start INTERBUS S Cycle Error causes The Init Communication function reports an error if e the bus was not started e the KBL communication relationship list contains an invalid communication reference e an invalid remote bus address was specified in the KBL e g double allocation 8 2 1 9 INTERBUS S Delay FKT 8 With the INTERBUS S Delay function the delay time during operation with communication can be deactivated The time is set after switching on the voltage 8 2 1 10 Quit Module Error All FKT 9 With the Quit Module Error All function the module errors of the currently accessible configuration are acknowledged 35 This command function is effective for all modules with a stored module error 50038 PHCENIX 8 27 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 2 DEFINE FB 69 The user can activate the individual functions of the DEFINE function block FB 69 by setting the BUSY bit BUSY 1 After the function has been successfully terminated the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred during the function execution the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO
426. s S5 155 U user manual 5003A236 33 Other PLC types upon request PHCENIX xd CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 5 Configuration of the Controller Board 2 5 1 PLC Address Area The S5 PLC has an I O address area of 256 bytes The address area is provided in duplicate to produce one input and one output address area The I O modules are located in this address area P area With every PLC cycle the first 128 bytes byte O to byte 127 depending on the PLC are mapped onto a further memory area This area process image of the inputs and outputs is preferably used for digital I O modules Bit combinations can be done with these addresses Addresses outside the process image however must be loaded or transferred directly L PW T PW Extended address area In some PLCs an additional address area Q area is provided which enlarges the I O area by 256 bytes The P and Q areas are addressed by means of different load and transfer commands L PW x or L QW x 33 If the PLC accommodates SIMATIC I O modules in its central controller the addresses which these modules use are stored in the P and Q areas respectively see user manuals for SIMATIC PLOs PLC 255 255 Input area of the Process image PII Inputs Q area i mE 5003A322 Figure 2 5 I O area of the PLC 2 12 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMP
427. s address area PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 1 ID Code of the Modules A table ID code list describes the complete INTERBUS S system with the help of the module characteristics Each module is specified with three characteristics e physical location of the module in the bus topology e ID code of the module e length code address space requirement in the PLC of the module The INTERBUS modules and the bus segments are counted as follows The first module of a bus segment is a bus terminal module BK or a remote bus station with I Os All other modules are I O modules The first I O module is coupled to the BK the second I O module is coupled to the first module etc The bus segment connected first is the bus segment the BK of which is connected to the PLC through the remote bus The next bus segment is coupled to the BK of the previous bus segment through the remote bus etc The bus segments can be freely numbered Table 3 1 Meaning of the parameters of an ID code list using the example of the data block n Length code ID no of the module of the module DW m 0 KY 000 k Parameter count m 1 KY 222 XXX ID code module 0 m 2 KY 222 xxx ID code module 1 m 3 KY zzz XXX ID code module 2 m k KY zzz xxx ID code module k The following abbreviations were used in the table n Number of the data block DB
428. s are located in the process image PB 0 to PB 127 The following figure shows schematically the module terminals and the address location of the associated bits in the PLC Figure 3 12 Address assignment for digital LC modules with 16 inputs n Even input address m n 1 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 3 Digital Modules with 32 Inputs Modules IBS 24 DI 32 Access The up to date data of the modules is made available in the MPM of the controller board Data is linked with the familiar commands Al Ol etc Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used enter an even base address n for every module Address the digital modules so that their addresses are located in the process image PB 0 to PB 127 The following figure shows schematically the module terminals and the address location of the associated bits in the PLC Word n gt lt Byte n gt lt Byte m n 7 n6 n5 n4 n 3 n2 n 1 n 0 gt m7 m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3m 2 m 1 m 0 lt Byte gt lt Byte k gt 5003A309 Figure 3 13 Address assignment for digital modules with 32 inputs PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 4 Digital Modules with 16 Outputs Modules Access IBS 24 DO IBS 230 DO IBS 120 DO The up to date data of the modul
429. s from Phoenix Contact see catalog or you can assemble the required cables by yourself N Depending on the components to be connected there are different types of cables available For further information please refer to the installation user manual Order number 27 54 80 4 For the correct cable laying in the plant the guidelines given in VDE 0100 are authoritative For information concerning the installation please refer to the installation user manual This manual also describes measures for shielding the INTERBUS S connections The Chapter Recommended Cabling in the installation user manual provides further instructions for the INTERBUS S system installation in particular for the potential equalization and lightning protection of the plant The manual also includes explanations of the voltage supply for the INTERBUS S system 1 2 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Installation 7 3 Pin Assignment of the Hardware Interfaces Hardware interfaces of the controller board MODE ADDRESS 8 0 O 9 1 10 2 11 3 O 12 4 O 13 5 O 14 6 CO E 15 7 O eo OOL READY O CTRLO BASP RB RUN OLB BSA MOD X2 X3 D REMOTE RS 232 RESET Figure 7 2 Hardware interfaces of the IBS 85 DCB controller board 5003A701 A System connector B Fro
430. s is are disabled The remaining bus configuration runs properly 2 6 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 3 1 3 Error Indicators INTERBUS S malfunctions are indicated by various LEDs More detailed information is provided by the seven segment display CTRL The CTRL ERR ConTRoLler Error reports an error restricted to the controller board or its parameterization A description of the error numbers hex is given in Chapter 4 Diagnostic Interfaces RB A defective remote bus Remote Bus Error has been diagnosed The seven segment display shows the number in decimal of the defective remote bus segments LB A defective local bus Local Bus Error has been diagnosed The seven segment display shows the number in decimal of the defective local bus segment MOD A MOD ERR MODule Error occurs when an INTERBUS S module indicates an error e g short circuit in the periphery or lacking voltage supply only possible in the case of modules with bus acknowledgment The seven segment display shows the number in decimal of the local bus in which the reporting module is located The other parts of the bus run properly RESET When this pushbutton is actuated using a tool the host controller board and the connected INTERBUS S are reset A RESET must only be triggered when the PLC is in the STOP state As long as N the controller board runs through a self
431. s location of the associated bits in the PLC PHCENIX s CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 1 Digital Modules with 16 Inputs Modules IBS 24 DI IBS 230 DI IBS 120 DI Access The up to date data of the modules is made available in the MPM of the controller board Data is linked with the familiar commands Al Ol etc Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used enter an even base address n for every module Address the digital modules so that their addresses are located in the process image PB 0 to PB 127 The following figure shows schematically the module terminals and the address location of the associated bits in the PLC n n 6 n 5 n 4 n 3 n 2 n 1n O m m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3m 2m 1 m O lt Byte n gt lt Byte m lt Word n gt 5003A307 Figure 3 11 Address assignment for digital modules with 16 inputs n Even input address m n 1 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces 3 5 2 LC Modules with 16 Digital Inputs Modules IBS 24 DI LC Access The up to date data of the modules is made available in the MPM of the controller board Data is linked with the familiar commands Al Ol etc Addressing When LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used enter an even base address n for every module Address the digital modules so that their addresse
432. s the bit within the process data item specified by the logical address The bits are counted in the same way as the addresses see above figure Bit manipulation is only possible in the address area of the inputs and outputs The meanings of the addresses and their structure are given where the individual instructions are described Syntax Receive Processing Instructions Request 005G Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 4stinstruction nth instruction Key PC Parameter count sum of the individual instruction lengths 9 28 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages General structure of an instruction oyntax 1 Instruction code 2 1st instruction parameter m mth instruction parameter General function of all instructions The instructions control determinable bits of the process output data bus output bit taking into account determinable bits of the process input data bus input bit and output data host output data written by the PLC host opecify the address of the bus output bit in the OUTPUT ADDRESS parameter and the address of the bus input parameter in the INPUT ADDRESS parameter Depending on a freely selectable edge of the bus input bit the bus output bit O is reset General function of the RESET instructions The bus output bit is reset after the edge of the bus input bit has been reset section 2 in the figure
433. sequent words PC 1 1st logical local bus address 2 1st module number 2 n 1 nth logical local bus number 2 n nth module number Key PC Parameter count module quantity multiplied with 2 Quit Module Error All Request 0065 Function This command acknowledges the message of the module errors of all modules with storage display in the currently accessible bus configuration Prerequisite Module error on module with storage display Remark Even error LEDs on the module go out Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Module Error OK Confirmation OOFE Negative acknowledgment Quit Module Error Not Possible Confirmation 80FF Remark The PARAMETER NUMBER and ERROR NUMBER parameters are passed on syntax Quit Module Error All Request 0065 9 22 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Set BK Alarm Logical Request 0024 Function Prerequisite Messages The command sets the alarm output of a bus terminal module BK There must be an alarm output on the addressed BK Positive acknowledgment Quit Set BK Alarm Logical Confirmation 000 Remark Parameter 1 identifies the BK whose output is set Negative acknowledgment BK Alarm Failed Confirmation 005A Meaning Invalid local bus address If the addressed module does not have an alarm output the positive acknowledgment Is generated syntax set BK Alarm Logical Request 0
434. sitive acknowledgment Send Last Module Status Error Confirmation 8117 syntax oend Last Module Error Request 010B 9 20 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Send Last Module Status Error V24 Request 010C Function This function corresponds to the Send Last Module Status Error Request command The only difference is that the data is exclusively transmitted via the V 24 RS 232 interface Remark See remark on Send Last Module Status Error Request Messages Positive Send Last Module Status Error V24 Confirmation acknowledgment 8118 syntax osend Last Module Status Error Request 010C Send Actual Configuration Request 010D Function This command request the current configuration in the form of an ID code list In contrast to the Send Physical Configuration Request 005E service the currently connected configuration is indicated and not the initial configuration Remark If the bus is in the STOP mode this command cannot detect later changes to the configuration These changes are only taken into consideration after the bus has been started again or the system has been configured again with Configure Bus Request 0023 or Check Physical Configuration Hequest 0058 However if the bus changes from the RUN state to the STOP state as a result of a configuration change Send Actual Configuration Request can show the new and incorrect configuration
435. sponse of a controller board The INTERBUS S controller board offers the possibility of responding to signal changes at the inputs If a signal change is detected it can e be reported to the PLC for further processing or e cause a direct response of the controller board to an output The direct response of the controller board to an output is described in the following description The description of messages relating to signal changes can be found in the user manual under EVENT processing Manipulation of OUT words Manipulation of OUT words is required to have the ability to respond quickly to changes of inputs Processing takes place exclusively on the controller board and is programmed by way of a standard function block For this purpose a list containing instructions and further parameters is transferred to the controller board Processing begins automatically after the list has been checked If the controller board detected a signal change the programmed output is set immediately to a defined state The output remains in this state until the PLC resets it Responses to signal changes Receive bit manipulation Quantity of subsequent words 1st instruction I I nth instruction Figure 8 20 General command structure The command allows the bit manipulation of the INTERBUS S process output data by means of programmable instructions automatically executed by the PLC which work on corresponding addresses SUBE
436. ssion error could be assigned In addition to the module number physical location in the IBS ring beginning at O for the first module the respective error counter is also given If there are less then 10 modules to which an error could be assigned then less than 10 modules will be displayed CRC Last Way errors are specified with the module number Oxffff oend Located Error Counter Confirmation 8115 Quantity of subsequent words PC 1 Result 0000 2 Module number with the most errors XXXX 3 Error counter high byte XXXX 4 Error counter low byte XXXX Module number with the 10 most errors XXXX 3 n Error counter high byte XXXX 3 n 4 1 Error counter low byte XXXX n Quantity of modules to which errors may be assigned up to 10 CONTACT PHCENIX 9 57 9 Commands and Messages Send Located Error Counter V24 Confirmation Function Hemark oyntax Key THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8116 This function corresponds to the Send Located Error Counter Confirmation message The only difference is that the data is transmitted exclusively via the V 24 RS 232 interface See remark on Send Located Error Counter Confirmation Bona 3 n oend Located Error Counter Confirmation 8116 Quantity of subsequent words PC Result 0000 Module number with the most errors XXXX Error counter high byte XXXX Error counter low byte XXXX Modu
437. st module DW y 2 KY B ADR 2nd module DW y n 2 KY B ADR nth module DW y n 1 KY B ADR Special ID code DW y n KY B ADR Special ID code Key PC Quantity of the subsequent parameters B Address area 0 P area of the PLC 1 Q area of the PLC ADR Base address of the module 0 255 Base address word oriented module even address byte oriented module odd even address DB13 0 KY 000 015 Parameter count Ls KY 000 000 IBS 24 BK T Ai KY 000 000 IBS 24 DI KY 000 132 IBS AO 1 As KY 000 032 IBS 24 DO E KY 000 000 IBS PT 100 A 2 G KY 000 028 IBS IP DIO 1 24 Ti KY 000 000 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 9 KY 000 000 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 9 KY 000 029 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 10 KY 000 000 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 11 KY 000 046 IBS 24 BK I O T I KY 000 000 IBS 24 DI 32 T3 KY 000 146 IBS AI 3 14 KY 000 000 Diagnostic bit register KY 000 000 Diagnostic parameter register 16 5003B PHCENIX Poe CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup The DCBCP example is given on the next page in order to avoid having to turn over between the pages Bus topology and Software setting 6 40 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
438. st only be performed when the PLC is in the STOP state While the controller board performs its self test no up to date inputs are read and no up to date outputs are set In the controlled start mode the bus cycle is not re started no RUN All parameter settings logical addressing event definitions are lost Clearing the error display and controlled start In the controlled start mode INTERBUS S can be started by means of the ADDRESS startup block or by means of the EEPROM card The I O data of disabled local buses does not correspond to the up to date signal states There must be no access to the bus addresses concerned 35 As long as the controller board does the addressing no up to date inputs are read and no up to date outputs are set Clearing the display of a module error MOD while the system is running After a module error the application program or the EEPROM card can clear the display with the following commands e CLEAR DISPLAY CONTROL block function 4 or e MODULE ERROR ERRINFO block function 3 5003B PHCENIX Ted CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 6 Diagnostics on the Modules In order to allow fast local diagnostics the modules feature status and diagnostic LEDs The error indicators provide information about the type and location of an error Other LEDs indicate the I O states Indicators on the I O modules e Supply voltage e Output overl
439. start during PLC startup 6 13 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DCBADR software setting for controlled start with DCBADR logical addressing for a system start during startup a Short description of logical addressing during startup This function block initiates the logical addressing of the INTERBUS S system It includes an initialization block INITIB two driver blocks REQ RES CON IND an auxiliary driver CIH and the addressing block ADDRESS See also Figure 6 7 In this example digital and analog I O modules are addressed The addressing block transfers the logical address lists to the controller board where they are checked The related program file is called DCBADR S5D It is stored on the floppy disk Data blocks of the example ID code list DB 10 Bus segment list DB 11 IN address list DB 12 OUT address list DB 13 After the system start and the disabling of the messages from the controller board to the PLC AV 3 the startup block is exited In the cyclic program the application can now access the defined module addresses Diagnostics The function of the system can be monitored via the diagnostic registers diagnostic bit register diagnostic parameter register The diagnostic registers have to be defined by means of logical addressing If diagnostics through function blocks is requested the messages have to be enabled AV 1 In order to
440. ster out of which the analog value can be read The following figure shows schematically the address location of the analog channels and the associated gain and analog registers Chane o 1 2 3 Gain register n m2 m4 m6 Analog value reg m m 2 m 4 m 6 Figure 3 18 Address assignment of the analog channels Even output address m Even input address 2 I The gain registers allow to set a gain of 1 10 or 100 for every analog channel The bits in the gain registers have the following meanings l Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit0 Gan y o 1 0 o 10 0 i Any 300 1 0 Invalid 1 1 Figure 3 19 Meaning of the bits in an 16 bit gain register PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces If the gain register of channel 0 has the address 140 the gain is programmed with the following commands Gain 1 L KH 0000 T PW 140 Gain 10 L KH 4000 T PW 140 Gain 100 L KH 8000 T PW 140 When a channel is to be used as current input it has to be programmed with a gain of 10 15 11 0 Bit 12 bit analog value oet gain 5003A313 Figure 3 20 Structure of a 16 bit analog register PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 3 User Interfaces If the analog register has for example the address 132 the value
441. ster width 1 The number 81 for the IB ST 24 DO 8 3 2A module in the Length code column was given in a hexadecimal format The correct decimal value is 129 The number 1 is of no importance The footnote text for both length specifications refers to firmware versions below version 3 5 2 PHOENIX 5003BC04 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 The numbers for the IBS IP CDI 1 24 F IBS IP CDI 2 24 F IBS IP CDO 1 24 F IBS IP CDO 2 24 F IB ST 24 DI 16 4 modules were given one byte too small in the Register width column The register width is 2 bytes for the above modules The numbers for the IB ST 24 DI 32 2 and IB ST 24 DO 32 2 modules were given two bytes too small in the Register width column both in bytes The register width for the above mo dules is 4 bytes Chapter 3 1 ID Code of the Modules Page 3 5 Table 3 3 The numbers for the InterBus S module IBS 24 IP DIO BB1 E T were given one byte too small in the columns OUT AR and Register width both numbers in bytes For this module the register width is 4 bytes and the assigned output address area is 2 bytes Chapter 3 5 7 Digital Modules with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs Page 3 30 Figure 3 17 The bit designations for byte and byte m were reversed in Figure 3 17 The correct bit assignment is shown in the following figure 5003C3
442. stics shows Error group Error location Error code Display blinks or READY P off Controller board is defective and must CTRL ERR RB ERR LB ERR MOD ERR Y Y See user manual Error is indicated of the controller Attention observe logical and Indicator LED on the BK Attention Bus stopped LED on the module Hand Held Monitor Attention Bus stopped board physical addressing be replaced Check the bus segment with errors Y Y Y RB LB MOD Error Error Error Remote bus cabling Local bus cabling Failure of peripheral Bus terminal supply I O module voltage sensor or actutator AttentionBus still running oy bor Hepair the system b Perform a RESET Clear error display observe system description a By means of the application program Attention Perform a RESET only when the PLC is in the STOP state and if it is permitted by the application program the outputs are reset owitch PLC voltage off and on again 5003B403 Figure 4 3 Sequence diagram for error diagnostics 5003B PHCENIX ud CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 2 1 Indication of Errors on the Front Plate Different indicators of the front plate will be described in the following and what happens
443. supplies the BK electronics and via the local bus cable the bus logic of the connected I O modules The voltage supplied at the respective I O module serves to supply the peripheral side which is electrically isolated from the bus logic If the voltage fails in the bus terminal module the INTERBUS S system stops and the controller board reports an error for the remote bus segment concerned When calculating the sum of the I O points please observe that for modules with inputs and outputs only the simple register width is taken for calculating the total sum 1 18 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT Chapter 2 Technical Description This chapter provides information on the functions of the operating and display elements of the controller board the project planning of the controller board the hardware settings in order to get different modes of operation the technical data THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical DescripHIO ucoesoiotuddsuuzunudsununso2aa rus ruo a NO aaia 2 1 2 1 Host Controller Board Method of 006 2 1 2 2 Application Area of the Host Controller Board 2 2 2 3 QV GIVI SW O ERREUR 2 3 2 3 1 Front Plate Components
444. t 6 Initialize vectors Test interrupt logic 4 MPM test 3 Function test of the IPMS 2 Function test of the DUART 1 General initialization phase 00 When an error is detected the seven segment display blinks Several routines provide additional information about the error which is then alternately blinking with the number of the routine 35 When the display blinks replace the controller board Please specify the display values when you send in the board for repairs 4 28 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 5 2 Acknowledgment after an Error The diagnostic indicators on the front plate of the controller board indicate errors of the INTERBUS S system The red LEDs indicate the type of error The seven segment display further classifies the error Except for the module error MOD INTERBUS S is always stopped after an error occurred RUN LED is off If the bus is in the STOP state the I O data does not correspond to the up to date signal states There must be no access to the bus address After the error has been removed INTERBUS S can be started again The start behavior depends on the selected mode and the error cause Clearing the error display and automatic start In the automatic start mode INTERBUS S can either be started by applying the PLC s supply voltage power up or by pushing the RESET button A RESET mu
445. t Out In01 Switch and Reset Out In10 Switch instructions The instructions Reset Out In01 Switch and Reset Out In10 Switch have the same function as the previous instructions however with the difference that the specified bit of the bit manipulation register is additionally tested If this bit is O the respective instruction is not effective oeveral bit manipulation registers may be defined Bit manipulation registers are addressed by defining a pseudo module ID code 0013h as the last module of the configuration using the Check Physical Configuration Request service Afterwards this module is assigned the address of the bit manipulation register using the logical addressing 9 32 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages otructure of the Bit Copy 000D instruction oyntax 1 Bit Copy 000D 2 Output address 3 Bit number for the output address B 4 Input address 5 Bit number for the input address B Key B Bit number 0000 hex to OOOF hex Function of the Bit Copy instruction This instruction copies the input bit specified with the input address and the following bit number to the output bit specified with the output address and the following bit number Structure of the Word Copy Bit Mask 000E instruction oyntax 1 Word Copy 000 2 Output address 3 Input address 4 Bit mask B Key B Bit number 0000 hex to OOOF hex Function o
446. t bit Output of the INTERBUS S module 2 Host output bit Output of the PLC which sets the bus output via INTERBUS S 50038 PHCENIX 8 43 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Sequence 1 Definition of bit manipulation 2 Setting a defined output host output bit by the PLC The module output bus output bit is set via INTERBUS S Bit manipulation is activated when the signal changes from 0 gt 1 In each INTERBUS S cycle the controller board monitors the defined input 3 The defined edge e g from 0 1 is recognized at the bus input bit The bus output bit is reset in the next INTERBUS S cycle General functions of the instructions The instructions control the setting or resetting of a process output data bit bus output bit in view of a process input data bit bus input bit and the output data host output data bit written by the host PLC The bus output bit is reset Bit 0 in the event of an edge of the bus input bit which can be freely selected Instruction Edge of the bus input bit Reset OUT IN01 021 Description of the instructions The bus output bit is reset after the edge of the bus input bit has been evaluated The evaluation of the bus input bit is determined by the instruction The bus output bit is set by setting the host output bit As long as the bus output bit has not yet been reset as a result of the evaluation of the bus input bit the bus output
447. t controlled commands Bit manipulation Diagnostic bit register Alarm messages 5003A229 Figure 2 21 Address locations for controlled start in the DAB mode PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description 2 6 4 Address Windows Three windows are occupied in the PLC s address area For an automatic start or in the DAB mode the size of the first two windows depends on the INTERBUS S system expansion The address area should be calculated so that there is enough space for the module addresses and possible INTERBUS S system expansions The set address area occupies a part of the I O area of the PLC The address area which is set for INTERBUS S is occupied in the PLC s I O area and must not be used by other modules observe mode and operating mode setting Window 1 must be in the P area of the PLC and is reserved for digital I O modules Window 2 can be put in the P area addresses 128 255 and or in the Q area addresses QO to Q255 Window 3 occupies 4 bytes in the PLC s I O area It is used as a communication register between the PLC and the host controller board The communication register must not be processed The DIP switches indicate the base address and the length of the window Length The length of the window is limited to 256 bytes and is set as a quantity in bytes The length of window 3 is an exception because it is permanently set Permanent setting 4 bytes in
448. ta word of the list DW DW 200 Structure of the list Key 6 34 DB DWn KY 000 PC DW n 1 KY 000 BS DW n 2 KY 000 BS DW n PC KY 000 BS PC Quantity of subsequent parameters DB Data block of the message n First data word of the message PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup f Detailed program example with organization function and data blocks FB10 and or FB 11 supplement printed in bold face Always active imi IBG daCKNOWLEOgMmMeENC RB error LB error E 4 0 Acknowledgment button RB LB error UN M 2 0 Edge trigger flag UN E N A RUN bit diagnostic register 5 M 4 0 M 100 BUSY bit of addressing UN E 4 0 R M S SaaS SaaS Se ELTE O M 10 0 ADDRESS BUG bit O M 10 2 RET Dt ON E 12 da Diagnostic bit register RUN bit BEB Active when IBS OK E 4 1 Acknowledgment button MOD error UN M 4 1 Edge trigger flag S M 4 1 S M 50 0 BUSY bit of the ERRINFO UN E 4 1 R M 4 1 L KB 200 Pointer DW of the message T MB 54 L KB 3 Function module error T MB 51 L KB O Parameter no none T MB 52 M 50 0 SPB FB 74 NAME ERRINFO IBDB DB 9 InterBus data block T T 2 Timer used FKT MB 51 Function no NR MB 52 Parameter no DB DB 9 DB of the message DW MB 54 First DW of the message BUSY M 50 0 Activation bit TO M 50 1 Return value RET M 50 2 Timeout BE 5003B PHCENI
449. tains its operating voltage through the connected bus terminal module A clearly arranged key pad allows user friendly handling of the diagnostic unit in conjunction with the four line alphanumeric liquid crystal display LCD The menu prompted interface allows the user to read inputs and to set the outputs directly on the spot and without communication with the PLC Connected in this way the HHM is the master for the local bus This guarantees a large number of diagnostic functions which are indicated in clear text on the LCD After the monitor has been started operation of one single bus segment can be started to enable a gradual and error free startup Starting individual modules e est of the I O modules e Test of the sensor actuators cabling e Test of the sensors and actuators themselves Troubleshooting in individual modules e Local bus cable errors e Module errors e Cabling faults short or open circuit e Failure of sensors and actuators With the Hand Held Monitor the PLC and service technician has a mobile measuring instrument for checking machine and system cabling 5003B PHCENIX dius CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 8 Using the Monitor Program for INTERBUS S on the PC If INTERBUS S is controlled by a PC the IBS MONI monitor program offers a comprehensive test environment It can be used to check installation of the INTERBUS S modules the bus cabling as
450. te 0009 Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Causes 1 No program has been loaded into the PLC 2 Communication registers are overwritten 3 Pointer in the ADDRESS function block points to incorrect data words 4 A command with parameters has been sent and the parameter count was O 5 A parameter without command has been sent to the controller board 6 Ihe host sends one parameter although no parameter is expected because for example the command does not require any parameters Hemedies 1 Load a program 2 Check the setting of window 3 on the hardware DIP switches and on the software FB INITIB side The lowest permissible base address is PW 128 3 6 Check the parameters During the PLC startup every I O address is addressed case 4 6 At the beginning of the addressing the display must be cleared either by means of the INITIB function block or the EEPROM card No Command Parameter 000A Error type User error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle On IB reset Further error Cause An undefined command has been sent Remedy Check the application program e g PCP commands 5003B PHCENIX d CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces No Error Code 000b Error type Firmware error Error LED Controller error IB data cycle Off IB reset RESET Further error Cause Th
451. te bus DB11 Os KY 000 015 Parameter count i KY 000 021 IBS 24 BK I PS KY 000 000 IBS 24 DI 2 KY 000 000 IBS AO 1 23 KY 000 000 LBS 24 DO o KY 000 000 IBS PT 100 A 2 61 KY 000 011 IBS IP DIO 1 24 yu KY 000 022 IBS IP CBK 1 24 F 8 KY 016 023 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 9 KY 016 024 IBS IP CDO 1 24 F 10 KY 016 025 IBS IP CDI 1 24 F 11 KY 000 012 IBS BK I O T l2 KY 000 000 IBS 24 DI 32 133 KY 000 000 IBS AI 3 14 KY 000 000 Diagnostic bit register dro KY 000 000 Diagnostic parameter register tpi 5003B PHCENIX pois CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup DB12 IN address list The IN address list includes the logical input addresses of the modules The list is an image of the ID code list Every place in the list which is occupied by an input module is allocated an input address This address is the base of the module in the PLC In the example DW 12 KY 000 038 IBS 24 DI 32 The digital input module with 32 inputs becomes visible in the PLC in input words 38 and 40 otructure of the list DB x DW y KY 000 PC Parameter count DW y 1 KY B ADR 1st module DW y 2 KY B ADR 2nd module DW y n 2 KY B ADR nth module DW y n 1 KY B ADR Special ID code DW y n kY B ADR opecial ID code Key PC Quantity of subsequent parameters n B Address area 0 P area of the PLC 1 Q area of the PLC ADR Base address of the module
452. temperature calculation for the 3 40 IBS SYS SWT 2 22 5 13 5 16 7 10 ID code 4 25 5 18 5 13 8 66 ID code list 6 1 8 66 ID cycle 1 3 ID numbers 8 30 Identification codes 8 55 Identify Confirmation 8 104 Identify Request 8 101 Implement All Logical Address Map 8 27 8 31 8 32 8 33 8 57 IN address list 8 68 IN address 8 36 Indication service primitive 8 84 Indications 8 92 for operating mode and error type 3 1 Indicators bus specific 4 32 device specific 4 32 Information Report Request 8 101 8 107 8 108 Init Communication 8 27 8 34 Initial configuration structure of the 5 16 Initialization block 5 6 5 7 8 2 8 86 Initialization 8 87 8 88 8 110 Initiate Confirmation 8 104 Initiate Error Confirmation 8 105 Initiate Request 8 101 Initiate 8 116 Initiate Request 8 112 INITIB 8 6 8 8 8 86 8 110 Input addresses 8 68 Input and output area of the PLC 2 12 Input bit 8 43 Input byte O in the PLC s I O area 2 12 Installation remote bus 1 3 1 10 13 14 16 cable 1 13 modules 6 1 number of I O modules in the 1 14 station 8 52 Installation user manual 7 2 Installation 2 9 7 1 INTERBUS data block 8 10 8 18 delay 8 27 I O modules 1 18 in the PLC s address area 2 25 management functions 8 1 protocol chip IPMS 2 1 protocol sequence 1 5 remote bus connector 2 1 scan time calculation 1 6 system voltage supply of the 7 2 system control 5 8 system expansion 2 30
453. ter Count Invoke ID Communication Invoke ID Communication Reference Reference Result Result EmorClass Error Code Add Code 50038 PHCENIX 8 109 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 4 4 Use of Communication Prerequisites e Mode of operation controlled start e Software ISFP CON IND and REQ RES blocks in the cyclic program Initialization e Startup The INITIB function block must be called during startup It performs initialization for all further standard function blocks The standard data blocks RRST CIST and the flag words RRMW and CIMW must be specified in the INITIB function block e Interface drivers The two interface drivers must be called conditionally in the cyclic program CON IND is called at the start of the organization block OB 1 REQ RES is called at the end of the organization block OB 1 e Addressing Addressing is initiated by way of the ADDRESS function block One KR is assigned to each module that is capable of communication Counting begins with KR 2 in the direction of the physical bus structure up to a maximum of KR 63 Communication is initialized once all lists have been transferred by the ADDRESS function block Once all commands have been acknowledged positively the bus is capable of communication and is in the RUN mode Application Further communication commands depend on the connected har
454. terfaces 3 4 Logical Addressing DCB Mode The bus topology in this example for the LOGICAL ADDRESSING is identical with Figure 3 2 3 4 1 Function In contrast to the PHYSICAL ADDRESSING the addresses for the INTERBUS S modules are assigned independently of the two windows when LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used The addresses of the individual I O modules can be freely selected when logical addressing is used The address area in the PLC for the modules must not be used by other devices The free selection of the addresses facilitates the insertion and removal of modules as the modules keep their addresses and the addresses are not shifted Address list link the physical and the logical address configurations The address lists are stored as data blocks in the PLC or as an address list in the EEPROM memory card When the PLC or the controller board are started the address lists address the I O modules in the PLC s I O area With the help of a programmer under MS DOS you may enter constants for the address lists in the data blocks or the EEPROM card When the LOGICAL ADDRESSING is used the addresses of the modules are not determined by the bus topology but the user can freely assign them for every module The link of the digital modules to window 1 and the analog modules to window 2 is removed for the LOGICAL ADDRESSING All addresses which have been entered in the following lists should be regarded as examples and can certainly be assigned
455. ters are defined with the logical addressing Only the defined addresses will be acknowledged to the PLC the smallest unit is 1 word an even base address is permitted DAB mode In this operating mode all addresses are acknowledged which were previously defined with the window settings a Automatic start otarting at the base addresses of windows 1 and 2 all modules are addressed and acknowledged The address area of the l Os depends on the space requirement of the modules The setting of the window area refers to the I O area of the PLC The diagnostic registers are located below the base addresses If the length specification of the windows is larger than the space requirement of the modules the unassigned addresses will also be acknowledged When the automatic start is used the set window lengths for the I O address area of the modules is not checked for its correct setting 2 26 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description b Controlled start All module and register addresses e g diagnostic registers must be defined within the window area by means of logical addressing All window addresses are acknowledged 33 The communication registers window 3 must be set independently of the start automatic controlled and mode setting DAB DCB 2 6 3 1 INTERBUS S in the PLC s Address Area INTERBUS S occupies one part of the PLC s I O address area The size of the
456. than have been specified in the KBL 0 Other Cause The error cannot be assigned to an error code Error class 5 service This type of errors is reported if a service contains an error Table 8 26 Service specific error messages error class 5 service Error code Explanation 1 Object State Contlict Cause The current state of the object is preventing execution of the service 2 PDU Size Cause The message length has been exceeded 3 Object Constraint Conflict Cause The service can currently not be executed 4 Parameter Inconsistent Cause The service contains inconsistent parameters 5 Illegal Parameter Cause A parameter has assumed an invalid value 0 Other The error cannot be assigned to an error code 8 118 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Error class 6 access This type of errors is reported if access involves errors Table 8 27 Service specific error messages error class 6 access Error code Explanation Cause The access refers to a defined object that has an undefined reference attribute this represents a permanent 1 Object Invalidated error in relation to access to this object 2 Hardware Fault Cause Access to the object has failed owing to a hardware fault 3 Object Access Denied Cause The PMS client has no adequate access privileges for the object 4 Address Invalid Cause The specifi
457. the Function Blocks 8 86 8 4 1 3 Initialization Addressing nne 8 87 8 4 1 4 ICS ETT TE 8 89 8 4 1 5 Service Execution 8 90 8 4 1 6 Aciivaton Flag Servite faatrcncauanecncuisen masatecnsiasnresauniesanmenectmuaccdaanansemuntes 8 90 8 4 1 7 Message Flag Service 8 92 8 4 1 8 Principal Service Sequence 8 94 8 4 1 9 Example of a Service 8 96 8 4 2 92206 8 97 8 4 2 1 Road IRC CUS cl 8 100 8 4 2 2 We Fe CIC SV E c 8 100 8 4 2 3 ola EIOS essre nann EE DDR ERRE DIU MN NOE SHN DUC RIA 8 100 8 4 2 4 i019 d e210 1 Tor R om 8 100 8 4 2 5 Information Report 80 691
458. the controlled start mode and hex expects commands from the PLC ISFP blocks or the EEPROM card e The ISFP blocks were not called e The EEPROM card was not programmed The hardware setting of window 3 does not correspond with the parameterization ISFP of the INITIB block b The PLC has accessed the communication registers window 3 e Double addressing of window 3 with other PLC modules e Access to window 3 via the application program e Base address of window 3 is in the process image of the PLC e A command was written without parameters The controller board has transmitted a message error OC message acknowledgment to a command and did hex not get it from the PLC within 5 seconds ISFP block CON IND Insert the CON IND block in the application program or disable the message with the DISABLE ALL MESSAGES command see Chapter 9 Commands and Messages or the INITIB function block by means of AV 3 Addressing error during logical addressing 2b Check the LB IN and OUT address list hex With the EREG byte the addressing block indicates the erroneous list 68 The hardware configuration modules in the bus hex architecture does not agree with the ID code list Observe the EREG byte of the addressing block Figure 4 9 Parameterization error PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces O0 1
459. the next chapter also InterBus S host controller board PLC Remote bus segment max 400 m Remote bus max 12 8 km o Remote bus segment max 400 m 50014102 Figure 1 5 Structure and maximum dimensions of the remote bus 1 12 PHCENIX is CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview Remote bus Max number of remote bus segments for controller boards incl installation remote bus DCB 256 DAB 64 PC CB COP I T 256 PC CB I T 256 PC AT T 32 Max length of a remote bus segment 400 m Max bus cable length between host controller board and first remote bus module 400 m two remote bus modules 400 m host controller board and last remote bus module 12 8 km Transmission method RS 485 Transmission medium simple shielded signal line Alternatively the following media may be used for the remote bus Fiber optic cable Slotted waveguide Infrared transmission Slip ring 1 3 3 Installation Remote Bus The installation remote bus is a spur line which branches off from the remote bus From the physical point of view it is a remote bus A corresponding bus terminal module e g IBS IP CBK couples the installation remote bus to the main remote bus cable Apart from the actual 24 V DC data lines the
460. the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins A 0 IBOK 1 Error B OOK 1 Fatal error when E04 E06 occurs then the low nibble 1 and the high nibble 4 6 CC Quantity of installation remote bus errors DD Quantity of local bus errors RR Installation remote bus number LL Local bus number 8 76 PHCENIX poe CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 02 Invaidl O moduelDcode 03 Specifiedlocalbusmissing 04 Local bus is longer than specified 05 Localbusisshorterthanspecified 06 Invalid local bus module 07 Configuration could not be readin 08 Local bus in wrong postion 09 Remote bus is shorter than expected 4 OA Identifier for multiplexer error 0B Configuration longer than expected 00 Maximum configuration exceeded ss 8 2 6 3 Defective Group FKT 2 After the SYSERROR function block has signaled a bus error by means of the BUS bit the Defective Group function can be used to recall the number of the defective groups The pointers DB and DW point to the memory area in which the numbers of the defective groups are stored If a bus error occurred in the system the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If the system runs without bus errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 i e the query of the error cause results in a negative acknowledgment of the Defective Gr
461. tion FB 68 FKT 6 is activated Parameter meanings example EE DW m 0 KY 000 00K m 1 KY 000 000 Bus terminal module m 2 KY 000 000 Local bus module IN addresses only m 3 KY 00Y XXX Local bus module OUT addresses only m 4 KY 00Y XXX Local bus module OUT addresses only m 5 KY 00Y XXX Local bus module IN and OUT addresses m 6 KY 000 000 Local bus module IN addresses only m k 2 KY 000 000 Bus terminal module m k 1 KY 00Y XXX Local bus module OUT addresses only m k KY 00Y XXX Local bus module IN and OUT addresses In the bus configuration the 3rd 4th 5th k 1 th and kth module has OUT addresses n No of the DB in which the parameter list is stored m No of the DW with which the parameter list begins K Quantity of subsequent parameters in this case module quantity Y If you use bus stations which exceed a data width of 16 bits or the data of which is accessed in the MPM in steps of 8 bits you should set the Y value in accordance with the following table in order to keep the data consistency when the PLC accesses the MPM Y value Data width Paea Qarea fo 0 1 standard setting 16 bit consistency 2 byte access 64 65 32 bit consistency 4 byte access 128 129 8 bit or 16 bit consistency single access 192 193 48 bit consistency 6 byte access XXX OUT address of the process data Word modules even addresses o
462. tion word KE 422 Signal word PB 89 Auxiliary driver CON IND T O Timer MB 9 Internal flag byte M 8 0 Actelvadicion bit M 8 1 Timeout M 8 2 Return value U M 8 0 SPB LOQB UN M e g BEB STR P Start suppleme AKII BUSY 6 58 nt L KM 00000000 00000001 Bit 0 activated PW 60 AC LAVec on DIC Set register L PW 60 Read busy bit register MW 240 UN M 241 0 Busy bit not active SPB AKTI L KH 0000 T PW 60 ACL iver ton DIC Reset register PW 60 Read busy bit register MW 240 M 241 0 BOSV BXt U 8gtrve PB BUSY PHCENIX CONTACT 5003B NAME IBDB CIDB TO NAME I BDB RRDB TO 5003B onlinecomponents com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 6 Startup SPA FB 62 CON IND DB 9 InterBus data block MB 18 CON IND header table T 1 Timer M 8 3 Timeout SPA FB 66 REQ RES DB 9 InterBus data block MB 19 REQ RES header table T 3 Timer M 8 4 Timeout BE PHCENIX 6 59 CONTACT 6 Startup DB20 Data block CON IND header table online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The service headers which are indicated by the message bits 1 15 are entered into this data block Description Signal bit no 1 CODE Service code PG Quantity of subsequent parameters KR Communication reference DB DW Pointer to the body with data block and data word Oe KA 0000 lst 1 K
463. tivation word CON IND signal word CON IND auxiliary block Occupied timer Internal flag byte Activation bit Timeout bit Return value Figure 8 6 Call OB 20 21 22 PHCENIX CONTACT 8 9 THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 1 2 2 CON IND The CON IND function block FB62 or FB64 is the receive block for the link between the PLC and the controller board With the help of the communication registers window 3 it collects messages from the controller board 35 The address location of the communication registers determines the selection of the driver blocks Addresses Block FB No P area CON IND FB 62 Q area CON NDQ FB 64 To get an optimized response with respect to time this block must be called unconditionally at the start of the cyclic program By way of default the block receives 20 words from the interface in each cycle The user can modify the quantity of parameters 35 The quantity of parameters can be modified in the INTERBUS data block IBDB after the INITIB FB60 function block has been called The standard setting is 20 data words IBDB DL4 Quantity of data words which are transferred for every call of the CON IND FB62 function block Up to one message is received in every cycle even if the message is shorter than the set parameter quantity to be received When a message is received which is longer than the set parameters quantity it takes at least two P
464. tlocatedinwindow1 6 Log addressmotlocatedinwindow2 8 imaldevenadiress 7 10 ieesaedfeem SSS 1 Byteaddressesarelocatedinthesamewod i PHCENIX a CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP 8 2 4 ON OFF FB 71 The functions of the ON OFF block can activate or deactivate events groups or bus terminal alarms A parameter NR determines which event which group or which bus terminal alarm is to be switched Table 8 12 contains the functions which can be executed with the ON OFF function block Each of these functions can be activated by setting the BUSY bit If the respective function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred during function executed the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not be activated within the specified time Table 8 10 Functions of the ON OFF function block FB 71 No Function No Code o GroupON X J No 0 255 1 GroupOFF 0 255 2 BkAamON 0 255 3 BK Alarm OFF 0 255 4 EventON Bits 1 15 All Events ON 0 5 Event OFF T ade 19 All Events OFF 0 SPA FB 71 5003A816 Figure 8 27 Structure of the ON OFF function block FB 71 8 58 PHCENIX POUE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Table 8 11 Parameters of the ON OFF function block FB 71 I
465. tners can order When transferring the sequence to the communication protocol the following is understood to constitute communication e Being able to talk to each other Establishment of a communication relationship Definition of a communication channel e and understanding each other Therecipient of a message should also be capable of translating it Communication As far as communication is concerned a distinction is made between client and server Within the meaning of communication a client is a user process that issues orders The server is the user process executing the order In principle a user process can be both a server and a client In the client the issuing of an order is described by the Request service primitive and the acceptance of the service s order acknowledgment is described by Confirmation service primitive In the server the arrival of the order is represented by the Indication service primitive and the issuing of the order confirmation is represented by the Response service primitive 35 As a rule the application program on the PLC works as a client From firmware 3 5 onwards the PLC can also support a server functionality with the help of a default object dictionary e g for a V 24 client Taking the fields of application into account the PCP communication system provides the user with some services for use of open communication The following services are available to the user 8 84
466. to the INTERBUS S system in the specified way e he address location can be specified independently of the hardware setting of the board PHCENIX x CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Please note that the addressing modes are described in the Chapter User Interfaces Chapter 2 6 3 Startup and Operating Mode Selection describes the different DAB DCB modes 2 16 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 2 Technical Description Hardware settings The different operating and addressing modes the connected PLC and the signaling behavior of the controller board require several presettings The following sequence diagram gives in the left column the description of the setting and in the right column the respective switch A detailed description of the jumpers and DIP switches is given in the Chapter 2 6 Hardware Settings Description Setting Setting Communication registers Switch 5 Installation Central controller Controller expansion unit Jumper 1 Operation Automatic Controlled Switch 6 Mode DAB DCB DAB DCB Switch 6 Window 1 Base YES YES YES NO Switch 1 Length YES YES YES NO Switch 2 Window 2 Base YES YES YES NO whe Length YES YES YES NO Switch 4 YES to be set NO not relevant Interrupt ON OFF Jumper 3 Error message
467. to the data ring Due to the cyclic run of the INTERBUS S protocol all I O data is constantly updated 5003B PHCENIX s CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview 1 2 4 INTERBUS S Scan Time Calculation The scan time of the INTERBUS S systems depends on few factors It increases almost linearly with an increasing number of I O points Due to the high efficiency of the INTERBUS S protocol it is predominantly determined by the number of I O points Furthermore the number of bus terminal modules the check sequence the signal propagation time and the cable length of the bus system also influence the scan time to a minor degree The scan time can be calculated with the following simple formula cycle 13 6 n 1 5 m tpi tgw PH tcycle Transfer time in milliseconds n Number of user data bytes m Number of remote bus modules installed tpgi Bit duration 0 002 ms for 500 kbit s tsw Software runtime 0 2 ms teH Runtime on the transmission medium for copper tPH 0 016 ms I km length of the remote bus cable in kilometers When calculating the sum of I O points please observe that only the simple register length is taken to calculate the total sum for modules that have inputs and outputs Example for determining the bit number which is used for the scan time calculation _Bus terminal module IBS 24 BK I O T 16 bit inputs 16 bit outputs oum for n 16 IBS 24 DI
468. try of the mode parameter in the EEPROM Management Request command the positive acknowledgment may have one of the following two structures Positive messages For mode 1to6 Syntax Quit EEPROM Management 008 Confirmation For mode 6 Syntax Quit EEPROM Management 80F8 Confirmation Parameter block length 0 1 String XXXX 50 otring XXXX Quit EEPROM Programming Confirmation OOFA Meaning After a positive acknowledgment of the EEPROM Management Request this message is sent as a positive transmission confirmation to every successfully transmitted command to the EEPROM Positive message Syntax Quit EEPROM Programming OOFA Confirmation EEPROM Management Error Confirmation 80F9 Meaning Negative acknowledgment of the EEPROM Management Request 0061 command Negative message oyntax EEPROM Management Error 80F9 Confirmation Parameter block length 1 Error number XXXX 5003B PHCENIX ven CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Parameter description Error number Programming started Programming not started Unknown mode Invalid bit number EEPROM or memory card defective or write protected Memory card not plugged in oe ct EEPROM Programming Error Confirmation 80FB Meaning Negative acknowledgment of a command that has been unsuccessfully transmitted to the EEPROM Negative message syntax EEPRO
469. ts Request 002d Disable All Event Request 002E Function The command disables all previously defined event definitions Prerequisite The corresponding event definitions must exist and be valid Receive Events Request 002A command Messages Positive acknowledgment Quit Enable All Events Confirmation 00010 Meaning All existing event definitions are disabled Negative acknowledgment Event Error Confirmation 004C Meaning Error during the event definition Remark There are invalid event definitions old definitions have been deleted syntax Disable All Events Request 002 50038 PHCENIX ver CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 8 Commands for Communication Read KBL Loc Request 0112 Function This command allows to read out an entry of the communication relationship list or the header of this list Prerequisite A communication relationship list must have been previously defined Messages Positive acknowledgment Read KBL Loc Confirmation 81 1B Negative acknowledgment Read KBL Loc Confirmation 81 1B dmn Read KBL Loc Request 0112 Parameter block length sd KR DT 00xx 9 1 9 Commands for the EEPROM Management EEPROM Management Request 0061 Function This service is used to start the programming of service request sequences end the programming of service request sequences delete service request sequences which have alrea
470. ts which must be met before a command is called to allow its successful processing Messages Positive Message which confirms a positive execution of the acknowledgement command Meaning Explanation of the message Hemark Further information on the message Negative Message which indicates that an error occurred while acknowledgment the command was executed Meaning Explanation of the error reason Hemark Further information on the message The syntax of a command with parameters is as follows oyntax Name of the command Code Structure of the command The key explains the parameters which have been used for the syntax description Key Dummy Description of the parameter variable The syntax of a command without parameters is described as follows oyntax Name of the command Code 5003B PHCENIX us CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages 9 1 1 Commands for Bus Operation Start Bus Cycle Request 0001 Function The command activates the cyclic data traffic on the bus Depending on the previously loaded definitions e g logical addressing group definitions the controller board puts the bus configuration into operation and makes the I O addresses available to the PLC Prerequisite Logical addressing of local bus error for group definition Messages Positive acknowledgment Start Bus Confirmation 0088 Remark The IB RUN LED is illuminated Meani
471. tween I O modules in the remote bus and or installation remote bus and the I O modules in the local bus 1 3 6 1 Remote Bus and Installation Remote Bus Modules Besides I O modules for digital and analog signals there are I O modules with bus terminal functionality such as IBS 24 BK I O T and operator terminals valve terminals DRIVECOM devices ENCOM devices etc If the supply voltage U CDO CDI Uj fails in a remote bus or installation remote bus module the INTERBUS S system is stopped and an error message for the respective remote bus segment is output For the INTERBUS S system operation it is necessary that the bus logic of all modules is supplied with voltage The voltage U for supplying the bus logic is for remote and local bus modules directly connected to every I O module and every BK installation remote bus modules provided via the special installation remote bus cable The voltage is supplied through the BK which is coupled to the main line in the respective installation remote bus i 1 3 6 2 Local Bus Modules Local bus modules are I O modules for the variable and cost effective installation in a decentralized switch cabinet In a local bus the modules can be combined with regard to their respective control and monitoring tasks The local bus modules of a local bus are coupled through a bus terminal module to the main remote bus line The bus terminal module features an integrated power pack It
472. uantity XX Communication reference 2 63 8 34 PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 2 6 Event Map FKT 5 An event indicates level changes of a predefined input Events for digital input modules are programmed with this function s parameters If Event Map function has been executed without errors the RETURN bit is set to the value ZERO RET 0 If an error occurred when the function was executed the RETURN bit is set to the value ONE RET 1 The TIMEOUT bit is set TO 1 if the function could not be activated in the specified time 35 The events do not yet take effect after definition of the event map Any existing event definitions are canceled by execution of this command After the definition the events must also be activated by means of the ON OFF FB 71 FKT 4 function block Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 OOK m 0 5 1 KM XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Identifier event 1 m 0 5 2 KH 0004 Event code m 0 5 3 KY 000 AAA Address m 0 5 4 KM PPPP PPPP PPPP PPPP Mask 1 m 0 5 5 KM NNNN NNNN NNNN NNNN Mask 2 m 1 5 1 KM XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Identifier event 2 m 1 5 2 KH 0004 Event code m 1 5 3 KY 000 AAA Address m 1 5 4 KM PPPP PPPP PPPP PPPP Mask 1 m 1 5 5 KM NNNN NNNN NNNN NNNN Mask 2 m v 1 5 1 KM XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Identifier event v m v 1 5 2KH 0004 Event
473. uated if no command sequence is executed Therefore the setting and clearing of the action bit during the execution of another command sequence cannot lead to the execution of the associated command sequences Also in order to have an easy to maintain program sequence it is recommended 33 to initiate the command sequences one after another in order to define the processing order 5003BC04 PHCENIX 15 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS oupplementary Notes February 1996 New Firmware Revision V3 73 for the IBS S5 DCB I T Controller Board for SIMATIC S5 PLCs Owing to functional extensions technical improvements and corrections in the firmware there are some innovations for the IBS S5 DCB l T controller board for SIMATIC S5 PLCs Controller boards and documentation concerned Boards IBS S5 DCB I T Order No 27 58 156 IBS S5 DCB T Order No 28 06 21 5 Firmware Previous version 3 72 Update version 3 73 Upgrade A hardware upgrade with the update version is possible with Hardware version IBS GB S5 9166835 C Plug on board type MA5 The firmware can be updated as of Firmware version 3 3x User manuals German IBS S5 DCB UM Order No 28 06 23 1 English IBS S5 DCB UM E Order No 27 58 36 3 Changed Position of the Analysis Bit When the firmware was updated to revision 3 73 the analysis bit in the diagnostic bit register was shifted from position 15 to posit
474. ule e Connection establishment Connection is established with the Initiate Request service primitive e Program dependent service requests Request Response The commands used depend on the specific module and application e Connection abort Connection is aborted with the ABORT Request service primitive Every connection established requires a certain amount of administration on the PLC To minimize this work unnecessary connections should be avoided It is expedient to abort a connection whenever a PCP station is addressed seldom For example when a frequency inverter is parameterized once it is not necessary to maintain the connection any longer It is not expedient to abort connections of highly frequented PCP stations because renewed establishment of a connection takes an unnecessarily long time Examples will elucidate the sequence of communication and the program structure needed The programs created for this purpose are included with the standard software e Example for a Count File IBSCNTST S5D e Example for a V 24 module File IBSV24ST S5D 35 The connection has to be monitored during the entire program run After the connection has been aborted ABORT the station cannot be addressed until the connection has been established again INITIATE 8 112 PHCENI X 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 4 5 Communication Error Messages 8 4 5 1 Error Messages for a Connection Abort If an e
475. ules I O modules Up to 8 modules are allowed on one local bus The first I O module M is coupled to the first bus terminal module Mg the second I O module M is coupled to the first one etc The address length in words occupied by the module is entered in the left byte Only the number of I O addresses is taken into account e g IBS DO 32 2 two words Parameter meanings DB n DW m 0 KY 000 XXX Parameter count m 1 KY ZZZ YYY ID code module 0 m 2 KY ZZZ YYY ID code module 1 m 3 KY ZZZ YYY ID code module 2 m k KY ZZZ YYY ID code module k 1 n No of the data block DB in which the parameter list is stored m Data word DW with which the parameter list begins ZZZ Length code the address length in words occupied by the module YYY Module identification code XXX Parameter count 3 A list with the ID codes of the IBS modules can be found in Chapter 3 User Interfaces 8 66 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 2 5 2 Bus Segment Address List Addresses i e the logical numbers of the local buses are entered in this list This list is drawn up on the basis of the physical bus structure An entry is made only at the position occupied by a bus terminal module Each further module is represented by a 0 The parameter quantity module quantity is entered in the first data word m 0 Parameter meanings EE DW m 0 KY 000 OOK Parameter count m 1
476. umbers used 9 62 5003B T 3 PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Tables T 4 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Index Index The figures marked in bold indicate the page on which a definition or short description of the term can be found A Abort ID 8 113 Abort Identifier 8 113 Abort Indication 8 106 Abort Request 8 102 8 112 ABORT 8 111 Access 8 119 Acknowledgement behavior of the controller board 2 24 6 4 Acknowledgement delay message 2 38 Acknowledgement delay 2 18 Activation bit register 5 13 Activation blocks 5 10 Activation flag 8 90 8 95 Adapter cable 7 6 Additional error messages 8 116 Address allocation for the modules 6 1 length 8 66 list 6 2 Address locations for automatic start in the DAB mode 2 28 for automatic start in the DCB mode 2 26 for controlled start and the DAB mode 2 29 for controlled start in the DCB mode 2 27 ADDRESS 2 5 4 27 8 22 8 62 8 86 8 88 8 110 Addresses of the individual I O modules 6 2 Addressing 8 87 8 88 8 110 analog inputs 3 13 analog outputs 3 13 block 8 86 byte oriented 3 15 digital inputs 3 12 digital outputs 3 13 logical 3 8 3 18 3 23 29 physical 3 8 3 12 slot oriented 3 12 word oriented 3 14 Advanced package 7 8 5003B Alarm stop 8 26 Application reference 8 117 Application registers 2 13 Area of application of the host controller
477. unction Blocks 8 86 8 4 1 3 Initialization Addressing enne 8 87 8 4 1 4 CIVICS Men DEN cela lee nA DUM SU 8 89 8 4 1 5 Service EXSCULGM uiis 8 90 8 4 1 6 Activation Flag SCI VICE utei sister nccnbEvixisestcdeviviti data UM Ui uL du M MN URMO 8 90 8 4 1 7 Message Flag Service nennen 8 92 50038 PHCENIX v CONTACT online components com THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Contents 8 4 1 8 Principal Service Sequence nnns 8 94 8 4 1 9 Example ol CIV CC xxemviprueh duce E EEO 8 96 8 4 2 Request Confirmation nennen nnns 8 97 8 4 2 1 edt ROUCO Deena E RE E E E E TINI XN REDE MR UNE 8 100 8 4 2 2 adig ei E E EE E 8 100 8 4 2 3 NY TRO E 8 100 8 4 2 4 OPRETTE S oree a ER 8 100 8 4 2 5 Information Report 80 691 enm 8 101 8 4 2 6 AUS REIU 2 8 101 8 4 2 7 Identify 80
478. up there are two function blocks which are permanently addressed These blocks are called receive and send block They form the link between the PLC ISFP interface and the controller board The blocks interface drivers become only active when commands are sent or messages are received The third group of blocks is related to the application That means that only the function blocks which are currently required are called e g for addressing system information event handling IS A description of the flag bits times and data blocks used by the function blocks is given in the Appendix PHCENIX CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 5 System Interfaces otart up A SPA FB 60 NITIB Cyclic program B SPA CON IND C SPAFByy C1 SPBFBxx 22 D SPA REQRES 5003A505 A Initialization block B Interface driver C Application program function blocks C1 Event signalling block passive block C2 Command block active block D Interface driver Figure 5 4 Principle call structure of the blocks The structure shows the position of the different blocks and their calls in the program Description of the structure During the PLC startup the program calls the initialization block This block synchronizes the controller board with the PLC and does p
479. ure 8086 Command Code Parameter Count Communication Reference 8 4 2 7 Identify Request Structure 8087 Command Code Parameter Count Communication Heference 8 4 2 8 Initiate Request Command Code Parameter Count Structure 808B Communication Reference 5003B PHCENIX CONTACT 8 101 8 ISFP 8 4 2 9 Abort Request Command Code Parameter Count Structure 808D Communication Reference Locally Generated 8 4 2 10 Read Confirmation i Positive 8181 Structure Message Code Parameter Count Communication Heference 8 4 2 11 Write Confirmation Positive 8182 Structure Message Code Parameter Count Communication Reference 8 102 PHCENIX THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Negative 8181 Message Code Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Reference Negative 8182 Message Code Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Reference Result Error Class Error Code Add Code Add Code 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 4 2 12 Start Confirmation otructure Positive Negative 8183 8183 Message Code Message Code Parameter Count Parameter Count Invoke ID Communication Invoke ID Communication Reference Reference Result Result ErrorClass
480. vice after a waiting time of approx 30 ms If this error occurs continuously in Layer 2 please contact the manufacturer J 0 J O 8 114 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 8 ISFP Table 8 19 Error messages for a connection abort cont d AbortID RC Explanation 3 20 LR Local Resource Not Available e System error or PMS Page 8 122 3 21 IV Invalid 3 32 e CRC error Transmitted data contains errors Cause Perhaps interferences on the data line Please inform the manufacturer of the local PCP station Please inform the manufacturer of the remote PCP station 8 4 5 2 Error Messages for the Reject Service The reject code specifies the reason why the PDU message was rejected Table 8 20 Error messages for the reject service Reject code Explanation 1 Invoke ID Exists Cause An Invoke ID already in use has been used again Cause More service requests were sent than defined in the KBL e g 2 Read requests to the same station without having waited for the confirmation 2 Max Services Overflow confirmed services only 3 oervice Not Supported connection oriented only Cause The service sent is not supported as a client 4 Reserved 5 PDU Size Cause The maximum PDU length message length has been exceeded 6 Reserved Cause IBS specific no resources free 0 Other Cause Other
481. voltage supply lines for the module electronics and the initiators are also carried in the special installation remote bus cable hybrid cable 5003B PHCENIX iere CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 1 System Overview Installation remote bus Incoming max 50 meters remote bus IBS IP CBK IBS IP CDI IBS IP CDO IBS IP CDO Oooooo o 9 QE dec CMS pue o 000 000 Oooo Outgoing remote bus 5001A105 Figure 1 6 Structure and maximum dimensions of the installation remote bus 3 Remote bus and installation remote bus are often referred to by their abbreviation RB Please take this into account for the error messages of the host controller boards Chapter 5 The installation remote bus interface is designed especially to connect the INTERBUS S I O modules IBS IP CDI and IBS IP CDO with the IP 65 degree of protection It is possible to integrate all remote bus modules with a two wire interface into the installation remote bus It is not possible to set up another spur with a bus terminal module Basic installation remote bus specifications Max bus cable length between CBK bus terminal and first I O module 50 m CBK bus terminal and last I O module 50m Max current carrying capacity of the hybrid cable 4 5 A The number of I O modules in the installation remote bus is limited by the current N consumption of the modules and the connected initiators The
482. ware or software error Controller error Off RESET Checksum error due to a falsified or missing checksum Please contact Phoenix Contact PHCENIX 50038 CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Chapter 5 System Interfaces This chapter provides information on the different hardware and software interfaces which change the controller board s functionality the structure and the functions of the ISFP and IBS SYS SWT software 5 System Interfaces M 5 1 5 1 Interface Description 5 1 5 1 1 interlace PUNGCHON QNT S S LTEM 5 2 5 1 2 Interface Classification nennen 5 3 5 2 Command and Message Structure 5 4 5 2 1 Structure of Commands and Messages 5 4 5 3 Interface 0850 0 Eoi ca kd rk bn soi acit iba vae bzw d 5 5 5 3 1 PS PERI dm ed 5 5 5 3 1 1 Program Structure
483. well as the wiring of sensors and actuators In contrast to the Hand Held Monitor these functions are called from a central location PC The menu driven program offers the following utilities e Starting an INTERBUS S system on the PC e Testing an INTERBUS S system on the PC e Checking the connected configuration e Getting digital and analog outputs e Displaying the statuses of digital and analog inputs e Resetting the INTERBUS S system outputs 0 Using the cursor keys each module connected on the bus can be selected through its I O address The local bus number the module number the selected channel and the module type are specified in clear text for each module Another field specifies the physical address of the module on the bus The IN data of the selected module is indicated in binary or hexadecimal code Just like the IN data the OUT data can be entered and edited in two number formats Changes are acknowledged by pressing the ENTER key and are accepted by the bus INTERBUS S can be reset with a function key The resetting sets all outputs to the value zero Use of the IBS MONI program supports a structured startup and simplifies troubleshooting 4 34 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 Diagnostic Interfaces 4 9 CTRL Error Displays The following information is given for the errors listed below Error name Error type Error LED IB data cycle IB reset
484. xisting connection has been disconnected with the Abort service the reason for aborting is specified with the aid of several parameters Abort Identifier Abort ID This parameter indicates where the cause of the connection abort was detected Reason Code RC This parameter specifies the reason for the abort Table 8 17 Error messages for a connection abort AbortID RC Explanation 0 User E e The PMS user clears the connection Disconnect The connection could not be established because an error was detected during a check of the KBL parameters Solution Check KBL 1 2 e An invalid or defective service primitive was received by the 1 PMS 1 e Initiate Request was received by the PMS user User Example The connection has not yet been established with Initiate but an attempt was nevertheless made to send a service 1 3 System error 1 4 System error 1 5 System error 1 6 System error e Service is not supported as a server Service not supported 1 8 e When sending the service an invalid Invoke ID was System error of the remote PCP station specified in the local PCP station 1 9 e System error of the remote PCP station More service requests were sent than were defined in the KBL Max Services Overflow 2 LLI 0 e Negative context check Abort Detail contains the LLI Context only partly implemented e LLI parts of the KBLs do not agree Hemedy Che
485. y of subsequent words 1 Parameter number 2 Error number 2 The ERROR NUMBER parameter gives the type of error The parameter number identifies the erroneous parameter Meaning of the ERROR NUMBER parameter Odd number of parameters parameter number equals 1 Unknown logical local bus address The specified module number does not exist The specified module cannot be addressed at the moment because the corresponding segment has been switched off 5 The necessary ID cycles could not run without errors The error number 5 is the only response used for the Quit Module Error All Request 0065 command 9 50 PHCENIX 5003B CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Module Error Indication 80A0 Meaning An error was detected on a module with bus acknowledgment oyntax Module Error Indication 80A0 Quantity of subsequent words 1 Logical local bus address 1 XxxX n Logical local bus address n xxxx Key PC Parameter count local bus quantity XXXX Logical local bus address Possible errors e Failure of the I O voltage e Defective fuse e Responding of the current limit control Parameters 1 to n give the logical addresses of local buses which contain modules Power Fail Indication 80A1 Meaning The supply voltage 9 volts of a local bus failed on a bus terminal module The parameter gives the logical address of the loca
486. ype of addressing enter the logical or physical address in the LOGICAL BUS SEGMENT ADDRESS parameter All bus segments BS except for the segments in the installation remote buses are to be assigned to groups BS addresses must only exist once Group numbers may be assigned several times Receive Group Numbers Request 0049 Quantity of subsequent words Logical bus segment address 1 00xx 2 Group number for BS 1 OOxx 2 n 1 Logical bus segment address n 00xx 2 n Group number for BS n OOxx PC Parameter count 2 n where n is the quantity of local buses 20 00 xx x FF hex corresponds to 000 255 decimal PHCENIX DOE CONTACT THE ONLINE DISTRIBUTOR OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9 Commands and Messages Switch Group On Request 0020 Function Prerequisite Messages oyntax Key 5003B The command switches on a group of bus segments which has been defined by the Receive Group Numbers Request 0049 command before The segments which have been switched on are not checked The groups have to be defined before this command is called Positive acknowledgment Switch Group On Confirmation 809E Remark The bus system continues to run with the groups that have been switched on If no groups are switched off the BSA LED goes off lf a group which has been switched on is defective the error messages Bus System Error Indication 0038 and Bus Error Information Indication 80C4

onlinecomponents.com

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents